JP2024029600A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing suitable customer-waiting control.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120 displays a first background display 004SG081 during a first customer-waiting period (first period) after completion of a game (stopping and displaying of a variable display) in a low-base state, and displays a demonstration movie during a second customer-waiting period (second period) after completion of the first customer-waiting period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

As a pachinko gaming machine typified by a gaming machine, a normal background display is displayed during the first customer waiting period after the variable symbol display ends, and during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period ends. , there is one that executes control to display a demonstration display (for example, see Patent Document 1). Furthermore, conventional gaming machines are capable of executing variable displays and are also controllable to a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. When a memory occurs, there is a device that can display an appearance animation in which a pending display based on the pending memory is displayed in stages (for example, see Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-22196 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-97173

In the gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, there was room to improve the marketability.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
a retention storage means;
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The performance control means is
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In the first period and the second period, controlling the third light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table,
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, the N+1 number is displayed. The first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at the corresponding pending display position, and the first mode is completed after the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change in the mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, the N+1 number is displayed. The second mode pending display is started in the second mode starting mode at the corresponding pending display position, and the second mode is completed after the second mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change in the mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, the number N+1 is displayed. Start the first mode hold display in the first mode start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the first mode, and change the first mode start mode to a first mode midway mode different from the first mode completion mode, When the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, the mode is changed to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. displaying the first mode pending display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, the number N+1 is displayed. Start the second mode hold display in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the second mode, and change the second mode start mode to a second mode midway mode different from the second mode completion mode, When the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, the mode is changed to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. displaying the second mode pending display;
The device is in the first mode, the variable display for the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
The device is in the second mode, the variable display of the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. Afterwards, a change to the second mode completion mode is performed over the predetermined period, and the second mode pending display is displayed.
According to this feature, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing aspects of a first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) a second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) a third performance mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 1st production mode. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 22. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern in a 3rd performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the time of starting variable display in the first production mode, and (B) in the second and third production modes. It is a figure showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. It is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of each part during a demo movie. It is a transition diagram of a customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the first scene (company name), (B) is a fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). It is a figure which compares the display mode of the 1st scene (company name), the 4th scene (warning 1, 2), the number of pending memories, and small symbols. It is a figure showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). (A1) to (A8) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing operational examples of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is cold-started. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is cold started. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a low base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when displaying a demo movie ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie over time in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends with a winning start in a low base state. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first winning prize in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting winning in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize winning in the high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize in the high base state. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by operating the handle in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a priority layer. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a high base state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a figure which shows an example of the parent table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the child table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only white button blinking and red button blinking are used during gaming). Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal parent table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal child table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for background time saving. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the background time saving child table. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of a parent table for button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for flashing white buttons. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table for button white blinking. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white flashing. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the flashing red button. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the blinking red button. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the button blinking red. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the error parent table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the error child table. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the error grandchild table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. It is a comparison table showing character animation display. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a list of display timings for displaying a demo movie. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state or a variable probability state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing fluctuation categories. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a hold display performance and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed and the production pattern determination ratio in a normal state, and (C) is an explanation of the performance pattern. It is a diagram. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is executed and the performance pattern determination ratio of the background change performance, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the execution or absence of the reach suggestion performance and the performance pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern determination ratio. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the time saving state and the variable probability state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 1st continuous crack effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 2nd continuous crack effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a dialogue preview performance. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of a part of operation example of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of weak development effect. It is a figure showing the details of a part of operation example of strong development production A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of cut-in effect|action. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating details of an operation example of a result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is a timing chart showing details of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. It is a timing chart showing details of dialogue preview production. 5 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect A. 7 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect B. FIG. It is a timing chart showing the details of a pseudo continuous performance. It is a timing chart showing the details of reach suggestion performance. It is a timing chart showing details of weak development performance. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development effect B. It is a timing chart showing details of cut-in performance. It is a timing chart showing details of result notification performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing speed change of a fragment image in each performance. It is a figure which shows the crack pattern in crack production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of each crack pattern. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern E. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a crack pattern G with a whiteout image and without a whiteout image. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a pseudo continuous effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in background change effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 4 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 5 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 6 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 7 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 8 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 10 of this invention. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the main board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of each drawing area. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram showing a losing performance determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a normal state, (B) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a variable probability state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of a jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram of each game state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the special symbol unit, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the special symbol, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the presentation display unit, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram of a display. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an input port. It is an explanatory diagram showing an output port. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing 2-byte buffers each formed in a RAM used in switch processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of random number update processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol buffer shift processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display processing. It is an explanatory view of lighting control mode of each hold indicator. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display control processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display control processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the command transmission timing due to the occurrence of a starting prize and the start timing of the light emission control of the hold display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command transmission timing at the start of variable display and the state after subtracting the number of hold memories of the hold display. (C) is an explanatory diagram of the emission control start timing of the special symbol and the subtraction start timing of the variable display time at the start of the variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a production mode change opportunity in production mode decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a pending change performance and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of flash effect processing at the time of winning a prize. It is an explanatory diagram of the ratio of determining whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of button vibration production processing. It is an explanatory view of lighting control mode of each sub-hold indicator. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the processing cycle of the CPU and the CPU for effect control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation execution period for each effect mode. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode A, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode B, and (C1 ) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode C, and (D1) and (D2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in production mode D. It is an explanatory view showing appearance animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory view showing appearance animation in production mode A. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a movement mode of a hold display in an appearance animation in production mode A. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation. It is an explanatory diagram showing appearance animation in production mode B. It is an explanatory diagram showing appearance animation in production mode B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an appearance animation in production mode C. It is an explanatory diagram showing an appearance animation in production mode D. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a staying animation in production mode A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a staying animation in production mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode B, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in production mode C. , (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the end animation in production mode D. It is an explanatory view showing a shift animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory view showing a shift animation in production mode A. It is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in production mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the active display area and the pending display area in each production mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of animation in each production mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. It is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram of an appearance animation when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation is started at a timing 660 ms or more before the start of the next variable display. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation is started at a timing less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a shift animation after the end of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 and after the start of the next variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where pending storage occurs at a timing within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display after the completion of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms until the start of the next variable display after the end of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. It is an explanatory diagram when a new start winning prize occurs during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is four. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory is generated in the shift animation space of the next variable display after the end of the variable display where the number of pending memories is four. It is an explanatory diagram when a new starting winning occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display with the number of pending memories being 4. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms from the start of the next variable display after the end of the variable display in which the number of pending memories is 4. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0, and an appearance animation is started at a timing of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated during a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0, and an appearance animation is started at a timing of less than 660 ms until the start of the next variable display. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms after the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms until the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs at a timing of 33 ms or more after the end of the symbol determination period of a variable display in which the number of pending memories is 0. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding variable display start timing when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding variable display start timing when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 1 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of a pending display and a pending display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory is generated during execution of variable display. It is a comparison diagram of each production. It is an explanatory diagram when storing the random number value extracted in the starting port switch passing process. It is an explanatory diagram of special buffer shift processing. It is an explanatory diagram of special buffer shift processing. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. It is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in production mode C or production mode D. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where pending storage occurs continuously. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not executed;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIGS. 18 and 19). , Figure 38, Figure 39, Figure 40, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything at once. , the user can be made aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, switching from the normal state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the special state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Fig. 18, Fig. 19, Fig. 38, Fig. 39, Fig. 40, Fig. 42, Fig. 43, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the display of the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the luminance data table for demonstration display has a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal state background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special state background display. (Figure 80, Figure 84, Figure 88, Figure 92, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display. Since the color of the initial brightness data is different, the color of the light emitting means stands out when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display has started, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting. can be controlled.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In the first period and the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 29, 38, Figure 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted, so By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are activated using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
a brightness data table different from the normal state background display brightness data table, the special state background display brightness data table, and the demonstration display brightness data table in a first period after the game in the normal state ends; controlling the third light emitting means using
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table,
controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted. By keeping the mode constant in both the normal state and the special state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the normal state and the special state, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a first scene brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a second scene brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the third light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the first scene brightness data table and the second scene brightness data table,
In the second scene in the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, FIG. 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted. By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the performance operation means is executed, and the first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect operation means is executed. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for promotional effects (Figures 97 to 105, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for making the mode less emphasized than when the operation of the production operation means is prompted, so that the operation of the production operation means is prompted. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is being held, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, since the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are prompted to operate the effect operation means, and as a result, This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided in the game frame (see FIG. 36, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means is provided in the game frame, but it is not managed using the same brightness data table as other light emitting means provided in the game frame, but is managed separately. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform a design to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are prompted to operate the effect operation means, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The display means displays a display indicating that the power is being started after the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated;
The third light emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by emitting light using the brightness data table before the background display, it is possible to confirm whether the light emitting means is normal at the startup stage, and after that, seamless The light emitting mode can be changed to a state where the light is emitted while waiting for a customer, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene, the brightness data table for the title name display, and the brightness data table for the alert display scene is used. controlling the light emitting means using
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (see FIG. 29, etc.)
It is characterized by

Note that the company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacture, and sale of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can make it stand out from other text displays by emitting a dedicated light for each. This can be emphasized through comparison, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a brightness data table different from the first brightness data table is used (Figure 29, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing the capacity, and as a result, a suitable luminance data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene. Customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
Execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 seconds)>Execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene The execution period is such that the execution period (30 sec) is greater than the execution period (5 sec) of the alert display scene,
The character display of the company name and the warning text are characterized in that they may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only during the demonstration display, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, thereby providing suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using the first brightness data table in the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to an animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, and the luminance data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in particular, we want to convey information about the company name, so by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table different from the title name display brightness data table. ,
The title name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data linked to an animation of character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to convey information about the model name in particular, by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
A mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than a mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. and
An aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for title name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than an aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for alerting display scenes. (Figure 28 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can do so by emitting dedicated light for each piece of information. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. I can do it.

The gaming machine of Form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
A mode in which the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is emphasized more than the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. , and an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for title name display scenes is more emphasized than an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. The mode is one of the following: (1) A mode in which there are many blinks, (2) A mode in which there are many lighting colors, (3) A mode in which a large number of light emitting means are used (Fig. 28, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
The aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is more emphasized than the aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for title name display scenes. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name can be emphasized more, it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is associated with, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means in the model introduction scene in the second period using a model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
The plurality of brightness data constituting the company name display scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light,
The plurality of brightness data constituting the model introduction scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means emits light and the second light emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 29, FIGS. 90 to 90). Figure 98)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emit light. By setting the light emitting means to emit light but not emitting light from the second light emitting means, the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means in the first model introduction scene in the second period using a first model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means using a second model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, one brightness data table is used to control the second light emitting means.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, and the first model introduction In the scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that the company name is relatively The displayed scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table,
When a specific effect is executed, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table,
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect is executed are a common brightness data table (FIG. 28, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table that is used in response to the specific performance, the capacity does not need to be increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed;
A rainbow brightness data table used for a second period after the first period after the game ends in the normal state and a second period after the first period after the game ends in the special state. The rainbow brightness data table used and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect executable in the normal state and the special effect executable in the special state are executed are a common brightness data table ( Figure 28, Figure 31, Figure 32, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed in the normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for the possible specific effects and the special effects that can be executed in the special state, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 12-1,
The specific performance and the special performance are characterized in that they are performances that definitively notify that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this feature, since the brightness data table used for the performance that is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part that displays a text display of the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that displays a text display of the subtitle name of the gaming machine,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a subtitle name display part brightness data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part at a timing when the main title name display part switches to the subtitle name display part,
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emitting manner linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name using a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and by displaying the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine is completed. By emitting light, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed as an animation,
The animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is in a mode that is more emphasized than the animated display of the text display to alert people when playing the gaming machine,
The animation of the character display of the title name of the game machine is more emphasized than the animation of the character display to alert people when playing the game machine (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can emphasize it by displaying each with a dedicated display animation. Among them, by emphasizing the display animation of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved. It can be carried out.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene and an attention-calling display scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The display means is
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a prescribed display position;
After that, the character display of the title name of the game machine is displayed as an animation,
In the warning display scene, a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a prescribed display position;
Thereafter, a text display warning when playing the game machine is displayed without animation (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title name of the game is displayed with a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and to call attention, the characters are clearly displayed by avoiding the lingering movement. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes an attention-calling display scene,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The alert display scene includes a first alert display part that displays a text alert for the first event, and a second alert display part that displays a text alert for the second event. ,
The background color of the character display in the first attention display part is different from the background color of the character display in the second attention display part (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using different background colors to call attention to different events, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The background color of the text display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text display in the alert display scene (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using different background colors for displaying the company name and calling attention to it, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying the background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table (FIGS. 50 and 51). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying the normal state background display again;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the special state background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the normal state background display brightness data table to control the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the special state background display brightness data table (Fig. 50 to Figure 52, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. Furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player by the light emission mode of the lamp, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, The light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. It can be carried out.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the variable display in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state. before controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the normal state;
If the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of performance identification information in the special state. Before that, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the special state (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first in the normal state and special state, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of production identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table,
In a second period after the first period after the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends;
If the first starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information. Before switching, controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
If the second starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information. Before switching, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the production identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly confirm that the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the production identification information before the transmittance of the production identification information reaches the second value. (Figure 25, Figure 54, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the production identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
In the normal state, if the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance identification in the normal state from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information,
In the special state, if the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance identification in the special state is started from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display ends. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of production identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance corresponding to the first special identification information is changed from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of identification information,
If the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance corresponding to the second special identification information is started from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to variable display of identification information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, if the switching from the demonstration display is completed before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, the starting condition is met and the demonstration display is started. It is possible to notify that the process has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a firing operation means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the firing operation means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to the background display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display. Switching from the table to the background display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIG. 59, FIG. 60, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing operation means by switching the light emitting means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the table to the menu display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the menu operation means being operated by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, it is possible to notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operating means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the demonstration display may be performed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. controlling the light emitting means by switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table;
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the demonstration display is executed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by first switching the control of the light emitting means, it is possible to immediately notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the background display;
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of sudden switching, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is done without inserting the switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the normal state background display;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the switching display, and then displaying the special state background display,
If an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying the demonstration display in the normal state, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

If the interruption condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed in the special state, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (Fig. 50 ~Figure 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and special state, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented by inserting a switching display to prevent it from appearing to have suddenly changed, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is By showing the sudden change without intervening the switching display, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. .

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
If a power failure occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Then display the demonstration display and
After that, displaying the background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the background display,
If the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, displaying the background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while displaying the guide display at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 44 and 45)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up situation before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). Even at startup, game store staff can check the display by checking the background display, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display after turning on the power, increasing the efficiency of confirmation and further improving the efficiency of the game store. If the background display is displayed when the store is open and players are welcomed, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide clear guidance for production adjustments from the timing of the start of play, and to provide players with guidance. A suitable gaming environment can be provided, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in the special state;
In the above normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
Then display the demonstration display and
Thereafter, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the normal state background display,
In the above special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the special state background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the special state background display (FIGS. 46 to 49, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up status before the game store opens can be considered to be a normal state or a special state, and a guide is displayed so that you can check in the background in which state it has started up. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. If the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide precise guidance for performance adjustments from the timing of the start of the game. A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variation in both the normal state and the special state, thereby preventing unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display is completed. After the game ends, there is a possibility that the players are away from their seats, so by prompting them to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to have them play in a suitable gaming environment. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the special state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guide display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance is displayed immediately after the change of the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state, even after the change of the second special identification information ends. By not displaying this, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demonstration display has ended, there is a possibility that the player is away from his/her seat, so the background will be removed from the demonstration display. By prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching to the display, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
After the variable display ends,
Displaying a background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the guidance display in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display;
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed in such a way as to be superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not displaying the guidance display immediately after the end of the variation, it is possible to prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display has ended, the background display changes from the demonstration display. By prompting the production adjustment immediately after the change, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment.Furthermore, when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, the guidance is provided after the change ends. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when the guidance is displayed, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
In the special state, when the power is turned off and the second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the change ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and the Since the game store clerk, not the player, is present, by setting the length to be short, the game store clerk can check the demonstration display immediately, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed because the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for arcade staff to display the demonstration display. This can be quickly confirmed and the customer can learn more about the installed machine, which results in better customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a first specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the power is turned off and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed because the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced into a gaming parlor, so the demonstration display is displayed immediately. By doing so, the game store clerk can immediately check the demonstration display and learn more about the introduced machines, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again. death,
In the special state, after the variable display ends, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period elapses, and after the demonstration display ends, when the predetermined period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed again. show the display,
In the normal state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is finished, the predetermined period of time is displayed. has passed, display the demonstration display again,
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the second specific period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends, the predetermined When the period has passed, the demonstration display will be displayed again,
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for the gaming staff to display the demonstration display. It is possible to quickly confirm the following information and to learn more about the installed machine.Furthermore, a demonstration can be displayed once in any situation: after the fluctuation in the normal state, after the fluctuation in the special state, or after a cold start. By setting the period from when is displayed until the demonstration display is displayed again to be the same, the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 67, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game is carried over and executed both during the background display and the demonstration display, thereby stably notifying the specific error. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game in both the normal state and the special state is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform stable notification of specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In a first period after the end of variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table;
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, display a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. controlling the light emitting means using
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is control,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the first special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error has not been resolved, the Continue controlling the light emitting means,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the second special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, the brightness data table for the specific error is used. Continue controlling the light emitting means (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. By doing so, stable specific error notification can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (Figs. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The brightness data constituting the normal state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data constituting the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110). ~Figure 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data table for the special state background display, it is possible to prevent specific errors from occurring depending on the light emission mode during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The brightness data for demonstration display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, a specific error may occur depending on the lighting mode during the demonstration display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The brightness data for background display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors may occur depending on the light emission mode during background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The brightness data for the normal state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data for the special state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special state background display are made different. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data of As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for demonstration display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during demonstration display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The luminance data forming the background display luminance data table and the luminance data forming the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for background display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during background display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The luminance data configuring the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data configuring the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display are configured to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, and the luminance data table for specific errors By configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data table for the special state background display and the brightness data table for the special state background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light-emission mode during the background display regardless of which background is displayed. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The demonstration display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The normal state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. ,
The special state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special By configuring the movement of the light emitting means to be shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data for the status background display, it is possible to identify the state by the light emitting mode during the background display, regardless of whether it is a normal state or a special state. It can be suggested that an error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is emitted corresponding to the demonstration display. By switching to the mode, the demonstration display can be made to look natural, the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the background display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter what number of game balls are distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is changed to emit light corresponding to the background display. By switching to this mode, the background display can be made to look natural quickly, and the processing can be standardized, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the second period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the demonstration display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the first period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the background display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the background display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

Next, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," "Normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. The notification image 004SG201 (see Fig. 21), the remaining time saving display 004SG202 (see Fig. 21), which shows the remaining number of time saving, etc., are displayed in front (upper layer) of the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While this prevents the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error displays from being reduced due to duplication, decorative symbols are stored on the back side (lower layer) of the production image. By displaying the decorative patterns, it may be possible to prevent the decorative patterns from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the effect image.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A regular symbol holding display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The Futou Suspension Display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of Futou Suspended Memory, which is the number of Futou games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in FIG. 1, positions above and below the image display device 5), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. ing. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 36). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (symbol per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol hit symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo-like multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 004SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the reception of the payout signal. The device 004SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 004SG030 includes a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the firing device 004SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 004SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired by the firing device 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, since the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, the images of each of these layers are drawn and displayed in the VRAM area. a layered image drawing area for placement; a display image creation area for further superimposing (synthesizing) the images drawn and placed in each layered image drawing area to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5; is located. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area includes a special figure holding memory display area 5U that specifiably displays the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number at the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5. At the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, there is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the interface image and a second interface image that includes a small pattern whose display screen is smaller than the decorative pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background display is drawn in order to display the background display in the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decoration pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so it is displayed as a middle layer in the image display device 5. The image (background display) that is displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which both time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state). Note that the variable probability state with time saving may be simply referred to as the "variable probability state". The command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the error has been canceled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution. Command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration performance). Command F100H is a frame state display designation command that designates the state of each input port (including on/off of touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It hasn't been done yet. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo series), super reach (one pseudo series), and super reach (two pseudo series). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot. Variable display results as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (1 pseudo-run), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a loss (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is changed to PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -1 (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) using the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table B. ), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous effect 2) (times) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 are determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 are determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is one or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure. Using the variation pattern determination table A, change the variation pattern to PA1-1 (variation pattern with no shortening, non-reach error), PA2-1 (normal reach error), and PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)), and PA2-4 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or variable probability state), select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 (shortened PA2-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern) pattern) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The selection ratio of any of the variable patterns for jackpots (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, depending on the gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variable pattern suitable for the gaming state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151B can be used to execute a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 004SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 004SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 004SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 004SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has, for example, a performance control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 004SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 004SG191, a performance control timer setting section 004SG192, a performance control counter setting section 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 004SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 004SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 004SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 004SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 004SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 004SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the starting winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (004SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (004SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS105 (004SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (004SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (004SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 sends information to the production control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command (004SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol pending storage number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 004SGS144), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 004SGS148), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004 SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state in this feature), if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be a "jackpot". ”, and if it is not applicable, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 004SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 004 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 004 SGS 154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 004SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing in step 004SGS155, the process advances to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) in response to the predetermined result of the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first production mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second production mode, and the third background display corresponding to the third production mode One of the background displays 004SG083 is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the gaming state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state. It can be displayed when the state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and also a process of displaying a speaker on the speaker in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is being displayed. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the pending storage display (first pending display 004SG101 and second pending display 004SG102) in the special figure pending storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process is executed to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the display according to the storage contents of the winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A (step S161). After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, a determination is made to execute a pre-read preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display color of the pending display, etc.). A prefetch notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. " and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Demonstration production control processing)
Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 18 to 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of FIG. 16. In the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the demonstration movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not the demo movie display is being executed is determined by whether or not a demo movie execution flag indicating that the demo movie display is being executed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not being executed, it is determined whether the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not a menu displaying flag indicating that the menu is being displayed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether a touch ring on flag indicating that touch ring 004SG035 is on is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag indicating waiting to start the demo movie is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004 SGS505 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received, the timer value corresponds to approximately 120 seconds as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer for measuring the time until the demonstration movie display starts. (60000) (Step 004SGS506), set the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), and set the value of the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts, which corresponds to about 30 seconds. A timer value (15000) is set (step 004SGS512), a guidance display start wait flag indicating a wait for guidance display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether a power-on designation command reception flag indicating reception of a power-on designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has been received, a timer value (30000) corresponding to approximately 60 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS508), and the demo movie start wait timer value is set. Set a flag (step 004SGS511), set a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), set the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), and start the demonstration. The performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has not been received, it is determined whether a power failure recovery designation command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not the power failure recovery designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power failure recovery designation command reception flag indicating reception of the power failure recovery designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power failure recovery designation command has not been received, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power failure recovery designation command has been received, a timer value (45000) corresponding to approximately 90 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), and the demo movie A start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS511), a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and a guidance display start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS513). , the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied is determined by whether or not a starting opening winning designation command reception flag indicating reception of the starting opening winning designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the end condition E2 is satisfied, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), The guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the end condition E3 is satisfied is determined based on whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display designation command changes from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the end condition E4 is satisfied is determined based on whether or not menu display control was started in the previous menu display process of step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether the timer is waiting for the start of the guidance display (step 004SGS524). ). Whether or not the system is waiting to start the guidance display is determined by whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start wait time is determined, the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and whether or not the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0 or not, that is, the guidance display It is determined whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the time measurement by the start waiting timer started (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), and the demonstration production control process is started. It ends and returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that there is no waiting for the guidance display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0 or not. It is determined whether a specified time (any one of 60 seconds, 90 seconds, and 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie start waiting timer (Step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), A timer value (27500) corresponding to approximately 55 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie timer for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), and the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533). The demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is being executed, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, that is, the occurrence of a starting prize, the turning on of touch ring 004SG035, or the start of menu display. is identified (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is checked to see if it is 0 or not. It is determined whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie timer (Step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS538), and the demo movie A timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the timer value of the start waiting timer (step 004SGS539), a guidance display is started (step 004SGS540), the demonstration production control process is ended, and the process returns to the production control main process. do.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542). , the demo movie display is ended (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the termination condition E4 is not satisfied, that is, if the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demonstration production control process is ended and the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, if the menu display ends due to the start winning, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demonstration production control process is ended, and production control is performed. Return to main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether or not the menu display has ended is determined based on whether or not the menu display control has ended in the previous menu display process of step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets a demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) equivalent to about 30 seconds as the value of the guide display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and waits for the guide display to start. A flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, the demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether termination condition 4 is satisfied, that is, whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 changes from on to off in response to the frame state display designation command.

If it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off at step 004SGS552, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and starts the guidance display. A wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is satisfied, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

(Type of production mode)
Next, the types of production modes will be explained based on FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing (A1) and (A2) the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular figures when viewed from the front. A numeric display section 004SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the pedestal section and the front of the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the numeric display section 004SG051. character display section 004SG052 on which characters (all characters are omitted) are displayed, an information pedestal section having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and information regarding the characters displayed on the front of the information pedestal section (for example, in this embodiment). In the form of , an information display section 004SG053 consisting of the character's name), a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG054 displayed so as to surround these number display section 004SG051, character display section 004SG052, and information display section 004SG053; It consists of

In this embodiment, the name of the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 is displayed on the information display section 004SG053, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in section 004SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items owned by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21(B1) and (C1), when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are as follows: It is composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG064 displayed so as to surround the number display section 004SG061. The decorative pattern for the high base state is not provided with a character display section and an information display section like the decorative pattern for the low base state.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

As shown in FIG. 21, the performance control CPU 120 has a first performance mode (see FIGS. 21(A1) and (A2)), a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)), and a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)) as performance modes. It is possible to execute any of three performance modes (see FIGS. 21 (C1) and (C2)). The first production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state. Further, the second production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability high base state, and the third production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state. This is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), in the first production mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a daytime city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed first background display 004SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and small symbols are displayed, and the special symbol provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the pending memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F, a first pending display 004SG101 and a second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so their explanation will be omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B1), in the second production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the evening city scenery is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed second background display 004SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second production mode has a first side and a second side that is the opposite side to the first side, and the first side has the preceding decorative pattern (for example, "3"). Decorative designs) are displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces forward, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side. In other words, since the pedestal display section 004SG064 has low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, second surface, first surface, second surface, etc. , the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. At the lower left corner, a time saving remaining display 004SG202 indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed (in this example, characters "XX times remaining", XX=0 to 100) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (C1), in the third production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a night city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The third background display 004SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (C2), the variable display of decorative symbols is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations.

Further, the decorative pattern and the small pattern have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is displayed in a frame from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is displayed in a frame from the lower side for a predetermined period. It takes a long time. That is, a predetermined period of time is required until one decorative pattern is displayed and the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed by being switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, five times, etc.) in the above-mentioned predetermined period.

In addition, in the scrolling display in the first presentation mode and the third presentation mode, and the rotating display in the second presentation mode, the decorative design changes the variable display speed from low to high speed at the start of the variable display, and when the variable display stops. While the variable display speed can be changed from high speed to low speed, the small symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode as the performance modes is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute four or more types of presentation modes. In particular, a plurality of types of performance modes may be executable in response to one gaming state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on FIGS. 22 to 25. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 22. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third production mode. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode and (B) the second and third effect modes.

In addition, in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams with lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are not displayed on the display screen. This is not a representation of the image that was created, but is provided to explain the movement of the image.

(Example of operation of variable display in first production mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first production mode will be described based on FIGS. 22 and 23.

FIG. 22(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the first production mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, The decorative pattern variation start action is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 22(D)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 22(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 22(D)).

Note that the deletion effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 22(B) continues for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F is completed, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the action of the decorative symbol (reversal action of the character) is completed and the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the downward movement is started and the scroll display is displayed as shown in FIG. 22(F). will be started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(F), when the (reversal motion of the character) of the decorative symbol displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is completed, the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the As shown in 22(G), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(G), the action of the decorative symbol displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C (reversal motion of the character) is completed and the ascending action is started, and when the ascending movement is completed, As shown in FIG. 22(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the middle decorative symbol display area starts in this order, but the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, a variable start action in which the character moves in reverse is performed, so the variable display is started. It is possible to make the player aware that the Note that the operation mode of the fluctuation start action can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is performed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 22(G) to 23(K), the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of operation of variable display in 3rd production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third performance mode will be described based on FIG. 24.

FIG. 24(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the third production mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols. (See Figure 24(A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts; Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 24(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 24(C)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 24(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 24(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 24(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Scroll display of the decorative pattern displayed on 5R is started (see FIG. 24(D)). In the high base state, scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F is completed, the decorative symbol display area 5L, Scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. Proportionally, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes as shown in FIG. 24(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is set to the first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the variable display starts, the transmittance gradually increases and reaches the final value. Although the second value (90%) is exemplified in the high-speed scroll display, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value may be the minimum value of the transmittance, as long as the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, when the transmittance is 5%, the decorative pattern is In the case where it is most clearly displayed, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Further, the second value may be the maximum value of the transmittance and should be a value that makes the decorative pattern almost difficult to see. For example, when the transmittance is 100%, the decorative pattern is almost visible. If there is no such condition, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. That is, the first value and the second value can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs the action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type of fluctuation pattern designation command ( For example, when a variable display is executed based on a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command), By being able to perform a common shift display, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the common shift display is performed, so the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing a pending shift display with the start of variable display, and also displays a special symbol pending memory display. Until the first pending display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in area 5U, is switched and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started, while in the high base state , the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative pattern fluctuation start action is not performed while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols when performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs The scroll display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type When a variable display is executed based on a variation pattern specification command of the second type (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command) Since it is possible to perform a common shift display even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, a common shift display can be performed even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, reducing the number of shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the decorative symbol display areas are moved in the order of left, right, and center. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. After the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the display to the active display is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the left, right, and center decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts. If the shift display is performed, the scroll display of any of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started.

(Operation mode of each part at the start of variable display)
As shown in FIG. 25(A), in the first production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the fluctuation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in the second production mode and the third production mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-3 of shortened non-reach is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be rotated or scrolled all at once without performing a variation start action. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all gradually decelerate all at once to a low-speed display, and the transmittance decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) also decreases, causing the image to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. That is, the variable stop action and loop action such as in the first performance mode and the second performance mode are not executed, and the variable display ends as it is, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together with the small symbols. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is executed in the second production mode or the scroll display is executed in the third production mode. (Fade-out display period A23<Fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 25(A) and 25(B)).

In addition, in the first performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(A) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In addition, in the second performance mode and the third performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(B) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Example of operation of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be described based on FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. In addition, in FIG. 27, an example of the operation of the reach effect in the third effect mode will be explained, but it may be possible to perform the same reach effect in the second effect mode, or it may be possible to perform a different reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 causes multiple characters to appear in stages based on the variable display result. Displays whether or not to execute a step-up effect, and a specific step-up effect display pattern (see FIG. 26(B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot is confirmed at a predetermined step in the step-up effect. Determine whether or not to do so. Then, when it is decided to execute the step-up effect and display the specific step-up effect display pattern, the step-up effect is started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up effect is started at the predetermined step. The display pattern is displayed (see FIG. 26(B)). In addition, if it is decided not to execute the step-up effect, or if it is decided to execute the step-up effect but the display of a specific step-up effect display pattern is not determined, the step whose background does not include a rainbow display A close-up effect display pattern is displayed.

Next, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 26(C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 26(D)). In the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Fig. 26 (E) (F )reference). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time when the battle is settled until the predetermined operational validity period has elapsed, an operation promotion display 004SG071 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 004SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 26(G)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 004SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 26(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background display. , After the jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(I)), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first Background display 004SG081 is displayed, and when the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, The jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the production position, and the result notification display 004SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 26(K)), in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 When is displayed, the combination of confirmed symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the small symbols and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the out-of-order display results are derived and displayed (Fig. 26 ( (See M).

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the specific character appears and It is determined whether or not to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern (see FIG. 27(D)) in which the background display is in a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed, and the determination result is stored.

Then, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 27(B)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, if the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, after the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, the cut-in effect is started with the specific cut-in effect display pattern (Fig. 27 (See (D)). In addition, if it is decided not to perform a cut-in effect, or if it is decided to execute a cut-in effect but the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is not decided, a cut with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed. The in display is displayed.

Then, in the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Figure 27 (E) (See (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Regarding the flow of FIGS. 27(G) to (M), the only difference is that the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used in FIGS. 27(J) to (M). Since it is almost the same as M), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up performance in which the background has a rainbow pattern in the low base state (see FIG. 26(B)), as a specific performance to notify the confirmation of a jackpot. In the base state, it is possible to execute a specific cut-in effect including a cut-in in which the background has a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 27(D)). Although the specific step-up effect and the specific cut-in effect have the same rainbow pattern as the background, the display patterns are different, but the lighting patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, since the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), the data capacity for light emission can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be explained based on FIGS. 28 to 34. In FIG. 28, (A) shows the start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) shows the configuration of displaying the demo movie. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part during display of a demo movie. FIG. 30 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing display examples of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). FIG. 34 is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demonstration performance" is for the purpose of the performance control CPU 120 to notify that the game is in a game standby state where no games (for example, variable display, jackpot games, small win games, etc.) are being played, that is, it is in a customer waiting state. This is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie display (see FIGS. 31 and 32) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display is a display that informs the player that an empty machine is not being played by a player by displaying a demo movie display that is different from the background display during play. The company name scene that lets you know whether the game machine is related to the company, what kind of story the pachinko game machine 1 is about, what kind of characters appear, what kind of production and what kind of specifications are included. It consists of a model introduction scene that tells you whether the pachinko game machine 1 is available, a model introduction scene that shows the title and subtitle of the pachinko game machine 1, and a warning scene that tells you things to be careful about before playing the game. In the demo movie display, in addition to the content described above, for example, in a model introduction scene, an introduction of effects, an explanation of model specifications, etc. may be introduced, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIGS. 28A to 30, the "customer waiting demonstration performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is performed when the performance control CPU 120 meets any of the following starting conditions S1 to S6. It is started based on the determination that it has been established. Specifically, the start condition S1 is established when a first period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 upon completion of the variable display, and the start condition S2 is established when a second period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on with initialization, and the start condition S3 is satisfied. is established when the third time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command output from the main board 11 due to the power being turned on without initialization, and the start condition S4 is satisfied. is established when the fourth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, and the start condition S5 is established when the fifth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended. For example, 120 seconds) has elapsed, and the start condition S6 is established when the sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display via the conditions S1 to S5 has ended (2 weeks). From the second step onwards, the same condition as in S6 is established (the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance).

Further, the "demonstration movie display" ends based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that any of the following end conditions E1 to E4 is satisfied. Specifically, the end condition E1 is satisfied when the end time (for example, 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started, the end condition E2 is satisfied when a starting prize has occurred, and the end condition E3 is satisfied. is satisfied when the touch ring 004SG035 is turned on, and the termination condition E4 is satisfied when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, although the demo movie display is not in progress, when the first to sixth hours are being counted in the waiting state for the above start conditions to be satisfied (demo movie start waiting period), the above end conditions E2 to E4 are met. When the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied, the time measurement is stopped, and the time measurement is reset (reset) when the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied.

In addition, during the demo movie start waiting period, the demo movie display is not displayed, but menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays regarding production adjustment. (See FIG. 37 (A4) and FIG. 123).

Note that the guidance display regarding production adjustment is, for example, a menu that allows production function adjustments such as customization and customization reset of various production functions such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and production mode provided in the push button 31B. In addition to the menu guide display 004SG401 that guides the operation of the push button 31B to display the screen, and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 that guides the button operations to adjust the volume and light intensity, there are also functions for adjusting production functions other than those mentioned above. It may also include a guidance display.

Further, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the termination condition E2 is almost never satisfied. In other words, in order for the starting prize to occur, the ball-hitting operation handle 30 must be operated, so basically, the ending condition E3 is satisfied before the ending condition E2, but in the following irregular case, There is a possibility that the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Irregular case 1: The player calls a store clerk based on the occurrence of a grape (so-called ball jammed between nails), but by the time the clerk arrives, a demo movie has started to be displayed, and after that, the grape is released. If a starting prize is generated by this, the demo movie display ends without operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, so the end condition E3 is not satisfied, but the end condition E2 is satisfied.

Irregular case 2: If the ON state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the production control CPU 120 due to some kind of malfunction in the CPU 103 or a malfunction in the production control CPU 120, the on-state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed and the prize is won. may occur, so the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Note that the end condition E3, which is satisfied when the touch sensor is on, does not need to be set as the end condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end only by operating the steering wheel, and the end condition will be set when the start winning occurs. E2 is established and the demo movie display ends.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes, the first scene to the fourth scene. Specifically, the first scene is a "company name" part (company name part) that displays the name and slogan of the company involved in development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company (Figure 31 (A)). See B).

The second scene is composed of "Model Introduction 1" to "Model Introduction 3" parts (Model Introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed in the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "model introduction 1" part (model introduction 1 part), ally characters and names appearing in the production are displayed (see FIGS. 31(C) to (F)). In the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (G) and (H)), and "Model Introduction 2 -2" part (model introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (J) and (K)), and the "model introduction 2-3" part. In (model introduction part 2-3), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see FIGS. 32(M) to 32(O)). "Model introduction 3-1" part (Model introduction 3-1 part), "Model introduction 2-1" part (Model introduction 2-1 part) and "Model introduction 2-2" part (Model introduction 2-2 part) ), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text (see Figure 32 (I)), and in the "Model introduction 3-2" part (Model introduction 3-2 part), "Model introduction 2- 2" (model introduction 2-2 part) part and "model introduction 2-3" part (model introduction 2-3 part), the cut-in display of the ally character is displayed without text (Figure 32 ( (See L).

The third scene consists of a "model name main title name" part (main title part) and a "model subtitle name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed ( (See FIGS. 32(P) to (V)). In addition, in the "Model main title name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWERFUL" is displayed, and in the "Model subtitle name" part, the subtitle name "II/All set Ver." is displayed. Is displayed.

The "model main title name" is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question, which expresses the theme of the machine in one word, and the "model subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question. The information may be supplementary information added to the main title name of the model (for example, "II" indicating that this is the second work of this title, or the heading "All members set Ver."), and the content may vary. Can be changed.

The fourth scene consists of a "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part) and a "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part) in which the player is alerted (Figure 32 (W) - (See (X)). In addition, in the "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent people from becoming addicted to the game, and in the "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming addicted to the game. A warning message is displayed to prevent physical accidents.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the demo movie display, after the start condition is satisfied, various demo images are displayed in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), and the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c= 10 seconds), the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demo movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 30, if the first demo movie display ends without the end conditions E2 to E4 being satisfied while the demo movie display is being displayed, that is, if any of the start conditions S1 to S5 are satisfied. When the first demonstration movie display that has been started ends under the termination condition E1, the process shifts to a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time period of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demo movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

During the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the number of reserved memories and the display of the small symbols are maintained (Fig. 31, (See Figure 32). In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie is displayed. The numbers and small designs may be hidden.

In addition, during the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and the frame lamp (main lamp 9a). and side lamps 9b), the light emission is controlled based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration described later), while button lamp 9e is lit in white, which does not correspond to the demonstration movie display. Light emission control is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table to be described later: button lights up white). Further, although BGM is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, music for displaying a demo movie may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table to be described later: customer waiting demo) is composed of a plurality of brightness data tables (grandchild tables to be described later).

Specifically, as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the main lamp 9a that constitutes a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part is used. , brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part to model introduction 2-3 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of main title part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, period of subtitle part 2 and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from attention-calling part 1 to attention-calling part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table in each period.

In addition, it can also be used as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f that constitute the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo). , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-1 part. Corresponding brightness data table, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-3 part , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of alerting part 1 to alerting part 2. A luminance data table is provided, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table in each period.

Note that control using the brightness data table during the period in which the demo movie display is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of operation of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie will be described based on FIGS. 31, 32, and 119 to 121. In addition, in FIG. 119, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an operation example in which (A) is the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. FIG. 121 is a comparison table showing character animation display.

Note that an example of expressions indicating display modes used in the following description will be explained.
"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the image one frame before. display).

In addition, an example of expressions indicating a light emission mode used in the following description will be explained.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of brightness data, and there is less change in brightness between each data than the following flash, for example, the brightness of a lamp increases at a predetermined period, This is a pattern in which the color changes at a predetermined period, or in which a predetermined color emits light moving within a light emitting area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp on is not enough as a performance element, or when it is desired to emphasize the image display device 5 etc. rather than the lamp, as in the case of the flash below, so that the lamp does not stand out too much.

“Flash” is a light emission pattern that alternately uses brightness data with high brightness and brightness data with low brightness (including turning off). Depending on the strength of the light, the brightness that the player sees can be greatly changed, and this is a light emitting pattern used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display of FIG. 26(B) is executed in the low base state and when the effect of FIG. 27(D) is executed in the high base state. In this example, a rainbow wave pattern is created in which the brightness data of seven colors is sequentially changed to light up in waves. A rainbow flash pattern may be used by alternating the brightness data.

As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, when the demo movie display start condition is satisfied, the first scene starts to be displayed. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the first scene starts to be displayed. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a blue corporate slogan display 004SG302A and a corporate logo display 004SG302B is displayed with a "small" in the center of the screen. After being displayed in the same size, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed moving from the back of the display screen to the front by gradually increasing the size and decreasing the transmittance (transparency). can be shown. Incidentally, the number of pending memories and the small symbols remain displayed in the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen. In this way, by displaying the small symbols even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set in a lighting mode (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. (color, brightness, etc.) changes. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change.

To explain in detail using FIG. 120(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in the "small" size at the center of the screen, and then the transmittance (transparency) is decreased while gradually enlarging it for about 3 seconds. When the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall and is bounced back, a bounce display is displayed. (See Figure 120 (A2)). Then, after being statically displayed at a specified position in the center of the screen for about 4 seconds (see FIG. 120 (A3)), it is faded out for 1 second (see FIG. 120 (A4)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then turn on in white. In this way, by flashing white at the start of displaying the demo movie, it is emphasized that the display of company name display 004SG302 has started. Then, as the company name display 004SG302 expands and fades in, the brightness increases (white fade-in lighting), and after a white flash in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, it lights up in white. The brightness decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lights).

Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene starts, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D appearing in various productions and the character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character are displayed in sequence ( At the same time, effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see FIGS. 31(C) to 31(F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 119 (A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to the character in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of the name, and then turn on white. do.

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model Introduction 2-1" begins, the enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various productions is displayed as an animation, and the text "Enemies are rampaging in the city!" Display 004SG511A is displayed in a fade-in manner (animation display) (see FIGS. 31(G) and (H)). Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 3-1" part starts, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the situation where the ally character is flying and rushing through the city is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 31(I)).

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-2" starts again, the friendly character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" fade in (animation display) ) (see FIGS. 31(J) and (K)). After that, when the display of "Model Introduction 3-2" starts, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed in which the effect display 004SG504 is displayed in the background (see Figure 31 (L)). .

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-3" part starts again, the image of the friendly character 004SG500A and the enemy character 004SG510A fighting and the text display "Don't lose!" 004SG511C fade in. (animation display) (see FIGS. 32(M) to (N)). After that, all of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the character display 004SG511D saying "All gather!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 32(O)).

In addition, the animation display of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene is an animation display with movements such as enlargement, contraction, and fighting of the ally characters, whereas various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D , 004SG511A to 004SG511D, for example, are displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of display, and are displayed as animations that have a lower degree of change in visibility than animation displays that involve movement such as the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (A2), in the second scene, "Model introduction 3-1" and "Model introduction 3-2" are displayed on the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). Sometimes there is a green flash, but basically it is a white wave light, and the light emission mode (for example, lighting, blinking, (lights out, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or not) change, and basically, the lights emit light in conjunction with dynamic animation displays such as the running, jumping, and punching of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A. The appearance (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) may light up or blink (flash) in accordance with the movements of the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D or the enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching. The color may change.

Note that in the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a may also be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). good.

Next, when the display of the third scene starts, the effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and the model main title name display 004SG520A, which consists of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed at the center of the display screen. After being displayed in "small" size at (default display position), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed by gradually expanding and fading in (animation display) while decreasing the transmittance (transparency). It can be made to appear as if the screen is being displayed moving from the back side to the front side (see FIGS. 32(P) to 32(R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B consisting of the characters "II" is displayed in "extra large" size on the right side (default display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A, and then the transmittance (transparency) is adjusted while being slightly reduced. It is displayed in a fade-in manner while decreasing the size, and is displayed in a bound manner in a "large" size on the right side (default display position) of "FEVER POWERFUL" (see FIGS. 32(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gathered Ver." is displayed in "extra large" size in the center in front of the model main title display 004SG520A (default display position), and then shrinks slightly and displays "FEVER". 32 (U) to (V)).

Also, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are basically lit in a rainbow wave, and are linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C and 004SG520C. The light emission mode changes. In particular, in the "Model subtitle name" part, when the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C is moved and displayed and bound to the specified display position, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink). .

Using FIG. 120(B), to explain in detail the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gather Ver.", "Extra large" is displayed in the front center (standard display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A. After being displayed in the size (see Figure 120 (B1)), it shrinks slightly for about 0.5 seconds, moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (default display position), and is displayed in the "Large" size. (See FIG. 120 (B2)) and is statically displayed at the specified display position for 0.5 seconds (See FIG. 120 (B3)). Thereafter, the entire model title display 004SG520, consisting of the model main title display 004SG520A and the model subtitle display 004SG520B, 004SG520C, is gradually enlarged (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (Fig. 120 (B4) )reference).

In addition, as shown in Figure 119 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a rainbow direction (rainbow wave lighting) when the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and the model subtitle name When display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, a white flash is performed in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then rainbow lighting (rainbow wave lighting) is performed.

Next, when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, the dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the center of the screen (animation display ) (see FIG. 32(W)). Next, when the display of the "Caution 2" part is started, the display is switched to the black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 32(X)).

To explain in detail the display of the "Caution 1" part using FIG. 120(C), when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed. At the same time, the anti-immersion display 004SG312 is displayed at the standard display position in the center of the screen, and fade-in display (animation display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 120 (C1) and (C2)). Next, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is statically displayed for 2 seconds after the transmittance reaches 0% (see FIG. 120 (C3)).

Additionally, as shown in Figure 119 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are linked to the fade-in display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts. In the fourth scene, the white wave lighting continues without a white flash.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) change their lighting modes (for example, lighting, flashing, turning off, Since the color, brightness, etc.) do not change, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphatically than the company name display 004SG302, the model main title name display 004SG520A, and the model subtitle display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. .

(Comparison of display modes of each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the display manner of each scene on the image display device 5 during display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Display mode when character display starts> 1st scene (company name), 2nd scene (model introduction 1, 2), 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), 4th scene (warning 1) In , various characters are displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation), while in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (attention alert 2), various characters are not displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation).

<Character animation display (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), animation display is performed when the degree of change in visibility is "large". In the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), an animation is displayed with the visibility change degree as "medium", and in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 1), the visibility change degree is "medium". While the animation indicating that the degree of gender change is "small" is performed, the character display is not animated in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 2).

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name), the text is displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large" size, while in the fourth scene In (Caution 1 and 2), characters are displayed at a constant size of "small" or "medium" from the beginning. In addition, in the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, and in the third scene (model subtitle name), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large" size. and display it.

<Background color> The background color is white in the first scene (company name), the color according to the story in the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), and the title in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) In the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

Regarding character display, for example, when displaying animation, the degree of emphasis is higher than when displaying no animation (highlighted mode), and when the change in visibility in animation display is large, The degree of emphasis will be higher than when the change in visibility is small (the mode of emphasis), and the degree of emphasis will be higher when there are many colors of text than when there are few colors (the mode of emphasis). ).

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name) is performed after the text display is faded in. , the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) is displayed in a fade-in manner, but the size is enlarged as it is displayed in a bound manner. '', the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312, that is, the visibility of the character display is changed to a higher degree.

In addition, in the animation display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display was faded in to the specified display position. After that, the size increases, decreases, or moves. However, in the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), the character display fades in to the specified display position. The animation display of company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 because it is only displayed and does not change in size without expanding, reducing or moving. In other words, it is a mode in which the degree of change in the visibility of character display is high.

Here, based on FIGS. 120 and 121, the character animation displays of the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1) will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is enlarged and faded in at the beginning of the display (see FIG. 120 (A1)), and when displayed at the specified position, it is displayed in a bound manner (see FIG. 120 (see (A2))), and after the specified position is displayed, it is displayed statically (see FIG. 120 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), when the display starts, the model main title name display 004SG520A is enlarged and faded in, and then displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figures 32 (P) to (R)). ), after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figures 120 (B1) and (B2)), and is displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figure 120 (B1) and (B2)). 120 (B3)), and after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of the display (see Figures 120 (C1) and (C2)), and is displayed statically when the specified position is displayed and after the specified position is displayed. (See FIGS. 120 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is such that company name ≧ model title (main, sub) > alert. The alert is only a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation display when or after the prescribed position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, because the company name is displayed as an animation in two places: when the display starts and when the specified position is displayed, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the alert. Because animation is displayed in two places, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of a warning.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we highlight each piece of information by displaying it with its own display animation. However, compared to the scene in Alert 1, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title display scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, it is possible to attract more suitable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the characters of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C are faded in and displayed at the specified display position, and then the size is enlarged or reduced. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), after the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, an animation display that enlarges, reduces, and moves the size is displayed. Display without.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the model title name, it gives a sense of attention to the title, and by avoiding the lingering movement to call attention, the characters can be read clearly. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Comparison of company name and warning display format)
Here, based on FIGS. 33 and 34, the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 33(A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. 004SG302 is displayed. In addition, the number of pending memories and small symbols are displayed in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), the caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is animatedly displayed at the center of the screen. The addictive prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 consisting of the words "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation." and a heading frame display 004SG314 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched and displayed, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A includes an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation in which a player hits his or her head on the protruding part of the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Be careful over your head", and a heading display "The upper part protrudes". Caution details display 004SG325A consists of the words "Please be careful not to hit your head.", caution mark 004SG326A consists of the words "!" inside a triangular mark, and an "x" mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327A.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B includes an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which a player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading display 004SG324B consisting of the words "Be careful of finger pinching", and a heading display 004SG324B that says "Beware of finger pinching". The warning detail display 004SG325B consists of the words ``It moves. Be careful not to get your hands or fingers caught.'', the caution mark 004SG326B consists of the words ``!'' inside a triangular mark, and the ``↓'' mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327B.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the first scene (company name), the size of the characters of the corporate slogan display 004SG302A is "medium" and the color is chromatic (blue), and the size of the characters of the corporate logo display 004SG302B is "Large", the color is chromatic (blue), and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In the fourth scene (warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is set to "medium" in size and the color is achromatic (white), and the color of the heading frame display 004SG314 is set to a chromatic color (dark blue), The caution background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue). Furthermore, the frame line of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Note that the background of the character display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the caution background display 004SG311 that covers the entire area of the display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314 that is provided in a part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A has a size of "large" and a color achromatic (white), and the text of the heading display 004SG324A has a size "medium" and a color achromatic (white). ), and the characters of the caution detail display 004SG325A are "small" in size and achromatic (white), and the caution mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow), and the caution mark is "small" in size and achromatic (yellow). The mark display 004SG327A has a size of "small" and a chromatic color (red), and the caution background display 004SG321 has an achromatic color (black).

Note that the "caution marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help the headline letters that call attention to the players stand out, and the "caution mark displays 004SG327A, 004SG327B" indicate areas that the players should pay attention to. These are marks that assist illustrations, and unlike text, they are displayed as a single mark, so they are preferably chromatic so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text.

Regarding the number of retained memories and small designs, the size is "small" and the color is achromatic (black).

As shown in FIGS. 33(A) and 34, when comparing the display modes of the company name display 004SG302 and the number of reserved memories and small designs in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B are , the font size is larger, the number of displayed colors used is larger, and the saturation and brightness of the tone are higher than the number of retained memories and small designs, so corporate slogan display 004SG302A and corporate logo display 004SG302B are It can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small symbols.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small design are achromatic (black), but they may be chromatic, and even in such a case, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A or the corporate logo display 004SG302B displays a corporate slogan if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: font size is larger, number of display colors used is larger, and saturation/brightness is higher than the number of reserved memories and small designs. 004SG302A and company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small designs.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 33(B), (C), and 34, the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2) are In comparison, the caution background display 004SG311 is colored in a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313, is colored in a chromatic color (dark blue), while the caution background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black). ).

In this way, the background display color of the warning text is different between the first part of the warning and the second part of the warning, which makes it easier to draw attention to different phenomena such as prevention of addiction and prevention of physical accidents. Since it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching from the first alerting part to the second alerting part, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

Next, when comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), The company name background display 004SG301 of the name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), and the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue). ), the caution background display 004SG321 of the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text display is different between the first scene (company name) and the different fourth scene (alert 1, alert 2), so the display of the company name and the alert are different. By making the background color different, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the background display colors of the character displays of the company name background display 004SG301, the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 are all different. The invention is not limited to this, but the background display color of at least one character display among the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 is the same as the character display color of the company name background display 004SG301. It only needs to be different from the background display color.

(Comparison of lighting modes in each scene)
Next, on the basis of FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the lighting modes of the lamps in each scene during the display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Interlocking with text animation display> In the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1), the text animation display (fade-in display) While the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) emit light in conjunction, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), they are not linked to the character animation display (fade-in display) (non-linked). , the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are made to emit light in conjunction with the animation display of the character.

<Emphasis level> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set to a high emphasis level. In the second scene (model introductions 1 to 3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are emitted with the emphasis level set to "medium", and in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) ), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are caused to emit light with the emphasis level being "low".

The "degree of emphasis" is the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, a flash (blinking), that is, a case where the interval between the color transitions of the luminance data is short, will have a higher degree of emphasis (the mode of emphasis) than a case where the interval between the color transitions of the luminance data is long, such as wave lighting ), when a large number of lamps are lit, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode of emphasis) is higher than when a small number of lamps are lit, and when there are many lit colors, the emphasis is higher than when fewer lamps are lit. The degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized), and when the proportion of chromatic colors is higher, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized) when the proportion of chromatic colors is lower than when the proportion of chromatic colors is small. When the lights are on, the emphasis is higher (emphasized) than when they are not lit, and when the brightness is high, the emphasis is higher (emphasized) than when the brightness is low. ).

Specifically, to explain based on FIG. 28(B) and referring to FIG. 119, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is The second scene (model introduction 1 to 3) has a green flash but is not linked to the character animation display, so the emphasis level is "medium", and the third scene (model main title name, Model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", and the fourth scene (Caution 1 and 2) is not synchronized with character animation display. Since it is not, the emphasis level is "small".

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher when the company name is displayed than when calling for attention, and when the title name is used, the lighting is more emphasized than when calling for attention. The degree of emphasis is higher than the aspect. Since the company name has more lamp switching in conjunction with the animation display than the model title, the lighting mode for the company name is more emphasized than the lighting mode for the model title. Therefore, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is in the relationship of company name>model title (main, sub)>alert.

In addition, since a plurality of plate lamps and a plurality of frame lamps are each provided at a plurality of locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis of the light emission of the first lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps and the emission of light emission of a second lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps, Rather than comparing the degree of emphasis of one first lamp and one second lamp, we compare the light emission mode when the entire first lamp is averaged and the light emission mode when the entire second lamp is averaged. All you have to do is compare.

<Rainbow> In the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), in the "model subtitle name" part (for example, Figures 32 (P) to (V)), the board lamp and frame lamp light up in a rainbow manner. let The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the same as the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) described above. This is the rainbow brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01) described later).

<Specific light emission> Only in the predetermined frames of the model subtitle name (for example, FIGS. 32 (S) and (U)) in the third scene (title name), the panel lamp and frame lamp emit white flash (specific mode). . The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2, which are different from the brightness data table for main title used in the model main title name, and are the brightness data table for subtitle 2. It is said to be a white flash (specific mode) that emits light in conjunction with character animation display.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the luminance data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2 -1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts (see Figure 29) are used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same table as the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is used, and the brightness data table for company (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2- The grandchild table corresponding to parts 2 and 2-3) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that indicates "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1). It does not include brightness data associated with the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we particularly want to convey information about the company name, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, we can compare it with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness for subtitle 2 The luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is different from the data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. A brightness data table for the main title (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), a brightness data table for subtitle 1, and a brightness data table for subtitle 2 (see FIG. 29) are used. The grandchild table corresponding to ) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), which includes brightness data, is Luminance data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that shows "Rampaging!" and the fade of the character display 004SG511B that says "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2) Does not include brightness data linked to in-display (animation display).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we particularly want to convey information about the model name, by using luminance data that is linked to the display animation, it is easy to compare with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see Figure 29) is based on the caution brightness data table. (Grandchild table corresponding to attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) (see Figure 29) is used to control panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). The brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (Fig. 29) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), the caution brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the caution 1 and caution 2 parts) is used This mode has a higher degree of emphasis (emphasis) than the mode of the controlled panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high," and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle (name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", whereas in the fourth scene (Caution 1 and 2), white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display. Since this is not the case, the emphasis level is "low".

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting dedicated light for each. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be carried out. It can be carried out.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is changed from the caution brightness data table (warning 1, Aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the grandchild table corresponding to the attention calling 2 part, and the brightness data table for the main title (the grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), The mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) is for caution. The aspect that is emphasized more than the aspect of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) is (1). Emphasize the company name and model title by using one of the following modes: (2) lighting in many colors, (3) using a large number of light emitting means, or (4) high brightness. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is the same as the main title brightness data table (main title part). The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the subtitle 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 parts), subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) ) By emphasizing the company name more than the other aspects, it is possible to emphasize the company name more, and it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting control. It can be performed.

In addition, during execution of the demo movie display, the production control CPU 120 uses the rainbow luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) to use the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). ), and when a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) or a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) is executed, the brightness data table for rainbow (corresponding to step-up effect and cut-in effect) The board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchildren table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) that is used while displaying the demo movie. table) and a rainbow brightness data table (compatible with step-up effects and cut-in effects) used when step-up effects (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effects (see Figure 27 (D)) are executed. (grandchild table) and is a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table used for specific performances (for example, step-up performances and cut-in performances), it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

In addition, the rainbow luminance data table (title part , grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and a demo movie execution period (second period) after the end of the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of the game in the high base state (special state). ) used for the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts) and the step-up effect that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific Brightness data table for rainbow used when a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) and high base state (special state) table) and are common brightness data tables (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow can be created in a normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for the specific performance and the special performance that can be executed in the special state, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

In addition, a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific effect) that can be performed in a low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect that can be performed in a high base state (special state) (see Figure 27 (D)) ) is a performance that definitively notifies that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so the brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01 )) is also used for demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are based on a plurality of luminance data, and the lighting mode is linked to the animation display of model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C. This is a brightness data table for causing the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to emit light.

In this way, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and by displaying the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine is completed, so the board lamp and frame lamp are By lighting up the game machine (excluding the button lamp 9e), the title name of the game machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, a plurality of pieces of brightness data constituting the company name brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) include the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b. (first light emitting means) is configured to emit light, and the introductory brightness data table (model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3 The plurality of luminance data constituting the grandchild table corresponding to the -2 part is luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp emit light, and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light. In the model introduction scene, the board lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light, but the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) does not emit light, so that the company name is relatively visible. The first scene displayed can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In this embodiment, the first light emitting means is the panel lamp and the side lamp 9b, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. At least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light emitting means that does not emit light in the scene, and at least one of the board lamps may be used as the first light emitting means.

In addition, as a modified example, the production control CPU 120 uses the introduction 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) corresponding to the model introduction 1 part in the model introduction part of the second scene. The light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp) is controlled, and in the model introduction 2 part, the luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) is used to A light emitting means (for example, a board lamp) is controlled, and a second light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp) is controlled using the first luminance data table (one's grandchild table) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part. You can do it like this.

In this way, while the demo movie is displayed, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are designed to emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, and the model In the introduction part 1 and the model introduction part 2, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that companies can The name display scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the model introduction part 1 of the second scene, the production control CPU 120 also controls the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the model main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part). ), brightness data table for model subtitle (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), brightness data table for alert 1, brightness data table for alert 2 (grandchild table corresponding to alert 1 and 2 parts), and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a different brightness data table for model introduction 1 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 1 part), and in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene. , the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may be controlled using the first luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction part 1).

In this way, there are multiple situations in which information is conveyed using text displays, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each of them has a dedicated light emitting light so that it can be easily compared with other text displays. , can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the execution period of the model introduction scene including the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part (30 seconds) > the execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the 1st model introduction part and the 2nd model introduction part The execution period is (30 seconds) > the execution period of the warning display scene (5 seconds), and the company name text display and the warning text display are displayed at display timings other than when the demo movie is being displayed. may be done. In this way, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only while the demo movie is being displayed, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, thereby providing suitable customer waiting control.

Note that even when the demo movie is not being displayed, it is possible to display a text display of the company name or a text display calling for attention. For example, the text display of the company name and the text display warning may be displayed during the ending period after the end of the jackpot round, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie display may be displayed. It's okay. In this case, in order to maintain the tempo of the jackpot and high base state, the display time may be set shorter than during the demonstration movie display.

(Lamp lighting mode corresponding to gaming status)
Next, the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state will be explained based on FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state. 36, (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of the lamp in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 35, the board lamps and frame lamps arranged in the pachinko game machine 1 are controlled to change the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is performed due to a cold start, and when it is controlled to a low base state. It is designed to emit light in different ways when it is in the high base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification described later is being performed.

Specifically, during the initialization notification execution period, an initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e are set to "red". ” flashes.

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "blue" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up as "blue" as the main color. "White" lights up.

In the low-accuracy, high-base state (time-saving state), a time-saving background luminance data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "green" as the main color. , the button lamp 9e lights up in white. In addition, in the high-accuracy, high-base state (variable-accuracy state), a brightness data table for a variable-variable background (lamp data table: background variable) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are waveformed with "purple" as the main color. The button lamp 9e lights up in white. Note that, hereinafter, the time-saving background brightness data table and the variable probability background brightness data table may be collectively referred to as a high-base background brightness data table (or a high-B background brightness data table).

During the execution period of the demonstration performance (demonstration movie display), a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is used, and the main color of the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b is "white". The light emission mode changes, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white" color.

During the error notification execution period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are set to "colors according to the state (low base state, high base state, demonstration effect)". On the other hand, the main lamp 9a blinks in "red" and the button lamp 9e lights in "white".

Note that the "main color" is a color that forms the basic tone of the overall color in each period, and for example, it may be the color that has the highest luminous time and the highest occupancy rate of the luminous area (number of lamps) in each period, It may be possible to emit light in a color other than the above-mentioned colors. Further, a predetermined hue may include a plurality of colors having different luminance, lightness, saturation, etc. When the main color is "blue", it is sufficient if it is a similar color of "blue".

For example, similar colors will be explained based on FIG. 122. Colors have three attributes: hue (tint), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

An example of the above "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in FIG. 122(A), To explain based on (B), in the hue circle of a predetermined number (24 colors in this case), the three primary colors of light are red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]. When arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to red (R), When green (G) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to green (G), and blue When (B) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the board lamps include an attacker lamp 9c built in the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the lower right of the game board 2, and a movable body provided at the top of the image display device 5. 32, and a decorative lamp 9f built into a decorative body provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Incidentally, as long as the lamps are provided on the game board 2, lamps other than those described above may be included (for example, lamps built into the prize-winning device, etc.).

Further, the frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right sides, and a button lamp 9e provided on the push button 31B. Note that lamps other than those described above may be included as long as they are provided in the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting operation handle 30 or the speakers 8L and 8R).

Furthermore, the attacker lamp 9c of the board lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of a plurality of LEDs, The side lamp 9b is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of a plurality of LEDs.

Further, FIG. 36(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in FIG. 36(A), and in the following description, for convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 36(B) will be used. It can be expressed.

(Start of customer waiting demonstration performance, fluctuation stop ver.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 42 and FIG. 123. In FIG. 37, (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. In FIG. 38, (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in the low base state. FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. In FIG. 41, (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance in the high base state. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is started by a cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated by cold start. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 40.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 39, in the low base state, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, although not particularly shown, if the execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 37(A1)). During variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table. . Further, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving toward the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A4)).

If another 90 seconds have passed since then, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 37 (A5) to (A8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on this, control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration designs) that are displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance. Before switching from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) It is designed to control light emission.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), a combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place is displayed on the display screen in the background of the first background display 004SG081. Displayed as stopped. Further, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place is started. , the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place gradually increases, and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data 38 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out (see FIG. 38 (A42)), the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 38 (A5)).

In this way, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display is stopped), and A demo movie display is displayed during a second customer waiting period (second period) after the period ends. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: background normal) is changed to the one for the customer waiting demonstration. Switch to the brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 controls the first background displayed on the display screen. The display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the start condition S1 of the demonstration effect is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 and the fade-out display of the decorative pattern ( After the display screen becomes white-out, display of company name display 004SG302 is started. That is, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). ) to start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display content from the normal background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switch display) of the normal background display. Switching control is started, but display of a fade-out display (switched display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demonstration start condition S1 was satisfied.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 37 (A5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so it appears that the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed on the board before they are switched to the demo movie display. Light emission control of the lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration will begin.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without performing the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 39).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of displaying the demo movie is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. be. Further, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or even if the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern display are maintained without performing a fade display etc. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, based on the determination that the end condition E1 of the demo effect is satisfied, The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer A waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background, and then to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). Light emission control is performed based on the button lamp 9e, and light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are also displayed. Along with the display, the animation display (frame-in display) of menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and 30 seconds have passed since the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) started. The demo movie display starts (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the first time. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 37 (A3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 38, the performance control CPU 120 displays the Before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns to the demo movie display for demonstration performance, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data Table: background normal) and starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display is stopped), and displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the customer waiting period (second period), a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, the panel lamp and The light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is controlled, and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) are controlled using the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period. At the same time, during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: The light emission of the button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) that is different from the one used in the customer waiting demonstration).

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In detail, as mentioned above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), the display mode of the demo movie display Since the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are turned on and blinking in conjunction with each other, for example, when an operation promotion display is displayed that encourages operation of the push button 31B in a production introduction scene, the button If the lamp 9e is turned on, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform a useless operation, so the button lamp 9e is set in a fixed manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, when variable display of the second special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the low base state, the process of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 39, this is the same as the case where variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 41 and 42.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, in the high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, although not particularly shown, if the execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 41 (B1)). During variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp have a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background accuracy change (or lamp data table: background time saver)) for constant change (or time saving). Lighting is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit). Further, high B background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Note that although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving toward the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 41 (B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are switched from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table, and the customer waiting demonstration brightness data Control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e lights up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) continues.

In order to start displaying the demo movie in this way, the performance control CPU 120 demos the combination of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) displayed on the display screen and the determined symbol of failure (decorative symbol). Before switching to the demonstration movie display for production, change from the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: waiting for customer). demo) to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

Specifically, during the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), the determined combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed on the display screen in the background of the third background display 004SG083. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time saving, or lamp data table: background variable) for fixed variable (or time saving). The wave is lit in purple (or green).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the The fade-out display of the confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) starts, and the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG084) and the missed confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) gradually increases, and The brightness data table for background B (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) is switched to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (button 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out, the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 41 (B5)).

In this way, the production control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). is displayed, and a demo movie display is displayed in a second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table : Switch from the background change (or lamp data table: background time saving) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (except button lamp 9e) do.

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to draw attention to the start of the demonstration movie display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 displays the third background displayed on the display screen. Display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, a fade-out display (switching display) of the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern is started, and after the display screen becomes white-out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the brightness for the customer waiting demonstration from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). Switch to the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while fading out the display contents from the high base background display to the high base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie is started for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds after the demonstration start condition S1 is satisfied). ) has elapsed before starting.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 41 (B5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have passed, so it looks like the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern are demo. Before switching to the movie display, light emission control for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration is started.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without performing the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 42).

Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be 0.3 seconds or more and can be changed in various ways. In addition, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decoration may be used instead of a fade display. The display of the symbol may be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, based on the determination that the end condition E1 of the demo effect is satisfied, The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, a third background display 004SG083 (or a second background display 004SG082) and a combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as a menu guide display 004SG401 and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Then, the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp are changed from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) The light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and the button lamp 9e is switched to the default brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control is performed based on the button (white lit).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and Along with displaying the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and the first customer waiting period (demo The demo movie display starts when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movie start waiting period (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the first time. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 41 (B3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Or, before switching the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the demo movie display for demonstration production, wait for customers from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) Switch to the demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends, a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: The luminance control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is performed using the background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table) is used during the second customer waiting period. :Customer waiting demonstration) is used to control the light emission of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), which is the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) ) is used to control the light emission of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant manner in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the low base state and the high base state. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the production control CPU 120 uses the board lamp and frame lamp (button In the first scene (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, the corporate brightness data table (corresponding to the company name part) corresponding to the first scene is controlled. In the second scene (for example, the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, The board lamp and frame are created using the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the scene (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2 parts). The lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled, and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 (model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts) using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) that is different from The button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) in the second scene during the second customer waiting period.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. By setting this, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the first default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is brightness data for a promotion effect used when a promotion effect (see FIG. 26(G)) prompting the operation of the push button 31B is executed. This is a different brightness data table from the table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red), and the brightness data that makes up the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights white) is more effective. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B operation is being prompted. , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the default brightness data table may be configured to include brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e, and by doing so, the player is informed that the push button 31B is being prompted to operate. Misunderstanding can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided in the gaming machine frame 3, it is not managed using the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3. By using separate management, it is possible to appropriately design a system to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), and then , display a demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, the guide display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, thereby preventing unnecessary adjustments to the performance, and once the demo movie is finished. After the display ends, there is a possibility that the player is away from their seat, so by prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, we can create a suitable gaming environment. It is possible to encourage players to play games, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the high base state, the flow of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 42, this is the same as the case where variable display of the second special symbol is started in the high base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance regarding performance adjustment. 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) are not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then the demo movie is displayed. Display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance display. 41 (B2 ), then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol in either the low base state or the high base state, even after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, immediately after the end of the variable display, By not displaying a guidance display, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left his/her seat once the demo movie display has finished, By prompting the performance adjustment immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start (power-on with initialization) will be explained based on FIGS. 44 and 45.

As shown in FIGS. 44(C1) and 45, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the start-up timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power-on designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initializing display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (FIG. 44 (C2)), and a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start blinking in red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of the initialization notification sound is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Additionally, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (60 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed after receiving the power-on designation command and the first game state background designation command, the initialization process ends, the initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 changes. Display starts (see FIG. 44 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in a blue wave based on the default brightness data table (background normal). White lighting starts based on the lamp data table (button white lighting). Furthermore, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 44 (C4) When the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C5)).

If another 30 seconds have passed since then, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S2 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 44 (C6) to (C9)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the brightness data table for default.

Incidentally, since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of the operation will be explained based on FIGS. 46 and 47 when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power on without initialization) and then starts the customer waiting demonstration performance in the low base state. do.

As shown in FIGS. 46(D1) and 47, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the low base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the start-up preparation display 004SG600 from the start-up timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start lighting, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). The button lamp 9e starts lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. Further, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 At the same time, a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 46 (D3)). When the animation is displayed by moving toward the right side to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds have passed since then, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See FIGS. 46(D5) to (D8)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table). Control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the data table (customer waiting demonstration), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Incidentally, since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of operation will be explained based on FIGS. 48 and 49 when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. do.

As shown in FIGS. 48(E1) and 49, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the high base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the start-up preparation display 004SG600 from the start-up timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the second and third game state background designation commands are received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: Purple (or green) wave lighting starts based on the button lamp 9e's default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in white based on the button white lighting, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the production control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the second and third gaming state background designation commands from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 is finished, and the third background The display of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is started (see FIG. 48 (E2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 48 (E3)). ), when the animation is displayed by moving toward the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E4)).

After another 60 seconds have passed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 48 (E5) to (E8)). In addition, panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can be changed from the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background changeable (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is set to the default brightness data. White lighting continues based on the table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Note that since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the high base state shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a hot start is made thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and instead of displaying the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ) (see FIG. 46 (D2) and FIG. 48 (E2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start displaying, and the corresponding The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display ) is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 44 (C3)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the start-up situation before a game store opens can be either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization). However, the game store clerk can check the display by checking the background display after turning on the power, checking the demo movie display, and checking the guide display, increasing the efficiency of checking. Furthermore, if a background display is displayed when a game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be a background display with a guidance display, so the guidance will be clearly provided from the timing of the start of the game to the production adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment to the players, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or a cold start, after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed. Although the demo movie display is started after 004SG402 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) After this is displayed, the demo movie display may be started without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, when the power is cut off in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the low base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays the menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and the volume - Display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the light amount guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 44 (C3) and FIG. 46 (D2)), and then, Display the demo movie display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the high base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance. The display 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (Fig. 48 ( (see D2)), then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, there are two possible start-up situations before a game store opens: a low-base state and a high-base state. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. If the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide precise guidance for performance adjustments from the timing of the start of the game. A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, after the variable display ends, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and for a predetermined period of time. (for example, 30 seconds), the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display) to display the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display). display 004SG082), then displays a demo movie display, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed as the first menu guide. The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed by displaying the same animation (frame-in display) as the display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Display so that it is superimposed on the

In this way, by not immediately displaying the guidance display after the variable display ends, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demo movie display ends, the background display changes from the demo movie display. By prompting you to adjust the performance immediately after switching to , you can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and also when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when the guidance is displayed later, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is applied as an animation display for the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction , moving speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those mentioned above. Furthermore, the animation display may be in other forms such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 47, 49, and 123, the production control CPU 120 determines whether 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After the variable display ends in the high base state, the demo movie display is displayed after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the demo movie in the low base state. Based on the hot start, when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot in the high base state. The demo movie is displayed when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) has elapsed since the power failure recovery designation command was received based on the start. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5).

In this way, after the end of the variable display, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so the longer time tc1, tc2 = 120 seconds is However, after a hot start, the game store clerk is present instead of the player, so by setting tc4, tc5 = 90 seconds, which is a shorter time, the game store clerk can check the demo movie display. This can be done quickly, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 45, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After the movie display is displayed and the variable display ends in the high base state, a demo movie display is displayed when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 cold starts in the low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command based on the startup, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 cold starts in the high base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the power-on designation command was received based on the activation, a demo movie display is displayed. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome. After setting the seconds and cold starting (powering on with initialization), the demo movie display will be displayed immediately, as this is the start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming arcade. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time, the game store staff can quickly check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, which is a good result. Customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started with hot start in the low base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since then, a demo movie is displayed, and a power outage recovery designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up with hot start in the high base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since then, a demo movie display is displayed, and after receiving a power-on designation command based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by cold start in the low base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed, a demo movie display is displayed, and 60 seconds have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being cold-started in the high base state. After seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed, a demo movie is displayed. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

In this way, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is introduced into a game store, so the demo movie display is displayed immediately. By doing so, the game store clerk can immediately check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, and 45, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. When 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demonstration movie display has finished, the demo movie display is displayed again, and after the variable display has finished in the high base state, 120 seconds (the first specified period) has elapsed. After the period tc2) has elapsed, a demo movie is displayed, and after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie is displayed again, and pachinko is played in a low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the gaming machine 1 received the power-on designation command based on the cold start, the demo movie display is displayed and the demo movie display ends. After that, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and a power-on designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by cold start in the high base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since then, the demo movie is displayed, and after the demo movie display has ended, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie is displayed again. indicate. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome. A cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced at a gaming parlor, so the demonstration movie will be displayed immediately. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time so that it is displayed in , after the end of the variable display in the low base state, after the end of the fluctuation in the high base state, after a cold start, the demo movie display is displayed once, and the period until the demo movie display is displayed again is By making them common, it is possible to stably display the demo movie, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, after being started by hot start, a startup preparation display 004SG600 indicating that the startup is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 46 (D1) and FIG. 48 (E1)), Control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) at the timing related to displaying the display indicating that it is being activated. , the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) at a timing related to displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600.

In this way, by emitting light using the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) before the background display is displayed, the panel lamp and frame lamp can be made to be normal at the startup stage. It is possible to confirm whether the light is present, and then seamlessly switch to the lighting mode for waiting for a customer, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance Time elapsed Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends after the elapse of time will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. FIGS. 50A to 50E are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 50 and 51.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, in the low base state, the first demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the last fourth scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

Then, when the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal), The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E1 was satisfied, the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the second part of the caution alert in the fourth scene gradually changes to black, and the black caution alert is displayed. A fade-out display (switching display) that blends with the background display 004SG321 starts (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (Fig. 50 ( (see FIG. 50(E)), when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), it also starts the switching control for switching the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display including the fade-out display (switch display). , the display of the fade-out display (switched display) as the normal background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 51). .

Specifically, when the termination condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed after the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched, and in particular, the background display starts when the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed. Since the display starts after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, it appears that the board lamp and Normal background light emission control of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the normal background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. This can be prevented and, as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to accommodate the customer during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the low base state. The brightness data table for the background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used for control, and during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used. data table: background normal), and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) for normal background. Control is performed by switching to the brightness data table, and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081, the normal background brightness data table is changed from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). (Lamp data table: background normal) to control.

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the state according to the light emission mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed when the demo movie display switches to the background display. will be started.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIGS. 50 and 52.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 52, in the high base state, the first demonstration movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is met ends when the end condition E1 is met, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time period of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demo movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the warning in the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

When the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in purple (or green) waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied, and when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied. Then, a fade-out display (switching display) is started in which the second-part accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends with the black caution background display 004SG321 (FIG. 50(C) reference). Then, after the display screen becomes a black screen and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed from the lower left side of the display screen. When it is displayed in the frame (see Figure 50 (D)), moves to the right to the specified position and is displayed in animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (Figure 50 (E) )reference).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or Lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing display contents from demo movie display to fade-out display (switching display) Switching control to switch to the 3rd background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern is started, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the background of the high B music is performed as specified after the termination condition E1 is satisfied. It starts after the period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 52).

Specifically, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first issues a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120, which has received the extended command B11D (or B121), creates a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. :Starts light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 transmits tg (tg1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the background display starts after the predetermined period tg has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. The background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative patterns start after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background Before switching to the display 004SG082) and the display of decorative symbols, the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the high B music background is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, the production control CPU 120 displays the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting (demonstration) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the high B background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to accommodate customers during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the high base state. The brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is controlled using the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and in the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, the brightness data table for high B background ( Lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) is used to control the customer waiting time before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Control is performed by switching from the demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and from the demo movie display to the Before switching the display to 3 background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: Control by switching to background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the situation based on the light emitting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed when the demo movie display switches to the background display. will be started.

(End of customer waiting demonstration production, starting prize winning Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends when the player starts winning a prize will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 58. FIG. 53 (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends with the start winning in the low base state. In FIG. 54, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the display mode in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the high base state. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the first winning prize when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 53 to 55.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is terminated when the end condition E2 is met, that is, the first demo movie that occurs during the demo movie. If it ends based on the occurrence of a starting winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol), the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: (wait demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see Fig. 53(B)). . Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. (See FIGS. 53(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of decorative patterns is started. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols start after at least a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 55).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative symbols. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that has received the extended command: B10E normally Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 starts displaying the demo movie after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Switch to normal background display and variable display of decorative designs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the first start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. On the other hand, the demo movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E2 is satisfied, and the variable display of the small symbols is started (FIG. 54(B) reference).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols is started, and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols are displayed in the special symbol retention storage display area 5U. After the first pending display 004SG101 is displayed, a shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F is started (see FIGS. 54(C) and (D)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to 54(E). Until the 1 hold display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, the shift display of the hold display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C without starting scroll display, and each character performs a variable start action. The fluctuation start action includes, for example, a character displayed on the character display section 004SG052 moving in a manner different from the scroll display, such as moving its face or body on the pedestal display section 004SG054 or changing its expression.

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start scrolling display in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 52(F)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance gradually increases, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIG. 52(G) and FIG. 55). In addition, in the low base state (first performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 54 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative designs are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scroll display of decorative patterns, the normal background light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. It turns out.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the production control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the first starting condition is quickly established by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the first starting condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, in the low base state, the process of ending the demo movie display due to the start of variable display of the second special symbol due to irregular winnings, etc., is as shown in FIG. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the second starting winning when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIG. 57 and with reference to FIGS. 53 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied, ends when the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, the second starting prize that occurred during the demo movie ( If the demo movie display ends based on the occurrence of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, when the second starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: The brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) changes from the standby demo) to the purple (or green) brightness data table for the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). Wave lighting starts (see FIG. 53(B). In FIG. 53(B), blue wave lighting). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , the variable display of decorative patterns starts (see FIGS. 53(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing the display contents from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display). The switching control to switch to the display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols is started, but the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative symbols are changed for at least a predetermined period th( from the satisfaction of the termination condition E2). th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 53(C)).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first issues a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120 that has received the extended command B11D (or B121) controls the board lamp based on the high B background brightness data table that corresponds to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. and starts controlling the light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when the second start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) The demonstration movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 is met, and the small Variable display of symbols starts (see FIG. 124(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started, and a special After the second pending display 004SG102 is displayed in the figure pending storage display area 5U, a shift display in which the second pending display 004SG102 is moved to the active display area 5F is started (see FIG. 124(C)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol retention memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 124(C) to 124(D). 2 Hold display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the hold display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C and does not start scrolling, but the high base In this state, the fluctuation start action of each character is not executed (see FIG. 25(B)).

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to be scrolled all at once on the left, right, and center (see FIG. 124(E)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance gradually increases, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIGS. 124(F) and 124(G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second performance mode, third performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 124 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative patterns is started for a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if the first start condition is satisfied when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 lowers the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) from the demo movie display. Before switching the display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the base state, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) If the second start condition is met while the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state. Then, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, in the high base state, by first switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched, and the second control can be performed quickly. It is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the low base state and high base state, by switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched quickly. It is possible to notify that the first starting condition or the second starting condition has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the second starting condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, in the high base state, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winnings, etc., is as shown in FIG. 57. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) from the demo movie display to the first special symbol when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is displayed. Before switching the display to variable display, control is performed by switching from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the demo movie is displayed. If a second starting prize occurs while is being displayed, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol, the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting Control is performed by switching from the demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, no matter which starting prize occurs, by switching control from the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can be controlled first. By switching, it is possible to quickly notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and if a first starting prize or a second starting prize occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, Before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of desirable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the first start prize and the second start prize are If this occurs, before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, the first When a starting prize or a second starting prize occurs, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, the first start winning and the second starting winning occur. It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small symbol starts with the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting prize, the transparency of the decorative symbol will not change while the decorative symbol is performing the fluctuation start action, so the transparency of the decorative symbol will not change. Before the rate changes from the first value, the demo movie display is switched to the background display for variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, if the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 will respond to the first special symbol from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbol reaches 90%. If the display is switched to the variable display of decorative symbols that are displayed and the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the display will change from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. The display is switched to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this way, regardless of whether a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, the starting winning can be achieved. It is possible to notify that the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance, steering wheel operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by operating the steering wheel will be explained based on FIGS. 59 to 60. FIGS. 59A to 59C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by a handle operation in the low base state. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by operating the handle when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 59 and 60. In addition, below, we will explain an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is low, but an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is high will be explained. Since the operation example is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for high base, the explanation here will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, in the low base state, when the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied ends when the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, based on the steering wheel operation. After the demonstration movie display ends, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a steering wheel operation is detected and the end condition E3 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the end condition E3 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 59(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E3 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed on the display screen. is displayed in the frame from the lower left side of the screen, moves toward the right to a specified position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 59(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E3 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). At the same time, it starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), and also starts switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (design stop) display. The decorative pattern starts after at least a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E3 was satisfied (see FIG. 59(C) and FIG. 60).

Specifically, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command specifying normal background display to the display control unit 123. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the display of the decorative pattern are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display, the light emission control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, if the operation of the batting operation handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 adjusts the brightness for the customer waiting demo before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display. Switching from the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the batting ball operation handle 30 can be operated quickly by switching the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the termination condition E3 has been satisfied and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance menu operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by menu operation will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 62. FIGS. 61A to 61C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 61 to 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as a menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns starts, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the end condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E4 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started. Menu display 004SG410 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and further in front of first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 61(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 is started, but the normal background display The menu display 004SG410 starts at least after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 62).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 that has received the extension command: B10E sends the normal background and menu display to the production control CPU 120. Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to display 004SG410. On the other hand, after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 changes the demo movie display to the normal background and Switch to menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the lighting modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) have been switched, so the appearance Above, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative pattern and menu display 004SG410, the light emission control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG410 is detected using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401. Before that, switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and display panel lamps and frame lamps (except button lamp 9e). ).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it can be notified that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (first background display 004SG081 in FIG. 61) and decorative patterns starts. , a menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the termination condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) turn on in purple (or green) waves. is started (in blue in FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E4 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and a menu display 004SG410 is further displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 61(C)). ).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the high B background brightness data table from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). B Switch to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and start light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). , starts switching control to switch from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082), but at least ends third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. The process starts after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 63).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. . Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and sends the extended command :B11D (or B121), the production control CPU 120 reads the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. Alternatively, light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the lamp data table (background time saving). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) have passed, the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so it appears that the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) from the demo display is detected by the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082 ) and menu display 004SG410, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table) :background time saving)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a menu brightness data table for panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening) )), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the menu brightness data table may be a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: A brightness data table having a different light emission mode from the background time saving) may be set.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance when interruption conditions are met)
In the present embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination If either condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display or the main screen without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. The display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying the demo movie display in the low base state, if the interrupt condition is satisfied, that is, the end condition 2 (start winning), the end condition 3 (handle operation) , if any of the termination conditions E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, or if the termination condition E1 (time elapsed) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display. , and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, if the interrupt conditions are met, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (handle operation), end condition E4. (menu operation), the demo movie display or the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the display is switched to the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background is changed from the demo movie display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. Although the example is shown in which the menu display 004SG410 is displayed on the front side of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the present invention is not limited to this, and the display ends when the demo movie display is displayed. If any of the conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying the switching display.

(End of customer waiting demo performance error occurred ver.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance will be explained based on FIGS. 64 to 67. In FIG. 64, (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the low base state. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the high base state.

First, one of the errors, the out-of-ball error, will be explained. The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when no game ball is detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 even though the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5) are paid out by the payout device 004SG031 based on the fact that the payout conditions for prize balls are satisfied due to the occurrence of a winning or the like. When a payout operation (for example, a rotational operation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed, a game ball is paid out to a payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the start of the payout operation, the CPU 103 concludes that the payout has been performed normally and ends the payout process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) consisting of a mark and the text "Out of bulb error" will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will also be described later. No error flashing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when a winning occurs, the payout device 004SG031 puts out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)). operation) is performed, the CPU 103 detects game balls using the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 in a state where there are unpaid balls (for example, a state where the remaining three game balls out of five have not been detected). It is determined whether or not the period in which no detection is performed continues for a first determination period tl (for example, tl=5 seconds). Then, when it is determined that no game ball is detected within this first determination period tl, that is, the period in which no game ball is detected while there are unpaid balls continues in the first determination period tl. , the payout operation of paying out 5 game balls and the game balls within the first determination period tl until the number of unpaid balls (for example, 5) of game balls is detected, assuming that the payout was not performed normally. The retry operation of repeatedly performing the detection judgment is continued.

Then, in this retry operation period, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation is completed, in other words, there is a period in which no game balls are detected while there are unpaid balls. If it continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 may detect an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, a ball jam in the payout passage, etc. Assuming that one of the following problems may have occurred, an error designation command indicating the occurrence of an out-of-ball error is sent, and the retry operation is continued.

On the other hand, based on receiving the error designation command, the performance control CPU 120 switches the main lamp 9a to blink red for error notification, while maintaining the previous control of the light emission mode of the board lamp and side lamp 9b. do. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, error notification is performed by displaying error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) on the display screen.

In addition, after transmitting an error specification command indicating an out-of-ball error, when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, the CPU 103 sends an error specification command for production control that specifies that the out-of-ball error has been canceled. Send to CPU 120. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, from the time when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, a specific period (for example, 1 Since the error designation command for designating cancellation of the out-of-ball error is transmitted when the time period (seconds) has elapsed, the error notification can be promptly terminated without waiting until all unpaid balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error cancellation designation command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is ended.

In addition, if there are still unpaid balls remaining after sending an error specification command to cancel the error, the retry operation will be started again, and even after the third retry operation is completed, there will be no unpaid balls. If the same number of game balls are not detected, an error designation command for designating a ball out error is sent again, and the performance control CPU 120 restarts the error notification described above.

<Low base state>
Next, based on FIGS. 65 to 67, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. I will explain.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, when variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see FIG. 65(A)). Additionally, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table. .

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 selects panel lamps and frame lamps (button lamps) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). For the main lamp 9a, as shown in FIG. 66, error brightness data (lamp data table: error) is used as brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer. To make the settings, switch to flashing red light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp is set in the normal layer depending on the state. On the other hand, in the priority layer that is given priority over the normal layer, when an error occurs as described above, a brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is set. Then, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) to output brightness data to the LED driver. Then, the main lamp 9a flashes in red. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the decorative pattern display area 5L of the display screen , 5C, and 5R, error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is changed to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer The display switches to the standby demo) and starts controlling the light emitting mode based on white. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, in a low base state, a ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings, etc., continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 65, the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the production control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. After that, if the bulb out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the second If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the game (for example, a ball out error) is carried over to both the background display and the demo movie display, stable It is possible to notify a bulb out error, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a is continued using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<High base state>
Next, based on FIG. 68, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display starts. This will be explained with reference to 65.

As shown in FIG. 68, when variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (FIG. 65(A) )reference). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 sets the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)). While continuing to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the brightness data of the main lamp 9a on the priority layer, as shown in FIG. In order to set the brightness data (lamp data table: error), switch to red blinking light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is added to the normal layer. ) etc. are set depending on the state, while the priority layer that takes priority over the normal layer has a luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. Set. Then, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.). By outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a blinks in red. During this time, the production control CPU 120 uses the timer without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.) set in the normal layer. The value of continues to be updated.

Next, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen Error display 004SG700 is displayed (see FIG. 65(C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red.

In addition, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is displayed for the customer waiting demonstration. The display switches to the lamp data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), and control of the light emission mode based on white is started. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, when a ball out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings in a high base state, it continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 68, the flow is the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the second special symbol that started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a ball out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 stores an error brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the ball out error. If the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the high base state is maintained. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in , the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period In this case, if the out-of-bulb error has not been resolved, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the lamp notification of a bulb out error that occurs during variable display in either the low base state or high base state will be carried over and executed both during the background display and the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the main lamp 9a is continued to be controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are different. Specifically, white is the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error ) is the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that account for a large proportion. . Specifically, while blue is the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal), the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) is The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to have different main colors in the brightness data, , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred by the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) differ in the colors that occupy a large proportion. , the brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). , the color that occupies a large proportion is different. Specifically, while blue is the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal), the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) is The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35). In addition, the colors that make up the majority of the brightness data that make up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)) are green (for time saving) or purple (for variable certainty). On the other hand, the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and The main color of the brightness data is now different between the brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). By configuring this, it is possible to suggest that an out-of-bulb error has occurred by the light emission mode during background display, regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is displayed. and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to be different in the main color of the brightness data. , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode while the demo movie is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table : background time shortening, lamp data table: background probability change) and error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the colors that occupy a large proportion are different (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background probability variable) are used to By configuring the main colors to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing error notification, a mode is exemplified in which flashing red light emission is controlled based on the error luminance data table set in the priority layer, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when performing error notification, light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error luminance data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to flash in red.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for the error notification, but the error lamp emits light for the purpose of notifying the game store clerk. Therefore, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp that is not hidden by the player and is most easily noticed by the game store staff, but side lamps 9b or other lamps may also be used.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different proportions, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp Data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and The luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) should be configured so that the main colors in the luminance data are different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data that configures the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are used to visually recognize the board for players. The lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission modes. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the light emission mode is based on white, while in the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), it blinks in red. (See Figure 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to display the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) shown to the players. By configuring the display to have different movements (except for can.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table :Background time saving, lamp data table: background change) brightness data, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp) that are visually recognized by the player. (excluding 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) lights up a blue wave, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) lights up the blue wave. In contrast to the purple (or green) wave lighting, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the movement of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) to be shown to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the light emission mode while displaying the demo movie. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data that constitutes the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the board lamp and The frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes, and are different from the brightness data that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background short time)) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ) is configured so that the movement of By configuring the movement of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The board that is visually recognized by the player includes the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes, and the brightness that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. . Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ) is configured so that the movement of By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) show the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, the board lamp and The light emitting mode is different from that of the side lamp 9b. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the error brightness is In the data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) can be used to display the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. By configuring the motions of (excluding) to differ, it is possible to suggest that an error has occurred depending on the light emission mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: short background time, lamp data table: background definite change) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are visually checked by the player. The light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting operation mode of the panel lamp and side lamps 9b are configured to be different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background fixed), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in blue wave. , the green wave is lit or the purple wave is lit, and in the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a manner according to the state (Fig. 35 reference).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the display lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to differ in their movements, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during background display, and as a result, Suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are used to determine the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, the board lamp and The light emission operation mode of the side lamp 9b is different from that of the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting mode of the board lamp and side lamps 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different from each other. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue waves, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data Table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), the purple (or green) wave lights up, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp And the side lamp 9b lights up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player. The brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) are configured to have different movements. By configuring the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ in their movements, it is possible to suggest that a ball out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during the background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The above-mentioned light-emitting operation mode is a light-emitting mode that allows the player to see some kind of movement, such as blinking: a mode in which the light turns on and off alternately, and shaking (haze): a change in brightness. (such as changing from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400), but lighting and extinguishing with no change in brightness are not included in the light emission operation mode. For example, in the case of shaking (moya), the specific light emitting means is set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) between the first brightness data xms (or the combination of the brightness of the first color, second color, and third color). between the second brightness data (yms), the specific light emitting means is set to the second brightness (RGB is A00) (or the brightness of each of the first color, second color, and third color) The previous brightness data is the brightness of a specific light emitting means. It is preferable that the values are different.

In addition, if the game ball payout condition is met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will be activated during the second customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp will be demonstrated at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball. By switching to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movie display, the demo movie display can be displayed without any discomfort, and the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if the game ball payout conditions are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will not be able to detect the game ball during the first customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background definite) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is changed to the background. By switching to a light emitting mode corresponding to the display, the background display can be made to look natural and the processing can be shared, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the lamp is displayed during the second customer waiting period. When a run-out error occurs and a specific period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball. Then, the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration).

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detected, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, the demo movie display can be displayed without any discomfort, and as a result, it is possible to attract more and more customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , switch from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background variable) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and change the panel lamp and frame lamp. control, and when a ball out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, after the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the game ball, a specified period shorter than the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) is determined. When a period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: (background change) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detected, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode corresponding to the background display, the background display can be made to look natural, resulting in suitable customer waiting control. It can be performed.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a lamp data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in a normal state (background normal shown in FIG. 77), a fanfare background lamp data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot background lamp data table. A lamp data table for a jackpot background used during a round in a gaming state, a lamp data table for an ending background used in an ending state in which an ending effect that notifies the end of a jackpot gaming state is executed, and a lamp data table for an ending background used in a variable probability state. A background lamp data table (background probability variation shown in FIG. 77), a time saving background lamp data table used in the time saving state (background time saving shown in FIG. 77), and a customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (Fig. (Customer waiting demonstration shown in 77).

Each of the above-mentioned background lamp data tables is used without overlapping, and can be used to select one of multiple types of game states such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, variable probability state, time saving state, and customer waiting state. Depending on whether the game state is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the priority level is increased when the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table are used in this order.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background lamp data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table of the game effect lamp 9 is changed. For lamps for which brightness data is not set based on the background lamp data table, the lamps are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but among the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled. The lamp is controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is set, the brightness based on the background lamp data table Data is not output to the LED driver, and when the normal state returns after the super reach effect ends, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. In addition, after the super reach effect ends, if there is a jackpot and a fanfare state occurs, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and for any lamp, the fanfare background lamp data table The lamp is controlled in a manner based on

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the gaming state being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the gaming state being controlled. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the value of the timer without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background lamp data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, but the background lamp Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

Further, for example, the performance control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state, or outputs brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during the super reach performance. If an error occurs, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set among the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the game effect lamps 9 whose brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used as the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data. It is used preferentially over the table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, among the game effect lamps 9, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are not set are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. Among the effect lamps 9, the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table for the lamps for which brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp The brightness data based on the data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during super reach effect, it is output to the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. The brightness data based on this is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the normal background lamp corresponding to the normal state while measuring the time of the lamp control corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach production being controlled using a timer. Brightness data is output to the LED driver using the data table and SP reach lamp data table that corresponds to the super reach effect, but when an error occurs, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is output to the background lamp data table. The brightness data is outputted to the LED driver using priority over the lamp data table for SP reach. During this time, the production control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error lamp data table. However, since the luminance data included in the background lamp data table and SP reach lamp data table has a lower priority than the luminance data included in the error lamp data table, The brightness data included in the lamp data table for use in the LED driver is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the error is cleared, the production control CPU 120 outputs the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. start. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver. .

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is turned on and off in order. This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a mode other than "lights out" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 70 to 76.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 when the sub variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part. I do. The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) and sends the extended command to the production control CPU 120.The production control CPU 120 controls the display control by the display control unit 123 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123. The address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed is specified.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in FIG. 70, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs predetermined display control, it transmits an extended command (BXXX) for specifying the display control to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

In the parent table, information specifying which lamps are to be controlled (lit locations or unlit locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, and lamp control information corresponding to the lamps to be controlled. Information that specifies a child table that is referenced at the same time, and information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 72, the side lamp 9b is designated as the target of lamp control. Also, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified for side lamp 9, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and lamp control is performed by this child table. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time. In addition, in the parent table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 72, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set before then continues.

As shown in FIG. 70, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, when 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. In order to time this 600000ms (10 minutes), the counter is decremented by 1 every 10ms. That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), grandchild table: Execution time for lamp control: 500ms, execution time for lamp control using grandchild table: The order in which lamp control is performed using the grandchild table is specified. In addition, in the child table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 73, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information of the child table that was last set before that time continues to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, when performing lamp control on a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, for example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first specified grandchild table to perform lamp control on the target lamp. After performing ramp control for the target lamp and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the next step is to perform ramp control for the target lamp using the specified grandchild table, for all specified grandchild tables. They are to be performed in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the side lamp 9b, the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until the first 500 ms is measured, and then the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time is measured for 500 ms. , Next, ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, one grandchild table is used as a grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, for example, as shown in FIG. :XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 may be specified, and although not shown, two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1 may be specified. When one grandchild table is designated as a grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to The same lamp control is performed for both the lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables. The left side lamp 9b is controlled by the left side lamp 9b, and the right side lamp 9b is controlled by using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b have a common table. While lamp control is performed, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the grandchild table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 74, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms , Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time to be controlled: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5aa5aa, 0x5aa5aa, 0x5aa5aa, 0x5aa5aa, 0x5aa, execution time with luminance data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5aa5aa, 0x5AAAA AA5AA, 0x5aa5aa, 0x5aa5aa , 0x5AA, an execution time of 40 ms for lamp control based on this luminance data is specified in the order in which lamp control based on these luminance data is executed. In addition, in the grandchild table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 74, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table that was last set before then continues.

In the luminance data of the left side lamp 9b and right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and No. 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the second lamp, and the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the corresponding data indicate the RGB values of the 5th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 The value of the digit indicates the RGB value of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and 8 is the value of the RGB of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the eighth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to number 10 indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

Although not particularly shown, when different grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~) , the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1 of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4. The value indicates the value of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the value of the lowest digit to third digit of the data corresponding to No. 3 and 4 indicates the value of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the lamp of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8. The value of the 3rd digit indicates the RGB value of the 8th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 9 and 10 are the values of the left side lamp. The RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 are the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. In the brightness data of (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 are the values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 8 indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 4 digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 9 and 10 The values in the 6th to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 11 are the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. It indicates the value.

Further, although not particularly shown, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) that specifies the movable lamp 9d, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the 1st from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Yes, the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the lower values of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values in the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. Indicates the RGB value of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. The value of the third digit indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicates the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. This shows the RGB values of the lamp. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attacker lamp 9c, the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. It shows the RGB values of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. The third digit value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) that specifies the button lamp 9e, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B". The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. . In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can be lit in colors according to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. . As an example, data "F00" is outputted from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. Further, data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. Furthermore, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 70, when controlling the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120, for example, first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next designated brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated brightness data in the designated order. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 is sent to the LED driver until the first 100ms is measured. Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is counted, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x0000 until the next 120ms is counted. 00, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data until 120ms is counted: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver, then 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until next 40ms is counted. Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the specified grandchild table. On the other hand, while outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table that specifies is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for third lamp control, and grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified as the time for lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b are "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" 5AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA , 0x499'', 1 in the order of ``0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA'', and ``0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499''. It is specified to be executed at 00ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: Until the time reaches 500ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500 ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will start, but some abnormality must occur. In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table, child table, etc. specified by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

Furthermore, as shown in the parent table shown in Figure 72, 600000ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. . That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, as in the child table shown in FIG. 73, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is Prevents ramp control from being performed again by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table due to the timer of the parent table still remaining when the value of the timer corresponding to the table becomes 0. play a role.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the luminance data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. I can do it. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the lamp data table used during non-gaming 1]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only button blinking white and blinking red are used during gaming).

The background normally shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the effect control CPU 120, after the power is restored (when controlled to the normal state), After the end of the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the gaming state, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the fluctuation of the last game in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled to the normal state), the normal state After the demo movie ends and after the menu display in the normal state ends, when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B10E that is sent in conjunction with the control to display the normal background image, the normal background image is used. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

The background time saver shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time saver background image, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation after the power is restored (when controlled to the time saver state), The display control unit 123 displays the time-saving background image after the variation in the time-saving state ends, after the jackpot game state ends (when controlled in the time-saving state), after the demo movie ends in the time-saving state, and after the menu display in the time-saving state ends. When receiving the extended command: B11D that is transmitted in conjunction with the control, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The background probability change shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the background image for probability variation, and the performance control CPU 120, after the power is restored (when controlled to the probability variation state), The display control unit 123 displays the background image for probability variation after the fluctuation in the probability variation state ends, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled in the probability variation state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability variation state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability variation state. When the extended command B121 transmitted in conjunction with the control is received, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance. When the unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display an image corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the customer waiting demonstration.

The white lighting of the button shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to non-gaming except during initialization notification, and after the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 After the end of the notification and after the end of the operation promotion performance, when receiving the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control section 123, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting.

The blinking button white shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e that corresponds to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the operation promotion effect that causes the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e to blink white during the game. When receiving the extended command: B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

The blinking button red shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation promotion effect in which the display control unit 123 causes the button lamp 9e to blink red during the game. When receiving the extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the corresponding image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

Note that the button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation promotion presentation; , lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting. In addition, since the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e are not specified for button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing, the production control CPU 120 is extended to specify button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing. Even when a command is received, lamp control based on the previous lamp data table is continued for the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and the production control CPU 120 transmits the lamp data table as the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification. When the extended command: BFFF is received, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using initialization.

The error shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification, and the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of the error. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the error.

In addition, since the error does not specify any game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, it will not specify the game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a. Continues lamp control based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp data table: background normal]
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal parent table used when extended command: B10E is received, and FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal child table. FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B10E transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a normal background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background normal parent table based on the extended command: B10E. specify. Background As shown in FIG. 78, the normal parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: When B10E is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the background normal parent table.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 79, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (FIG. 80) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO, as shown in FIG. 80, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: and similar Repeat control. In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: .

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, the normal background parent table has child tables that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c. In the child table, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same manner as above by referring to the child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table. I do.

Background The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the normal child table refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is also set to a brightness based on blue, and the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on blue.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the normal background parent table, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background time saving]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table:background time saving used when extended command: B11D is received, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table:background time saving. FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background time saving grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B11D transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a time-saving background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background time-saving parent table based on the extended command: B11D. specify. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the background time saving parent table has child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background time saving child table refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, brightness based on green is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on green.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background time saving parent table, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background change]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table: background probability variation used when extended command: B121 is received, and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table: background probability variation. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the ramp data table: grandchild table of background probability variation.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B121 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a background image for probability variation, the production control CPU 120 creates a parent table for background probability variation based on the extended command: B121. specify. As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the parent table for background probability changes has child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of background probability variation refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, the brightness based on purple is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on purple.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the background probability change, so the lamp control based on the lamp data table (button lit white) that was previously set continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: Customer waiting demo]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when extended command: BF01 is received, and FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo. FIG. 92 to FIG. 98 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration.

When the display control unit receives an extended command: BF01 that is transmitted when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display performance, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. do. As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) that is initially set in the child table: As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. A common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main The lamp 9a is turned off.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the main title part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the first part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and sets the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. Thereby, the main lamp 9a continues to be turned off until receiving a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the main lamp 9a switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to control the side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, lamp control of the side lamp 9b is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the side lamp 9b are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) that is initially set in the child table: As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamp with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, over the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration production, the lighting color of the side lamp 9b changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character appearing. do.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 12500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-1 constituting the customer waiting demonstration production, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in green over the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-2 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in green over the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-3 constituting the customer waiting demonstration production, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 5000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, the production control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the side lamp 9b changes to rainbow colors over the period of the first part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until it receives a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the side lamp 9b switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 98, child tables that also refer to the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo. The grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is With reference to the table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same procedure as above.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash in white for 500 ms after the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance and at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, thereby configuring the customer waiting demonstration performance. It lights up in white for the period of the company name part, and the lighting pattern changes according to the movement of the letters of the company name, and then remains off for 500ms, and appears for the period of model introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance. The lighting color changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white depending on the type of character being played, and the lighting continues to be white for the period of model introduction 2-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. In addition, the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. , and the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. Then, the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, and then the light goes off for 500ms, and the light emission color changes to rainbow colors during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, forming the customer waiting demonstration performance. It flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part, changes to a rainbow color over the period of the subtitle 1 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance. , the emitting color changes to a rainbow color during the period of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and then turns off for 500 ms, and during the period of the attention calling 1 and attention calling 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demonstration performance, respectively. It lights up in white, then remains off for 500ms, remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving the new extended command, switches to the light emission mode based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command: BF01 based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, thereby controlling the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c change in light emission color and light emission mode according to each part of the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. will be carried out.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo includes the company name part, model introduction 1 part, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2- for the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. 2. Model introduction 3-2, Model introduction 2-3, Since a grandchild table is specified for each main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention part, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Lamp control can be performed so that the lamp 9c emits light according to each part.

In addition, in the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a grandchild table is specified for each company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention calling part. For model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3, which make up the model introduction part, the grandchild table of 1 is specified, so the overall The amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo does not have a grandchild table of the button lamp 9e, and lamp control is performed for the button lamp 9e based on the grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, so the total amount of data is can be reduced.

Furthermore, for the grandchild table that is controlled to be turned off and the grandchild table that is caused to emit light in rainbow colors, lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used in other parent tables, so the overall amount of data can be reduced. The grandchild table that temporarily emits white light may also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lit white]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: button white lighting parent table used when extended command: B001 is received, and FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white lighting child table. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white lighting grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after the power is restored, after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the gaming state, and after the end of the operation promotion performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the extended command. : Specify the parent table for button white lighting based on B001. As shown in FIG. 99, the button white lighting parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B001, the button lamp 9e is controlled by referring to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white lighting.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 100, the grandchild table and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referred to are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (FIG. 101) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, as shown in FIG. 101, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to the brightness to emit white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the extended commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the button lit white, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button flashing white]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white blinking parent table used when extended command: B002 is received, and FIG. 103 is the setting of the lamp data table: button white blinking child table. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking white button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B002, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to flash white, Command: Specify the parent table of the white blinking button based on B002. As shown in FIG. 102, the parent table of the button flashing white is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B002, the button lamp 9e is controlled by referring to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white blinking.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 103, the grandchild table and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (FIG. 104) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, as shown in FIG. 104, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. In the brightness data set in the grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table of the white button blinking, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button blinking red]
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: Button blinking red, which is used when the extended command: B003 is received, and FIG. 106 is the setting of the child table of the lamp data table: Button blinking red. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking red button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B003, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to blink in red, Command: Specify the parent table of the blinking red button based on B003. As shown in FIG. 105, the parent table of the button flashing red is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B003, the button lamp 9e is controlled by referring to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of the button flashing red.

As shown in FIG. 106, the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is set with the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (FIG. 107) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP.

As shown in FIG. 107, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to have a red light emitting brightness and an off state, and the button lamp 9e blinks in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the button blinking red, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: initialization notification]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification parent table used when the extended command: BFFF is received, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification child table. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of initialization notification.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: BFFF that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the production control CPU 120 issues an initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. Specify the parent table of. As shown in FIG. 108, the initialization notification parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: : When BFFF is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 109, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (FIG. 110) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, as shown in FIG. 110, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set to the brightness to emit red light, and the main lamp 9a lights up in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. Furthermore, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the initialization notification parent table has child tables that also refer to the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. In addition, grandchild tables to be referred to are set in these child tables, and luminance data to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 Referring to the child table specified in the table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Controls the lamp 9c and button lamp 9e.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of the initialization notification refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, the brightness that causes red light to be emitted is also set. Also, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are lit in red.

[Lamp data table: error]
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, and FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the error based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 111, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: , the main lamp 9a is controlled by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the parent table of the error.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 112, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (FIG. 113) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR, as shown in FIG. 113, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchildren table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. .

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the error, so they must be set before that. Lamp control based on the lamp data table continues.

[Common table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referred to by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in FIGS. 114 to 118, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, A common table (XD___L~_OFF) that turns off the attacker lamp 9c and button lamp 9e, and slowly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors. Equipped with a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02) that changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e into rainbow colors at high speed, etc. .

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to perform lamp control using a table.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set in different parent tables to perform lamp control in this way, data capacity can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment, the first effect mode can be executed in a low base state, the second effect mode can be executed in a low accuracy high base state, and the third effect mode can be executed in a high accuracy high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more types of production modes in a low base state, or it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in a high base state, Only one type of production mode may be executable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a vertical scroll display is performed in the first performance mode, a rotating display is performed in the second performance mode, and a vertical scroll display is performed in the third performance mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the manner of variable display of decorative symbols in each performance mode can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot gaming state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. , a small winning game state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state is defined as a low-accuracy low-base state, and the special states in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than the normal state are defined as a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the normal state may be a low probability state, and the special state may be a high probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), and when the jackpot game ends, the time saving state or the probability variable state is set. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in a state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control to a time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or to be advantageous in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of Pachinko machine 1). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game is changed to time-saving state A, and the predetermined state is set without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Time saving state B is a time saving state that is controlled based on the number of times variable display has been executed, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time-saving state that is controlled based on what has been done may be called the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the above-mentioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results for winning the time-saving state C are provided, and the control is performed according to the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C. The number of variable display times during which time saving control is performed may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be further described below based on examples.

[Form A1-1]
The gaming machine of form A1-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed (Figures 157 to 160 , Fig. 169, Fig. 170, Fig. 176, Fig. 187, Fig. 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. In addition, since the type of background image is different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A1-2]
The gaming machine of form A1-2 is
It is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect in one variable display,
When the specific effect is executed without executing the predetermined effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed without executing the specific effect (FIGS. 157 to 160) reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-3]
The gaming machine of form A1-3 is
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image,
The first predetermined part is executable when the first background image is displayed;
A second background image is displayed during execution of the second predetermined part,
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background inciting effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the second background image is displayed by the second background stimulation effect (see FIG. 154).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect or by the second background enhancing effect.

[Form A1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-1 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state.
When the predetermined effect is executed before the execution of the specific effect, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 157 to 160).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the user expect that both the predetermined performance and the specific performance will be executed.

[Form A1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-2 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The background images include a first background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, and the decoration identification information. a third background image after the is in the reach state, and a fourth background image that is more advantageous than the third background image after the decoration identification information is in the reach state,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with the second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see FIGS. 169, 170, 176, 187, and 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-3 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 183, 184, and 197).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effects of the second predetermined part and the specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form A1-4-4]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-4 is
The fragment image is capable of performing rotational movements;
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image;
When the fragment image is at the second angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 207 and 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A1-4-5]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-5 is
When the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 207 and 213),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A1-5]
The gaming machine of form A1-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 208),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A1-6]
The gaming machine of form A1-6 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 196).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-7-1]
The gaming machine of form A1-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect have the same period of time until they are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 199 and 204);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A1-7-2 is
The visibility of a fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 199 and 204).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A1-7-3]
The gaming machine of form A1-7-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect (see FIG. 208). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-8]
The gaming machine of form A1-8 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means, and The number of rotation operations performed from when the fragment images of No. 2 are displayed until they are hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIGS. 207 and 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A2-1]
The gaming machine of form A2-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 169, Fig. 170, Fig. 176, Fig. 187, Fig. 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to suitably execute the predetermined effect and the specific effect by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form A2-2]
The gaming machine of form A2-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIGS. 187 and 192);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A2-3]
The gaming machine of form A2-3 is
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part;
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 187);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the fragment image can be started using the effect image without causing any discomfort.

[Form A2-4]
The gaming machine of form A2-4 is
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 176),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A3-1]
The gaming machine of form A3-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 172, 179, 189, 194, and 196). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby making it possible to perform various timings. In addition, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed differs between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form A3-2]
The gaming machine of form A3-2 is
In one variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can be executed once,
When the predetermined effect is executed multiple times, there is a higher expectation that the predetermined effect will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the predetermined effect is executed once.
There is a higher expectation that the specific effect will be controlled in an advantageous state when the specific effect is executed once than when the predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see FIGS. 157 to 160);
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A3-3]
The gaming machine of form A3-3 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 172(C) and 179(C)),
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form A3-4-1 is
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that it moves at a first speed during a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and from the specific timing it moves non-stop in the display area of the display means. Displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed over a second period until it is displayed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 196),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form A3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the same time as a fragment image is displayed in a specific performance,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 194, 196, and 205).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form A3-5]
The gaming machine of form A3-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plural fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plural fragment images in the specific performance. This number is greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image is displayed until it is hidden from the display area of the display means (see FIG. 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A4-1]
The gaming machine of form A4-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment images in the specific performance are images in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (Figs. 172, 179, 183, 184, 189, 194, 206),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby making it possible to perform various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even performances in which the fragment image is similarly displayed can give suitably different impressions. It is possible to increase interest in games.

[Form A4-2]
The gaming machine of form A4-2 is
The specific performance is a performance that includes displaying a special image together with the display of the fragment image,
The fragment image and special image in a specific performance are in a superimposed relationship,
The first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image can be recognized,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image and at least a portion of the special image (see FIG. 206). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the display mode of the fragment image different for each performance, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of each performance.

[Form A4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A4-3-1 is
The fragment image in a specific performance can be rotated,
When the first fragment image is at the first angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the first fragment image is at the second angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 207 and 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A4-3-2 is
In the specific effect, when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 207 and 213). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A5-1]
The gaming machine of form A5-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 172, Figure 179, Figure 189, Figure 194),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragmented image moves is the same between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required for it to disappear is different, so the fragmented image can be displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A5-2]
The gaming machine of form A5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 201 and 205).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A5-3]
The gaming machine of form A5-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 208). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form A5-4]
The gaming machine of form A5-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (for example, see FIG. 207(A)),
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific presentation is hidden in the display area of the display means in a manner that it moves outside the display area,
Among the fragment images in the specific performance, the second fragment image different from the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (for example, in FIG. 207(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment images are displayed between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A6-1]
The gaming machine of form A6-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode in accordance with the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes the mode from the crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is to display an object image, and to perform a predetermined effect from when a crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed according to the movement of the object image. It is a production that starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from the display of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode to the display of the fragment image in the predetermined production is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in the specific production. long,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIGS. 173 to 175, FIG. 183, FIG. 184, FIG. 190 , see Figure 191),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, and the display period of the fragment image is different, Even a performance in which images are displayed can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A6-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see FIGS. 183, 184, 189, and 194),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form A6-3]
The gaming machine of form A6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is continued for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part. (see FIG. 190).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the third predetermined part is not executed.

[Form A6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form A6-4-1 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
There is a first pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state.
When the variable display is performed by the first pattern, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 190);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form A6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-4-2 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, there is a higher expectation that the third predetermined part will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 157 to 160).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the third predetermined part in the predetermined performance is being executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-5]
The gaming machine of form A6-5 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 173(G) and 175(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-6]
The gaming machine of form A6-6 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
It is possible to highlight the decoration identification information in the reach state in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period in which the decoration identification information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 174(I) to 174(K));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the game is in a ready-to-reach state.

[Form A6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-1 is
A motion-enhanced image can be displayed in response to the motion of the object image in the first predetermined part;
It can be displayed in a display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Displaying a motion-enhanced image at the timing of starting display of a crack precursor image in a crack mode (see FIG. 173(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to change the crack precursor image into a crack pattern without causing any discomfort.

[Form A6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-2 is
It is possible to display small fragment images together with motion-enhanced images.
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion-enhanced image (see FIG. 173(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a crack mode.

[Form A6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-3 is
an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image in the second predetermined part;
Do not display the action emphasis image when displaying the effect image (see FIG. 173(H) and FIG. 190),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the first predetermined part different from the second predetermined part and prevent the predetermined performance from becoming a monotonous performance.

[Form A6-7-4]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different (FIG. 190);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in the way they are presented in the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A6-8]
The gaming machine of form A6-8 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 183, 184, and 197).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A6-9]
The gaming machine of form A6-9 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 196).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A6-10]
The gaming machine of form A6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed to when it becomes hidden in the display area of the display means is longer than from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it becomes hidden from the display area of the display means. (see Figures 190 and 191),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form A7-1]
The gaming machine of form A7-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to perform a motion promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display operation promotion images in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The movement promotion performance is a performance that displays a movement promotion image for a valid movement period and changes the display mode of the movement promotion image from a movement promotion mode to a motion completion mode when a movement of the player is detected.
When the movement promotion image changes from the movement promotion mode to the movement completion mode due to the movement promotion effect, the specific effect can be executed,
During at least a part of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the motion promotion image of the motion completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode, and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (FIGS. 169, 170, 179, 187, (see Figure 194),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the interest of a specific performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance structure.

[Form A8-1]
The gaming machine of form A8-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer differs before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (Fig. 169, Fig. 170, Fig. 172, Fig. 187, Fig. 189),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, in the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the types of background images are different between before and after the fragment image is displayed, so even if the same effect displays the fragment image, It is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form A8-2]
The gaming machine of form A8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 172, FIG. 187, and FIG. 189),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A9-1]
The gaming machine of form A9-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. ,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 169, Fig. 170, Fig. 172, Fig. 187, Fig. 189),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be suitably executed by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form A9-2]
The gaming machine of form A9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 169, 170, and 172),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A10-1]
The gaming machine of form A10-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in such a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 177, FIG. 178, 187, see Figure 193, Figure 196),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even if the fragment image is displayed in the same way, it gives suitably different impressions and enhances the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form A10-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-2 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169(G) and 177(H)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A10-3-1 is
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and in a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden. displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 196),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can provide a difference in how the fragment images are presented, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 177 and 196);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form A10-4]
The gaming machine of form A10-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (see FIG. 207(A));
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden from view in the display area of the display means by moving toward the outside of the display area,
Among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (FIG. 207(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second specific effect can provide a difference in how the fragment image is displayed, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A10-5]
The gaming machine of form A10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 183, 184, and 197).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form A10-6-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to be hidden in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figures 199 and 200),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-6-2 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction has different visibility depending on when it starts displaying and before it disappears (see FIGS. 199 and 200).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form A10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part. greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image among the images is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-7-2 is
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 207 and 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form A10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 207 and 213);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form A10-8]
The gaming machine of form A10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be performed,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
When the first predetermined effect is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 157 to 160);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form A10-9]
The gaming machine of form A10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 187 and 193),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A11-1]
The gaming machine of form A11-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 172, 169, 170, 189, and 187).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display modes of the fragment images are different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment images, suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased. I can do it.

[Form A12-1]
The gaming machine of form A12-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions, at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a predetermined direction.
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figure 169, Figure 170, Figure 177, Figure 178, Figure 187, Figure 193),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, although the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required until the fragment images are hidden is different, so even if the fragment image is displayed in the same manner, it is suitable. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A13-1]
The gaming machine of form A13-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode in accordance with the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes from a first crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image, displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image. a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of corresponding fragment images;
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from starting the second predetermined part to moving to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from starting the fourth predetermined part to moving to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 173, FIG. 174, (see Figures 190 and 187),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed and the display period of the fragment image are different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if it is a performance, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A13-2]
The gaming machine of form A13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image;
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the third pre-crack mode to the third crack mode (see FIGS. 173 and 169);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A14-1]
The gaming machine of form A14-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect can be executed at a specific timing after executing the first predetermined effect,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
When executing the second predetermined effect after the first predetermined effect, the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 166, 167, see Figure 185),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be performed continuously, it is possible to continuously surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to continuously surprise the player. , because the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is hidden, a new crack precursor image is displayed even though the fragment image is already displayed. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the production effect.

[Form A14-2]
The gaming machine of form A14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The position at which the display of the fragment image starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 166, 167, and 208);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-3]
The gaming machine of form A14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in the first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (see FIGS. 166(F) and 167(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can have different presentations of the special image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-4]
The gaming machine of form A14-4 is
The length of the display period of the fragment image is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the length of the display period of the special image is common (see FIG. 185);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A14-5]
The gaming machine of form A14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which a second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined effect is not executed after the first predetermined effect is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that when the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 151);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form A14-6]
The gaming machine of form A14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 196);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be related to each other and the interest can be increased.

[Form A14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form A14-7-1 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 166(C), FIG. 167(C), and FIG. 185),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIG. 185);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form A15-1]
The gaming machine of form A15-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification effect that the control is not in an advantageous state, displaying a crack precursor image of the second crack mode and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image;
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires the first period to be hidden in the display area of the display means,
The fragment image when it is notified by the notification effect that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state requires a second period different from the first period before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 169, FIG. 170, 182, see FIG. 187, FIG. 195(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, it is possible to surprise the player by displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image. By displaying the crack precursor image together with the fragment images that require different periods of time, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A15-2]
The gaming machine of form A15-2 is
The crack precursor image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state has a longer display period than the crack precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 187);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the vehicle is not controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A15-3]
The gaming machine of form A15-3 is
There is a first fragment image with the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part,
There is a second fragment image that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is reported that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state,
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (for example, see FIGS. 170(J) and 182(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A15-4]
The gaming machine of form A15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIG. 197);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A15-5]
The gaming machine of form A15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction ( For example, see FIGS. 199 and 201),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images more relevant and more interesting.

[Form A15-6]
The gaming machine of form A15-6 is
In the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed when it is reported that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state, the specific Can display color effect images,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169(G) and 182(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display patterns of the effect images different, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A16-1]
The gaming machine of form A16-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
When the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the first light emission pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emission means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed,
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification effect in which it is reported that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state is completed (FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 182, FIG. 187, 195(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, and furthermore, it continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the crack precursor image and notification effect are completed. By using the second light emitting pattern, it is possible to notify the player that the control is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A17-1]
The gaming machine of form A17-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed (Figs. 169(A) to 169(F), Fig. 170(I) ~See Figure 170(K)),
The display mode of the background image differs between before it is announced whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect and when the fragment image is displayed when it is announced that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state (Fig. 182(A), FIG. 182(B), FIG. 182(D), FIG. 187, FIG. 195(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image, it is possible to surprise the player, and furthermore, by using the crack precursor image, it is possible to control whether or not to be controlled to be in an advantageous state. By changing the display mode of the background image before being notified, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A18-1]
The gaming machine of form A18-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images;
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a sixth predetermined part,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( (See Figure 169, Figure 170, Figure 172, Figure 187, Figure 189),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Moreover, by displaying the fragment image by operating the movable body after displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form A18-2]
The gaming machine of form A18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while being changed from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode;
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 187 and 189),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A18-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is commonly displayed at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169(G) and 172(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form A18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A18-3-2 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the movable body is placed at the advanced position (see FIG. 172(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form A18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form A18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 189);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form A18-4]
The gaming machine of form A18-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the motion of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first motion of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 189);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A19-1]
The gaming machine of form A19-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production that includes
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means. (see FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 180, FIG. 181, FIG. 187, and FIG. 195(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Moreover, by operating the movable body and displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form A19-2]
The gaming machine of form A19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while being changed from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode;
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 187 and 195),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form A19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A19-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169(G) and 180(E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A19-3-2 is
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
The display of the effect image is started when the second operation is started (see FIG. 180(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form A19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form A19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 195);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form A19-4]
The gaming machine of form A19-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the motion of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first motion of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 195);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A20-1]
The gaming machine of form A20-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a third predetermined part,
The specific effect is to display a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect according to the first movement of the movable body. It is a production that starts displaying,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
In the specific performance, the movable body can perform a second action different from the first action, and starts the second action of the movable body after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( (See Figure 169, Figure 170, Figure 176, Figure 187, Figure 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, so that it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and further, By operating the movable body and displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form A20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form A20-2-1 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the first operation is started (see FIG. 176(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of a specific production can be enhanced.

[Form A20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form A20-2-2 is
The effect image can be displayed over a display period including a first display period and a second display period,
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form A20-3]
The gaming machine of form A20-3 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the specific performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled in an advantageous state by operating it,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the movement of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first movement of the movable body in the specific performance (see FIG. 192);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A21-1]
The gaming machine of form A21-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
Even if a crack precursor image in the first crack mode or the second crack mode is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
The image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode or the second crack mode is not displayed is displayed with the first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed in the second visibility over a predetermined range. is displayed with the first visibility over different specific ranges (see FIGS. 169(E), (F), FIG. 171(C), FIG. 187, and FIG. 188),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. Moreover, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the crack precursor image differs depending on the type of crack mode, even if the same crack precursor image is displayed, it gives a suitably different impression and improves the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form A21-2]
The gaming machine of form A21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view of FIG. 171(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form A21-3]
The gaming machine of form A21-3 is
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The corresponding image when the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 171(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form A21-4]
The gaming machine of form A21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image in the first crack mode (see FIG. 188);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can show a difference in the way the crack precursor image is displayed, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A22-1]
The gaming machine of form A22-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The visibility of the background image differs between when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack mode has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack mode.
The degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed than when the first type of crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed. High (see Figures 168 to 170, Figures 186 and 187),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. In addition, players will start to pay attention to the type of crack precursor image in the second crack mode, and similarly, even if the performance displays a crack precursor image, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the enjoyment of the game. can be increased.

[Form A22-2]
The gaming machine of form A22-2 is
The background that is displayed below the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first type of second crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed. Image visibility is different (see Figures 169 and 168),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the crack precursor images different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A22-3]
The gaming machine of form A22-3 is
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can commonly display an effect image of a specific color,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second timing predetermined effect (see FIGS. 169 and 168),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form A23-1]
The gaming machine of form A23-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of a compatible image that supports variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in the special display layer,
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed in a second predetermined display layer that has a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a second crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the change effect can be executed (see FIGS. 169 to 171, FIG. 187, FIG. 188, and FIG. 215),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect that displays the first crack precursor image and the second predetermined effect that displays the second crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, so that the game can be played at various timings. Furthermore, even if the crack precursor image is displayed in the same way, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, giving suitably different impressions and increasing the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

[Form A23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form A23-2-1 is
The change performance is a performance in which a predetermined object image is displayed, and the predetermined object image performs an action that acts on the corresponding display to change the display mode of the corresponding display,
The predetermined object image can be displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 215);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect to the minimum.

[Form A23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form A23-2-2 is
In response to the movement of the predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see FIG. 215);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be suitably executed even while the second predetermined effect is being executed.

[Form A24-1]
The gaming machine of form A24-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a first predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
A special performance can be executed after the second predetermined performance is executed,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The display mode is different between the fragment image in the first predetermined effect and the fragment image in the second predetermined effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes an image in a suggestive manner that suggests that a special performance will be performed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined effect is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined effect (see FIGS. 169, 187, 192, 216, and 217);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, and the relevance between the fragment image in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter can be increased, the same can be achieved. Even an effect in which a fragment image is displayed can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A24-2]
The gaming machine of form A24-2 is
There are 1st special performance and 2nd special performance.
When the second special performance is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the first special performance is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special performance will be performed, and a second suggestion mode that suggests that the second special performance will be performed (FIG. 216, FIG. 217, 218),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form A24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible,
More fragment images in the transmission mode are displayed than fragment images in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 218).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form A24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A24-3-2 is
The debris image is capable of performing rotational movements;
In the second predetermined effect, the amount of rotational movement is greater in the fragment image in the transparent mode than in the fragment image in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 218),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form A24-4]
The gaming machine of form A24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed,
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 217);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form A25]
The gaming machine of form A25 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 176(C)) can be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 204(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 204(B1)). It is a production that includes
The execution period of the first stage effect is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first aspect (see FIGS. 192 and 204),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a suitable crack pattern can be realized by creating a reservoir in the crack by the front stage rendering and giving a sense of speed to the crack image in the first aspect.

[Form A26]
The gaming machine of form A26 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 176(C)) can be executed,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to display the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 204 (B1)) and then change the broken image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 204 (B2) to (B5)). It is a production that includes
The period in which the broken image is displayed in the first mode and the period in which it is displayed in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage effect (see FIGS. 192 and 204).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period during which the crack image is in the first mode and the second mode is made longer than the execution period of the first stage effect, thereby giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form A27]
The gaming machine of form A27 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the display period of the cracked image.
It is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the cracked image over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 185 to 195, Figures 199 to 205),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image has the role of hiding the first displayed portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling its role, prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form A28]
The gaming machine of form A28 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means displays the effect image when displaying the cracked image in the first aspect, and hides the effect image at a timing before displaying the cracked image in the second aspect (FIGS. 185 to 195, (see Figures 199 to 205),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form A29]
The gaming machine of form A29 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to display the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 203 (B1)) and then change the broken image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 203 (B2) to (B5)). It is a production that includes
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIGS. 191 and 203);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed.

[Form A30]
The gaming machine of form A30 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 199(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 199(B1)). It is a production that includes
The specific effect is to change the cracked image from the third mode to the fourth mode (FIGS. 203(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the third mode (FIG. 203(B1)). It is a production that includes
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image of the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( (See FIG. 187, FIG. 191, FIG. 199, FIG. 203, FIG. 207(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form A31]
The gaming machine of form A31 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in a normal state, and after displaying the cracked image in the first mode (FIG. 199 (B1)), the cracked image is changed from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 199(B1)). 199 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a production that includes changing the appearance (Fig. 203 (B2) to (B5)),
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image of the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( 154 to 156, FIG. 187, FIG. 191, FIG. 199, FIG. 203, and FIG. 207(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form A32]
The gaming machine of form A32 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
The background image can be displayed in a display layer that has a lower priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding variable display in a display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific brightness data table,
Light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table until a specific timing in the display period of the cracked image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a brightness data table corresponding to the background image (Fig. 185 to 187 and 190),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission control of the light emitting means can be suitably performed when a broken image is displayed.

[Form A33]
The gaming machine of form A33 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 185 to 191);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form A34]
The gaming machine of form A34 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 185), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form A35]
The gaming machine of form A35 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 185), and outputs a sound corresponding to the broken image when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern. outputs a sound to notify that it is being controlled (see Figure 195),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions depending on the gaming state.

[Form A36]
The gaming machine of form A36 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 185), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 192),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form A37]
The gaming machine of form A37 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The sound output means is
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack precursor image is displayed,
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed,
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 212);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form A38]
The gaming machine of form A38 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in conjunction with the movement display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When a crack precursor image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image,
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 212);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form A39]
The gaming machine of form A39 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the operation speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different,
In the second pattern, since the amount of variation is 0, the operation speed of the third size fragment image and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern is common ( (see Figures 197 and 198),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images falling somewhat slowly and quickly, creating a cracking pattern that shows realistic movement. The second pattern can be used when you want to, and the second pattern has the same effect on the animation regardless of the size, so it flies in the same way and falls in the same way, so you can select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. I can do it.

[Form A40]
The gaming machine of form A40 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The fragment image is displayed in a manner that it falls after the display starts,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The speed at which the debris images fall differs due to the different settings of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 197 and 198).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images fall, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form A41]
The gaming machine of form A41 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
Since the settings of the gravity direction are different between the first pattern and the second pattern, the moving direction of the fragment image is different when it is displayed moving (see FIGS. 197 and 198).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the directions in which the fragment images travel, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form A42]
The gaming machine of form A42 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, second pattern, and third pattern have the same first parameter value and different second parameter values (see FIGS. 197 and 198);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed and a common part is created for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is different to construct a variety of patterns, making it stable and versatile. It is possible to construct a display pattern of fragment images.

[Form A43]
The gaming machine of form A43 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter,
The value of the first parameter is different between the second pattern and the third pattern, and the value of the second parameter is common (see FIGS. 197 and 198);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images by creating common parts for fragment images in each pattern and configuring them with different parameter values. .

[Form A44]
The gaming machine of form A44 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern ( 154, 156, 169 to 171),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when displaying a cracked image in the normal state and when displaying a cracked image in the special state.

[Form A45]
The gaming machine of form A45 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
An effect image is displayed when displaying the cracked image of the first aspect, and the effect image is hidden at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second aspect (FIG. 154, FIG. 156, FIG. 169, 170),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form A46]
The gaming machine of form A46 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The cracked image displayed according to the first pattern and the cracked image displayed according to the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The crack images displayed by the first pattern and the crack images displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see FIGS. 154, 156, and 169 to 171).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by the display pattern of the cracked image that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form A47]
The gaming machine of form A47 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (FIG. 151, (See FIG. 153(C), FIG. 154, FIG. 156),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the broken image, it is possible to draw more attention to the display pattern of the broken image.

[Form A48]
The gaming machine of form A48 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The first type of fragment image is a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIGS. 204 and 218).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form A49]
The gaming machine of form A49 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The display mode is different between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image,
The display period of the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 204 and 218),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form A50]
The gaming machine of form A50 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The amount of debris images displayed in the first area, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, is larger than that displayed in the second area, which is the display area where the movable body overlaps (FIG. 204, (see Figure 218),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragments can be suitably displayed while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means.

[Form A51]
The gaming machine of form A51 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves from a first area, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, to a second area, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps. ,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 204 and 218).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images that do not enter the area where the movable body is superimposed make it possible to recognize that it has broken, while images of the fragments that pass through the area where the movable body overlaps make it possible to create a dynamic image. It is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form A52]
The gaming machine of form A52 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see FIGS. 204 and 218);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means, the fragment image can be suitably displayed so as not to miss the fragment image.

[Form A53]
The gaming machine of form A53 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of first type fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image requires a shorter period of time to be hidden in the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 173 and 174);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of displaying the fragment image.

[Form A54]
The gaming machine of form A54 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, it is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, it is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different (see Figures 169, 170, and 175),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a specific character appears in common in the display patterns of a plurality of cracked images, the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form A55]
The gaming machine of form A55 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed in a third display layer that has a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a fourth display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The display means is
When displaying a first type of cracked image according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a predetermined timing after displaying the first type of cracked image. As shown,
When displaying a second type of cracked image according to the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a specific timing after displaying the second type of cracked image. display (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 175),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form A56]
The gaming machine of form A56 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the fragment image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of second type fragment images are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner of moving while changing from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without a change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 175).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed at which the fragment image moves can be changed depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment image, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form A57]
The gaming machine of form A57 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is different depending on when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 169, 170, 173, and 174). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, expectations for the specific character are increased, and interest is improved by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 125 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. Information images and time-saving remaining displays that indicate the remaining number of time-savings are displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the effect images (object images) such as characters, so that the effect images overlap and are stored in the first hold memory. While this prevents the visibility of the number, the number of secondary storage memories, small designs, and error displays from deteriorating, the decoration design is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the production image. It may also be possible to prevent the visibility of the performance image from decreasing due to overlapping symbols.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol holding memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a holding display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability change state. If it is in the state, it is a display area that displays a pending display according to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and an active display according to the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. This is a display area that displays an active display.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 126). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 125, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 126), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 125, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 125), and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 160). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 126).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 126).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are fired toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variable control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo-like multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 126, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 006SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on reception of the payout signal. The device 006SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 006SG030 includes a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the firing device 006SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. Further, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 006SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the firing device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area is arranged. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower, and the images in the higher layer image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and the images in the lower layer image drawing area are set higher in display priority. The lower the display priority is set in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 128, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and placing a background image as a layer 1 image, and a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and placing a decorative pattern as a layer 2 image. , a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as a layer 3 image, and a layer 4 for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301 etc.) to be described later as a layer 4 image. In order to draw and arrange a glass plate image 006SG301A as a crack target image displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as an image of layer 5 in the image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 generated when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a motion effect image, which will be described later as a layer 6 image, and a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303, which will be described later as a layer 7 image. Image drawing area, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation promotion images to be described later as layer 8 images, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display) as layer 9 images. A layer 9 image drawing area, a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and a right-handed hitting notification image are arranged as the layer 10 image. ing. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and arranged in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that a crack has appeared in the display area of the image display device 5 due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. , the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and arranged in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that the display area of the image display device 5 is broken. Further, the broken image 006SG302 is an image that is displayed with a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A changed in order to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. be.

The glass plate image 006SG301 includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect A, which will be described later. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, this is an image that is hidden at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301A includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect, which will be described later. It is also an image (broken target image) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, a first continuous cracking performance, a second continuous cracking performance, a dialogue preview performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, The start timing of the cracking effect in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A is invisible to the player due to the display of white-out image 006SG303. . For this reason, in the present embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 in which the crack is displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so that it cannot be assumed from the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to realize the cracking (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302), and it is possible to strongly impress the player with the cracking effect.

In this embodiment, by superimposing each image drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the layer 1 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are set to have higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area are drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest image displayed in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5. (priority display), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5 above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (priority display). The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, The image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and is drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image display device 5 is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. In the image display device 5, the image is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. This is an image that is displayed in the upper layer (displayed with priority). Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is displayed in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. (priority display) image. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background, which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), and super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be drawn. , In the layer 1-3 image drawing area, it is possible to draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), which will be described later. The image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is a layer 1-3 image. The image has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area is compared to the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This image has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the other images.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 127(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 127(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 130(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 130(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (low probability high base state, time saving state), and a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state). The third gaming state designation command corresponds to the base state and variable probability state. Note that the high probability/high base state may simply be referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH indicates the result of determining whether the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)" as the winning determination result. This is a variable category command.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 130(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. Since the contents are the same as those in FIG. 4, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 132 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result determination table, 22 indicates that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a special figure of "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, pachinko play rr is compared to the probability (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment) of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when the pachinko game is in a time-saving state (low probability state). Therefore, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and controlling it to a jackpot game state increases (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that control will be made into a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 133(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Moreover, FIG. 133(B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. The contents are the same as those in FIG. 6(A) and FIG. 6(B), so the explanation will be omitted.

FIGS. 134(A) and 134(B) show fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the display results are variable depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). Among the cases in which the result is a "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case in which it is "reach", and the case in which the variable display result is a "jackpot" A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in accordance with the above. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a pseudo continuous performance including a temporary stop of decorative symbols and a variable display again is executed once as a super reach variation pattern during variable display. After that, the super reach α reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the reach effect is executed via the normal reach Variable patterns in which the super reach β reach effect is executed and the variable display result is a miss or jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3), and the normal reach and super reach α reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. A reach effect of super reach β is executed via the effect, and variable patterns (PA2-4, PB1-4) are provided in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach performance of super reach α in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach β corresponds to the strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the reach effect of super reach γ is executed via normal reach as a super reach variation pattern. A variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-6, PB1-6), a variation pattern in which the super reach δ reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2- 7, PB1-7) is provided. In addition, the reach performance of super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach δ corresponds to strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

As shown in FIG. 134, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 135(A) to 135(D), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the special symbol that executes the variable display is suspended. If the number of memories (number of reserved memories of the same type) is less than 1, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table A for failure and the value of the random number MR3, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol to be variable displayed is determined. If there are two pieces, a variation pattern is determined based on the determination table B and the random value MR3, and if the number of special symbols to be stored in variable display is three, there is a variation pattern for a miss. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Further, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss and the value of the random number MR3. As shown in FIGS. 135(E) and 135(F), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the random number value MR3 are A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3. Decide on a pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 135(A), when the variation pattern determination table A for miss is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is changed to a non-reach miss without shortening. If the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) is determined, and the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) that is outside the normal reach, and the value of the random number MR3 is 901. If it is within the range of ~970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo-continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971. If it is within the range of ~990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined. The pattern is determined to be a variable pattern (PA2-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, and then the super reach β is deviated through the normal reach and the super reach α.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 135(B), when the variation pattern determination table B for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700. (PA1-2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After performing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 135(C), when the variation pattern determination table C for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750. (PA1-3), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After performing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 135(D), when the variation pattern determination table D for miss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is changed to the short non-reach variation pattern. (PA1-4), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern (PA2-5), and the value of random number MR3 is between 551 and 550. If it is within the range of 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a normal reach fluctuation pattern. (PA2-5), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) in which the super reach γ is off via the normal reach, If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-7) in which the super reach δ is off via the normal reach.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(E), when jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the fluctuation pattern (PB1 -2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that will lead to a super reach β jackpot via normal reach, and the random number If the value of MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be determined as a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that will become a jackpot with Super Reach β via Normal Reach and Super Reach α after performing pseudo-continuous performance twice. do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(F), when jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is changed to the non-reach jackpot variation pattern ( If the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that will lead to a super reach γ jackpot via normal reach, and If the value of the numerical value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a ratio of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the determination ratio of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns may be made different depending on the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 126 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151B allows execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol. It is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold, and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball by the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 006SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 006SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 006SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 126 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 126 has a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 137(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 006SG191, a performance control timer setting section 006SG192, a performance control counter setting section 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 006SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 006SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 006SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 006SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 137(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 006SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (the A set of four commands, ie, a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variable category command, are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, pending storage number notification commands, and symbol designation commands. , a storage area (entry) is secured for storing variable category commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, there is a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, and a continuous winning effect that will be described later. A storage area is provided for each storage area (entry) so that a continuous cracking effect flag that can specify whether ) are secured for each.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if execution of the hold display effect is not determined, "0" corresponding to the normal hold display display pattern is stored in the hold display flag, and the hold display effect is When it is decided to execute the effect, "1" (square (◇) )) or “2” (star (☆)) is set. After the pending display effect determination process is executed, the pending display update process described later is further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are changed to display modes according to each pending display flag (for example, the value of the pending display flag is If it is "0", a white circle (○) is displayed, if the value of the pending display flag is "1", a square (◇) is displayed, and if the value of the pending display flag is "2", a star (☆) is displayed. In addition, the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is set in the continuous breaking effect setting process (see FIG. 150), which will be described later.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are stored in order.

The command stored in the start winning command reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 137(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 137(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

The game control main process shown in FIG. 138 is the same as the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, so a description thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 139. The game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 139 is the same as the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 139 as the special symbol process process. The special symbol process shown in FIG. 140 is the same as the special symbol process shown in FIG. 13, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 140. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (006SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS102 (006SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit at 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (006SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way and the starting opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (006SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 139 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then, for example, sets the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 to the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 by storing it in the area (006SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 139 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize)
FIG. 142(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 141 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state is controlled by special symbol normal processing described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to do so. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 006SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. The current gaming state is specified (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the variable probability state (high probability, high base state) when the variable probability flag is on, and the time saving state (low probability, high base state) when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It is sufficient to specify that the state is the normal state (low certainty base state) when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of step 006SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 141 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table selected by the process of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 006SGS123; N), in response to the variable display result being "miss", The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command, is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. It is determined whether there is one (Step 006SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, a deviation variation pattern determination table B and a deviation variation pattern determination table C are prepared according to the number of pending memories. are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 135, among these fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss has a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 660 are assigned within the range that the random number MR3 can take, and in the variation pattern judgment tables B and C for a loss, the random number MR3 for judgment of the variation pattern is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 700 and from 1 to 750 are assigned to each of the possible ranges. On the other hand, in the losing variation pattern determination tables A to C, determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 006SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. If it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command is executed, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command is executed (step 006SGS133). A pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the process of step 006 SGS135, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high If it is a high probability base state), it is sufficient to set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B.

In the process of step 006 SGS138, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3. (Step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is commonly "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach) are established, and a random value is set. It is sufficient if it can be determined based on MR3 whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 006SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 140 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 143, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 132 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ) If it falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state and low probability high base state in this embodiment), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is between 1 and 219. If it falls within the range, it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be a "miss".

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 006SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “big hit” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 133(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of “A”, “probable variable jackpot B”, and “probable variable jackpot C” matches (step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-accuracy-high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is set, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155). Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3". Note that after the processing in step 006SGS155, the process advances to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006 SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) in advance, and the result of determining the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 140 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 144, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a loss, if the gaming state is normal and the number of special symbols reserved for executing variable display is 1, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected, and the gaming state is normal. If the state and the number of pending memories of special symbols that execute variable display are 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and the game state is normal and the number of pending memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3. If it is, then the losing variation pattern determination table C is selected, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the gaming state is normal, jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is time saving or variable probability, jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected. do.

Then, by referring to the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, etc., multiple types of fluctuation patterns are generated. (Step 006SGS162).

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS162, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS163, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of special symbols (step 006SGS164). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, a special symbol variable display time which is a variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step 006SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and then the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The specification command, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, then the first variation start command, second variation start command, and variation pattern specification command. , the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command, etc. may be transmitted in this order.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 140 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), it is determined in step 006SGS191 whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), check whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. judge. If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS192;N). 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS194), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and then the time-saving flag is set to the off state (step 006SGS195). After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command is performed according to the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 140 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag and time saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). Further, the time saving number counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 006 SGS216).

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 147. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 updates the image display device 5 according to the execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or a ready-to-reach effect to be described later) or a change in the game state during variable display. It is possible to execute control to update the displayed background image.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and in addition, in a state where the menu screen is displayed, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 147 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 148, the production control CPU 120 first determines the display mode of the pending display displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. A display effect determination process is executed (step S160). Further, a pending display update process (step S161) is executed to update the display mode of the pending display in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F. Note that the pending display update process is also a process for newly starting display of the pending display or active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the pending display effect determination process. After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. " and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Hold display performance determination process)
FIG. 149 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the pending display and active display in the pending display effect shown in FIG. 148. In the pending display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in FIG. 137(B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, specify the variable display result from the symbol designation command in that entry and the variable category from the variable category command in that entry, and combine these specified variable display results with the variable category. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of the hold display and the active display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 149, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 5% not to execute the pending display effect, and at a rate of 25% it is decided to execute the held display effect in the effect pattern α. Then, at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 5% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, at a rate of 0%, the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined to be executed. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is other (normal reach), 75% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect with the effect pattern α. is determined, and the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined to be executed at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag of the entry as " If the value of the pending display flag of the entry is set to 1, and the performance pattern α of the pending display notice performance is set to ``1'', and the performance pattern β of the pending display notice effect is set. If execution has been determined, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

In the present embodiment, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as described above, the performance control CPU 120 performs the pending display updating process (step S61). ), if the value of the pending display flag is set to "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag will be displayed as a white circle (○), and the pending display If "1" is set as the value of the flag, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag. In this case, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

Due to these settings, if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star shape in display pattern B, or if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white circle. If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than that of display pattern B, and if the pending display or active display is displayed in a white star shape in display pattern B, then the pending display or active display is changed to display pattern A. Since the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when displayed as a white rectangle, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, that is, whether the pending display effect is executed or not. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance pattern.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 148. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 006SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999") other than the above. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern, a combination in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, a combination such as "767", etc. Determine the combination (missing symbol) that will result in the out-of-reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 performs a continuous cracking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous cracking performance during variable display, and a dialogue preview performance setting for executing a dialogue preview performance during variable display. processing (step 006SGS278), background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), A cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in effect during variable display is executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts a process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 006SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command; however, the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous cracking effect setting process)
FIG. 151(A) is a flowchart showing the continuous breaking effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the continuous breaking performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), refer to the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A and check whether there is an entry for which the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (“0” or “1”) is not set. (Step 006SGS312), and determines whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous crack effect flag is set (Step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318, and if there is an entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), Based on the symbol designation command and variable category command stored in the entry, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS314). In addition, the continuous breaking effect in the normal state in this embodiment is performed over a plurality of variable displays for variable displays that have not yet been executed, so that the variable display result of the target variable display becomes a jackpot. This is an effect that suggests that something will happen (see Figure 154).

When the gaming state is the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. 151(B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the continuous breaking performance at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect at a rate of 80%. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 80% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 20% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it is determined at a rate of 60% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 40% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, in step 006SGS314, the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous cracking performance at a rate of 30%, if the variable display result is a jackpot, and at a rate of 70%. The execution of the continuous cracking effect is determined at the rate of . When the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 30% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 40% not to perform the continuous break effect, and at a rate of 60% it is determined to execute the continuous break effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state when the continuous breaking performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance in the process of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it is determined to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous breaking effect flag of the entry to "1", proceeds to step 006SGS318, and decides not to execute the continuous breaking effect. If it is determined (Step 006SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets "0" as the value of the continuous break effect flag of the entry, and proceeds to Step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which "1" is set as the value of the consecutive breaking performance flag, that is, whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance. (Step 006SGS318). If there is no entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous breaking effect setting process is ended, and "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag. If there is an entry (Step 006 SGS318; Y), it is further determined whether the entry whose continuous winning effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, the starting winning reception command. It is determined whether the entry is stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), it is determined that the variable display is not the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect. The execution setting of the first continuous cracking effect according to the above is performed, and the continuous breaking effect setting process is completed (step 006SGS320), and the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display. If so (Step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (Step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous cracking effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), 006SGS321;N) sets the execution of the second continuous cracking effect according to the fact that the variable display is the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect, and ends the continuous breaking effect setting process (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous breaking effect when the gaming state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect is executed in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the continuous breaking effect. do. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous cracking effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second continuous cracking effect is not executed, while the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern. In the case of a variable display with a variable pattern, a second continuous cracking effect is executed.

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and performs a continuous breaking performance setting process. (Step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined. It is sufficient to determine the highest ratio (execution ratio of consecutive cracking effects for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute a continuous breaking effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, the setting for executing the continuous breaking effect (first continuous breaking effect) once or twice in the variable display is set. , and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is normal reach or super reach, the first consecutive cracking effect will be executed twice in the variable display, and the second consecutive effect will be executed once after the two first consecutive breaking effects. All you have to do is set up the execution of the cracking effect.

In other words, the continuous breaking performance in the time saving state and variable probability state of this embodiment is a performance that can be executed multiple times in one variable display, and is a performance that suggests that the reach will depend on the number of executions. ing.

(Speech preview production setting process)
FIG. 152(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue preview effect setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview effect setting process is finished, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is non-shortened non-reach, normal reach, or super reach. If yes (step 006SGS331; N), the execution or non-execution of dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 152(B), if the variable pattern is non-reachable and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and the performance pattern A of the dialogue preview performance is determined. 30% of the time. In addition, if the variation pattern is normal reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 35%. , the execution of dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable pattern is super reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%. Then, the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to perform the line preview performance, and at a rate of 5% whether or not to perform the line preview performance in production pattern A. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the performance pattern C of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 152(C), production pattern A displays the line "Chance!?" in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking production executed as part of the speech preview production. The performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Chi hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance, The performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "It's super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during the variable display, the control is made to be in a jackpot game state more than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (non-execution). The percentage of Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set to be highest when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern C, and when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is set to be the lowest when executed in A > non-execution).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 150 will be explained. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2. -7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-7. The fluctuation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3. , PB1-4, or PB1-7, refer to the reception command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning.

When the gaming state is in the normal state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that indicates a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 153(A). Then, it is decided at a rate of 60% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect while not executing the change of the background image (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2-4. , PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with failure pattern is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of background image change and execution of background change effect with success pattern is determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the success pattern of background change effect A is executed, the variation pattern of the variable display is If it is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that will result in a jackpot, the background image It is decided at a rate of 50% not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect, and to not perform the change of the background image and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 5%. .

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory that will become a jackpot, then FIG. 153(A) As shown, it is decided at a rate of 30% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect without executing the change of the background image (variation of the variable display concerned). If the pattern is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2. -4, PB1-2, PB1-4, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect B) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. execution (if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A, execution of the variation pattern of the variable display) If the variation pattern is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state/variable probability state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory that results in a jackpot, the background image Deciding not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image, and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the background image change and the success pattern of the background change effect is determined. execution (if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 80%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the background change performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the background change effect in any of the effect patterns, the execution settings are made according to the effect pattern of the background change effect, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display during effect processing according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it. Further, when it is determined to change the background image (when it is determined to execute the background change effect in a successful pattern), the background image change setting is performed. Note that the background image may be changed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in FIG. 147.

(Reach suggestion effect setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in FIG. 150 will be explained. In the reach suggestion performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the execution or non-execution of the reach suggestion performance and the reach suggestion performance are determined according to the variation pattern of the variable display. Decide on the performance pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 153(B), if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the failure pattern of the reach suggestion effect is determined. 20% of the time. Additionally, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the reach suggestion effect in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. . In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach-suggesting performance is executed, the reach (normal reach or super-reach reach performance) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach-suggesting performance is not executed. . Furthermore, when a reach-suggesting performance is executed, the player is informed that the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a failure pattern and does not result in a reach, while the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. The player is informed that the game is a reach by executing the game.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the reach-suggesting performance in any of the performance patterns, the execution settings are made according to the performance pattern of the reach-suggesting performance, and the reach-suggesting performance is executed in the variable display performance process according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in FIG. 150 will be explained. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. Determine whether or not. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, PB1-7, cut-in is performed according to the variable display result of the variable display. Decide whether or not to perform the performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance.

For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. 153(C), if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the cut-in effect is performed. Execution in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution in production pattern Y of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 20%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 20%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 70%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set so that the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern Y, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern X. (Presence or absence of cut-in performance and jackpot expectation level of performance pattern: performance pattern Y>performance pattern X>cut-in performance not executed). In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the variable display result is a failure, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 70%. %, and execution of the cut-in effect in production pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 15%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 75%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the cut-in performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Note that the cut-in performance in this embodiment is a performance that displays different images depending on the performance pattern (for example, an image of the characters "Heat!!", an image of the characters "Chance!", etc.), This is a performance that differs in the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled depending on which image is displayed (which performance pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, the performance pattern X is This is a production pattern that displays an image of the text "Chance!", and production pattern Y is a production pattern that displays an image of the text "Heat!!").

In addition, if it is decided to execute the cut-in performance using any of the performance patterns, the execution settings are made according to the performance pattern of the cut-in performance, and the cut-in performance is executed in the variable display performance process according to the execution settings. Just do it.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see FIGS. 155 and 179), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in As a performance pattern of the performance, a performance pattern with a cracking performance and a performance pattern without a cracking performance may be provided. For example, the performance pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern with a breaking performance, and the performance pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern without a breaking performance. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is a effect pattern that does not involve a crack effect in this way, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined to be the effect pattern X, the display mode of the band-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed. The display color of the image may be determined from a plurality of aspects depending on the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different ratios from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss). By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a cracking effect is included as a cut-in effect, and if a cracking effect is not included as a cut-in effect, an image that is further displayed It is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode.

(Explanation of production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a continuous break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect, a plurality of effects can be executed during variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the game state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the background change effect B. , a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, and a result notification performance. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 156, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cut are performed. It is possible to perform in-effect and result notification effects. Note that the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect may be provided as effects that cannot be performed in a normal state and can only be performed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. In this case, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determined ratios shown in FIGS. 151(B) and 153(C). In this way, different types of cracking effects can be performed in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 156, in the first continuous cracking effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is The cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be broken instead, is broken is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and is not dependent on the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, etc. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking range is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the first continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, while the first continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display before the variable display to be read ahead, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, it may be executed multiple times during the execution of the first variable display. This is a performance that is likely to occur, and is also a performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of times it is executed.

The second continuous crack effect is a crack effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the second continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the prefetch target.

The dialogue preview performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a production in which a cracking effect is performed, in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is the glass plate image This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301). In addition, the dialogue preview effect is a effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. At the same time, one of the words "Chance!", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" will be displayed in the cracked area (target area of cracking effect), and the jackpot game state will be controlled depending on the displayed line. This is an effect in which the percentage of play is different (the displayed dialogue suggests the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level)).

Background change effect A includes a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect A is a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. There are cases in which the process is executed, and cases in which the process is executed in a failure pattern in which the background image does not change because the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken).

In the background change effect B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is created in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect B is a successful pattern in which cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. If the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage, but the second stage cracks do not occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, or the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage and the second stage. There are cases in which failure patterns (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) are executed in which the background image does not change because the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break even though cracks occur in the first step.

In the pseudo continuous effect, when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a specific combination during variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which the re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301, is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed by the movement of the movable body 32. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect is executed up to two times during one variable display, and as the first pseudo continuous effect, the color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and The color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A as the second pseudo-reaction is different. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (which is controlled by the jackpot game state). The ratio is set to be high. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this embodiment, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) is determined by the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the breaking performance executed as a part of the pseudo-continuous performance. It is now possible to make suggestions to people.

The reach suggestion performance is a performance that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect in which a reach may be established by executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead breaks. The reach suggestion effect is executed in a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and a reach is established when the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. There are two cases: a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken) even though a crack has occurred due to the action of the character, and a reach is not established. be.

The weak development effect is a glass plate image 006SG301 whose transmittance is less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 after the normal reach reach effect, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. By executing a cracking effect in which 006SG301A cracks, if the gaming state is in the normal state, the player is notified of the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach α, and the gaming state is in the time saving state or the variable probability state. If so, this is a performance that notifies the player of the transition to the super reach γ reach performance. The weak development effect is also a effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks occurring due to the action of the character.

In the strong development performance A, when the gaming state is the normal state, after the reach performance of super reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the corresponding This is an effect that notifies the shift to the reach effect of super reach β by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32. If the state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, after the normal reach reach performance, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by executing a crack effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development effect B is also a effect in which a crack occurs without any action of the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, the glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. By executing the cracking effect, this is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of super reach β, and the glass plate image 006SG301 can be replaced without cracking regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. This is an effect in which the entire displayed glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The cut-in performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance in which a cracking effect is performed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks without any cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. . In addition, in the cut-in effect, different cut-in images are displayed depending on the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled varies depending on the displayed cut-in image (display This is an effect that suggests the rate (jackpot expectation level) of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the cut-in image that is displayed.

The result notification performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to urge the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance that may notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by executing the cracking performance. In addition, the result notification performance is a success pattern that notifies that the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks after a crack occurs due to the operation of the movable body, and that the state is controlled to be a jackpot game state. In the case where the movable body does not operate and cracks do not occur in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), the jackpot game state is not controlled. That is, there are cases where the execution is performed using a failure pattern that notifies the variable display result that it is a failure. In addition, the result notification performance of this embodiment is a variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are variable patterns of non-reach jackpot or non-reach, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. (See FIG. 160).

(Production timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect in this embodiment will be explained. First, to explain the variable display when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display in the order of the first continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect, without overlapping the effect periods.

As shown in FIG. 157(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are variable patterns of shortened non-reach, the first continuous cracking effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display. It is executable.

As shown in FIG. 157(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are variable patterns of normal reach jackpot and normal reach, the dialogue notice is announced after a while from the start of variable display. Performance, background change performance A, reach suggestion performance, and normal reach reach performance can be executed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods.

As shown in FIG. 157(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach α jackpot and super reach α, The two successive cracking effects, background change effect B, first pseudo continuous effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and super reach α reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping production periods. . In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach α, the result notification effect is executed in overlap with the reach effect of the super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 158 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, dialogue preview effects, background change effects A, reach suggestion effects, normal reach effects, weak development effects, super reach α reach effects, strong development effects A, and super reach β reach effects in this order. can be executed individually without duplication. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

In particular, the character displayed in the background change effect A starts to be displayed after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (display of the broken area of the display area of the image display device 5) becomes hidden. To prevent a decrease in the performance effect of each cracking effect due to the player's attention being dispersed to a plurality of cracking effects, since a new cracking effect will not occur in a place where a cracking effect has already occurred. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 158 (B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, background change effect B, 1st pseudo continuous effect, 2nd pseudo continuous effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, super reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, super reach β reach Each performance can be executed individually in the order of performance without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, a variable display in which background change effect B is executed and a variable display in which dialogue preview effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and dialogue preview effect may be effects that can be executed during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case, when background change effect B and dialogue preview effect are executable during the same variable display, if it is decided to execute background change effect B, background change effect B and The execution periods of the dialogue preview performances may be set so as not to overlap. By doing this, for example, by executing the cracking effect as a dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as the background change effect B, the player who has executed the cracking effect as the background change effect B. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified when the background image changes.

Next, variable display when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 159(A) and 159(B), when a variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach variation pattern, the non-reach variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a non-reach jackpot. When it is decided to execute the continuous breaking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot When it is decided to execute the background change effect as a prefetch for PB1-7, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, targeting the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, as a pre-reading preview effect, an effect is executed in which a crack gradually widens in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display before the variable display. However, it may also be possible to perform a performance (so-called immediate win performance, special continuous crack performance) in which a breaking performance is executed and a jackpot symbol is displayed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5. Incidentally, since this effect is an instant hit effect, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as a breaking effect may be made faster than the moving speed of the pieces displayed as other breaking effects.

As shown in FIG. 159(C) and FIG. 159(D), when a variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach variation pattern, the non-reach variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a non-reach jackpot. When it is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and the super reach δ When it is decided to execute the background change effect as a pre-reading for PB1-7 which is the variable pattern of the jackpot, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 160(A), regarding the case where variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach variation pattern, when it is subject to continuous cracking effect and the variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot When the execution of the background change effect is not decided as a look-ahead for PB1-7, and when the variable display is executed at PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, After the first continuous crack performance is individually performed three times from the start timing, a result notification performance is further performed.

As shown in Fig. 160(B), when variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variation pattern of out of normal reach, the production except for the variable display of decorative symbols from the start timing of variable display to the reach timing is It is not executed, and only the normal reach effect is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 160(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach γ jackpot or super reach γ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. The effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are not executed until the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach effect, the weak development effect, and the super reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping production periods. There is. Note that during the execution period of the super reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the super reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 160(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach δ jackpot or super reach δ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. Background change effect A can be executed during the period up to the timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing, the reach performance of normal reach, the strong development performance A, and the reach performance of super reach δ can be performed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach performance of the super reach δ, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are individually executed overlapping with the reach performance of the super reach δ.

(Flow of production in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach α will be explained based on FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 161 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach α is started, the first background image (for example, An image representing a daytime cityscape) is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second continuous crack effect is started. Specifically, when the second continuous crack effect is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image changes to a cracked state. After this is displayed (see FIG. 161 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) in the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the type of displayed character image. (See Figure 161 (A3)). After the second continuous crack effect ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the second continuous breaking performance, a dialogue preview performance is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview effect is started (see FIG. 161 (A4)). The operation promotion image is composed of a button image imitating the push button 31B, a character image "Press!!", an indicator image indicating the operation validity period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 161 (A5)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and multiple fragment images are scattered. A cracking effect is performed. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a text image "Chance!?" will be displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the content of the displayed text image. (See Figure 161 (A6)). After the dialogue preview performance ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the dialogue preview performance, background change performance A is started. Specifically, after the effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 161 (A7)). (See A8). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, a kicking motion of the character), and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to become cracked. After the image is displayed in this manner (see FIG. 161 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 161 (A10)). reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as a background image (Fig. 161 (A11 )reference). After the background change effect A ends, variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect A ends, the reach suggestion effect is started. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the action of the character image (for example, the character hits the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel), and a crack precursor image is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the first crack mode (see FIG. 161 (A13)), the character image moves (for example, the character uses a gavel in the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R). The crack precursor image changes from the first crack mode to the second crack mode as a result of the crack being displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the character image (see FIG. 161 (A14)). (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the center ornament display area 5C with a gavel) (as shown in FIG. 161 (A15), if a crack has been determined, a crack target is displayed instead of the crack precursor image). A cracking effect is performed in which the entire area of the image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 161 (A16)).

Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, decorative symbols with the same numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A17)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action (punching action) (see Figure 162 (A18)), and a crack is displayed instead of the crack precursor image without a crack being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 162 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, weak S reach performance A (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (A20) to (A22) in FIG. 162).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A is started. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word “Development” displayed in the center decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 162 (A23)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the movement of the glass falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a production position that overlaps with the approximate center position of the display screen, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. Instead, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 162 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed, and a strong S reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (Fig. 162 (A25) to (A27) )reference).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach effect, the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 162 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, the text image "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see Figure 162 (A29)) ). After the cut-in effect ends, the strong S reach effect is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in performance, the result notification performance is started. Specifically, first, an image of the ally character delivering the final blow is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A30)), and then the ally character's actions are displayed in slow motion and the image fades out (FIG. 163). (See A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, after an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A32)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 moves on the display screen A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the motion of falling from the upper origin position to a predetermined production position between the origin position and the production position, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. As a result, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a manner in which the crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (FIG. 163). (See A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined presentation position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack precursor image, is cracked, resulting in a plurality of fragments. A cracking effect in which the image scatters is performed (see FIG. 163 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the friendly character has won the battle of the enemy character. Ru. In addition, the background image is displayed as a fifth background image 006SG085 for the jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-like image), and the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined luminous color (e.g., rainbow) to produce a predetermined production effect. After a sound is output and it is announced that the jackpot game state is controlled (see FIG. 163 (A35)), the background image returns to the first background image and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See Figure 163 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a missed display result, after the image of the enemy character's punch hitting the ally character is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move and the crack precursor image ( A glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and the display screen A gray image (effect image) is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 163 (A38)).

Next, after the white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A39)), as the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the fixed decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the ally It is reported that the character has lost the battle of the enemy character (FIG. 163 (A40)).Furthermore, after it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled, the background image returns to the first background image and the combination that is not a jackpot is announced. The determined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 163 (A41)).

(Flow of production in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 164 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the lower left of the crack precursor image. As a result, after the crack precursor image is displayed in a crack manner (see FIG. 164 (B2)), two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack aspect of the crack precursor image is changed in stages. (see FIG. 164 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which multiple fragment images are scattered. (See Figure 164 (B4)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 164 (B5)).

After the background change effect A is finished, the variable display is executed again, and after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 164 (B6)), in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern having the same number as the temporarily displayed decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode (see FIG. 164 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect B ends, a pseudo continuous effect is started. Specifically, in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, the pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is decelerated and displayed before the stop display position (Fig. 164 ( (See B8).

Next, after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 164 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and one of the crack precursor images is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack (see FIG. 164 (B10)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position above the display screen) In response to the motion of falling to a presentation position that overlaps the approximately center position of the screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (FIG. 164) (See (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x2" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figures 164 (B12) to (B13)) .

In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo-continuation notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuation pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative pattern with the number one larger is displayed in a stopped state, and the variable display result of the error is displayed (see FIG. 164 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-continuous performance of a triple pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous performance are displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is displayed. Deceleration is displayed before the stop display position (see FIG. 164 (B14)). After the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 164 (B15)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack (see FIG. 164 (B16)), the movable body 32 moves (for example, when the movable body 32 moves from the origin position above the display screen to 164 (B17 )reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x3" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figures 165 (B18) to (B19)) .

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a two-part pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a three-part pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is It is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 165 (B20)), and the decoration symbol with the same number as the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R, and it becomes N reach ( (See FIG. 165 (B21)), the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 165 (B22)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action (punching action) (see Figure 165 (B23)), and a crack replaces the crack precursor image without any cracks being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A cracking effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 165 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (B25) to (B26) in FIG. 165).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B is started. Specifically, when strong development effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner. After being displayed (see FIG. 165 (B27)), a crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack precursor image, is cracked and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 165 (B28)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the inner decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 165 (B29)), and then the reach title image is displayed. is displayed, and strong S reach effect B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 165 (B30)). Note that the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with higher expectations than the strong S reach effect A. Moreover, since the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with a higher degree of expectation than the strong S reach effect A, the cut-in effect described later is more likely to be executed in the effect pattern Y. In other words, in the strong S reach effect B, the fragment image 006SG302, which will be described later, is more likely to be displayed than in the strong S reach effect A.

Strong S Reach Effect B is almost the same as Super Reach α's Strong S Reach Effect A, with the only difference being the type of enemy character, etc., so a detailed explanation of the flow until the end of the variable display will be omitted hereafter. .

(Examples of various effects)
Next, an example of the operation of the breaking effect in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 166 to 182.

Note that an example of expressions indicating display modes used in the following description will be explained.

"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the previous image. display).

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 182, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular numbers when viewed from the front. A pedestal, a numeric display section consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" on the numeric display section. (all characters are omitted) is displayed, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information pedestal. and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section that is displayed so as to surround the numeral display section, character display section, and information display section (see FIG. 125, etc.).

Although a detailed explanation will not be provided, when the gaming state is in the high base state or in other performance modes, decorative symbols whose display format is different from the decorative symbols for the low base state described above are displayed in each decorative symbol display area. It may be possible to variably display 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, as a variable display mode of the decorative symbols for the low base state, a mode in which the decorative symbols are vertically scrolled from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been exemplified, but other variable display modes may also be used. The variable display mode may be different depending on the presentation mode.

In the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers in the decorative design.

The special figure pending storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 includes a first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 215) and a second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending. ) is displayed, and in the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen, an active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. Incidentally, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes.

<First continuous cracking performance and second continuous cracking performance>
The details of the operation examples of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect will be explained based on FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the first continuous crack effect. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the second continuous crack effect.

As shown in FIG. 166(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, a second When the continuous crack effect is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed at a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from the glass plate image 006SG301. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 166(B)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the second continuous cracking effect starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image which is the normal background image for the time saving state/probability variable state, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. be done.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken ( The glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken manner), and a cracking effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 166(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 166(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the whiteout image becomes visible. The display of 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 166(E)).

Thereafter, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314 that are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished. After being displayed (see FIG. 166(F)), the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see FIG. 166(G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed in the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range) In this case, the first visibility is displayed with higher visibility than the second visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the different types of characters that appear, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. do. In addition, in this embodiment, the example of the operation of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect was illustrated as being almost the same, but the example of the operation of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is May be different.

For example, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, the cracking pattern is a common cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction is the same. Then, in Fig. 166(B), the crack is displayed on the right side, while in Fig. 167(B), the crack is displayed on the left side, so that when the crack starts, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The display may start at different positions. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image Depending on the display mode, it may be suggested which of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is to be executed. Furthermore, the cracking patterns may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect. In particular, regarding the second continuous crack effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase the degree of attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, it is possible to output the character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect and the character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and both break at the display timing of the whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output together with the sound, the character voice may be output after the cracking sound is output at the display timing of the whiteout image 006SG303, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited. good.

<Speech preview production>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating details of an example of the operation of dialogue preview production.

As shown in FIG. 168(A), when the dialogue preview effect is started while the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the higher level than the first background image 006SG081 The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 168(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is hidden, and a layer higher than the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the 4-image drawing area, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, indicating that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 168(C)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken. A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 168(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 168(E)), and the transmittance reaches 100%. The display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 168(F)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, a message ``Chance!'' indicating the expectation of a jackpot is displayed. ?" character image 006SG306 and a serif background image 006SG087 serving as its background are displayed (see FIG. 168(F)). Here, the serif background image 006SG087 and character image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the text image 006SG087 and the character image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the first visibility. 1 background image 006SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the character image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 168(H)).

In addition, in FIG. 168(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack is placed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in a layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301). Depending on the display mode of the effect image, it may be suggested which of the dialogue character images 006SG306 such as "Chance!?", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" will be displayed. Furthermore, the cracking pattern may be different depending on the type of serif character (such as the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302. Especially when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in slow motion to increase the attention level). While using a common crack pattern, the location of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the closer to the center) and the range of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the wider the crack). You can change it. Furthermore, the character voice corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305 may be outputted, and both may be output with a cracking sound at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303, or the cracking sound may be output at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output after the output of the character voice is finished, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of the operation example of background change effect A will be explained based on FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A.

As shown in FIG. 169(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the background change effect A starts when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after being gradually enlarged (see FIGS. 169(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 fades out. The character image 006SG305 is displayed (see FIG. 169(D)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, if the background change effect A is started while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the time saving state Effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image which is the normal background image for the state/probability change state, and after being gradually enlarged and displayed, effect image 006SG320 is faded out and character image 006SG305 is displayed. is displayed.

Note that the effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 169(B) is an effect that incites whether or not the character image 006SG305 is displayed in FIG. 169(D), and in the case of a successful pattern, it is shown in FIG. In the case of a failure pattern, the transition does not proceed to FIG. 169(C), and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 is not displayed.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed on the near side. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack mode, a crack is displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301 in response to the kicking motion towards the glass plate image 006SG301. (See FIG. 169(E)), the crack gradually spreads radially and changes into a cracked state (see FIG. 169(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are , when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. By displaying, the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, the character image 006SG305 is displayed. In response to the kicking motion toward the front side, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack mode. After that, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a cracked state. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the 6th background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are: When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the cracks are displayed more conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 169(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIGS. 169(H) and 170(I)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 170(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 170(K)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and is replaced by the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the displayed glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time saving state/probability change state, becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, it is possible to make it look natural that the sixth background image has changed to the seventh background image. Therefore, background changes can be made to look natural.

Further, for example, it is possible to display a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082, and depending on the movement mode (actions such as punching and kicking) of the character image 006SG305. It may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed. Further, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect B.

As shown in FIG. 171(A), when background change effect B is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first background image 006SG081 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the upper layer 4 image drawing area, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 171(B)). Thereafter, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, and the crack appearance of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes in stages (see FIG. 171(C)). ).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are created when the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. When it is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the crack appearance is displayed conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 171(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 is While being displayed using the second visibility, each crack display area 006SG324 is displayed using the first visibility, which is higher in visibility than the second visibility. In other words, the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, making it easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken and the layer A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the 5-image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 171(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 171(E)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 171(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 171(G)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected level of development of the production may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is easy to finish at the first stage (see Fig. 171(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is easy to finish at the second stage (see Fig. 171(C)). (see), and in the case of red, it is preferable that it is most likely to develop into a cracking effect compared to blue or green. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 188(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transmittance gradually increases and becomes invisible (fade-out display) after 1500 ms have elapsed from the start of background change effect B. As shown in FIG. 188(C), when ending at the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transmittance may gradually increase and become hidden after 3000 ms have elapsed from the start of background change effect B.

In addition, while background change effect B is being executed, change effects for active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than glass plate image 006SG301, are restricted, while glass plate image 006SG301 It may also be possible not to limit the effect using images (for example, mini-character images, etc.) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the layer image drawing area. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the cracking effect.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
The details of the operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained based on FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating details of a partial operation example of pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 172(A), after the pseudo-continuous effect has started, the pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C. When temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed from the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301. By displaying the cracks so as to spread radially, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 172(B)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the motion of the movable body 32 to fall from the origin position to the production position is started, and in response to this motion, a whiteout image is created at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After 006SG303 is displayed (see FIG. 172(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 172(C)). (See D). Additionally, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a glass plate image is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of 006SG301A is cracked and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image that is displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the beginning of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 172(E)). When the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG321 is displayed so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings (FIG. 172(F) ), see (G)).

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 has been displayed, the movable body 32 starts moving from the production position to the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is being displayed (see FIG. 172(G)). After all the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden, they are stopped at the presentation position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see FIG. 172(H)).

Note that even if the operation of returning the movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position to the origin position is started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished and then after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 is finished. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-continuous display and variable display is started again, but the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first variable display The display color of the plate image 006SG301 is blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display is green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display is red. The display mode of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made different. Further, for example, the appearance of the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made to be different, such as the appearance of the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 gradually increasing each time variable display is performed again.

Further, in this case, although the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times of re-variable display, it is preferable that the crack pattern is the same. In this way, by making the cracking pattern common in gaming machines that perform various breaking effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo continuous effect has been executed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the first re-variable display and the second re-variable display The display mode of the crack pattern may be made different between the variable display and the third re-variable display, such as the size of the fragment images 006SG302 being different, the number of displayed fragment images 006SG302 being different, and the moving speed of the fragment images 006SG302 being different. .

<Reach suggestion performance>
Details of an operational example of the reach suggestion effect will be explained based on FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 173(A), when the reach suggestion effect is started while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the left ornamental symbol display area 5L is displayed as a decorative symbol. After the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 173(B)), the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 173(C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the character image 006SG305 hits the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel. Accordingly, a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first crack mode, and an operation is performed in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Effect image 006SG323 is displayed (see FIG. 173(D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a gavel, a crack is displayed on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby changing the glass plate image 006SG301 into the second crack mode. At the same time, the motion effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 173(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the centerpiece design display area 5C with the gavel (see FIG. 173(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After that (see FIG. 173(G)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 173(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 173(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A falls downward from the part where the crack is displayed. After being displayed, it will frame out and disappear. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173(H), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 174(I)). Then, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 174). J)), the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 174(K)).

In addition, in the various effects accompanied by a cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of FIGS. After the display is resolved and hidden, the performance progresses (for example, progresses from a reach-suggesting performance with a break-through effect to a reach-suggestion performance without a break-through effect).

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected degree of reach development may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it is sufficient that the reach is more likely to be achieved when the effect image is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

In addition, in the case of a failure pattern, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the centerpiece design display area 5C with a gavel (see FIGS. 173(G) and (H)) , a disappointed character image 006SG305 is displayed in the area corresponding to the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and then the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, and the missing pattern stops. The variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of weak development effect.

As shown in FIG. 175(A), regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state/variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is in the reach mode. When the weak development effect is started, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the character image 006SG305 is displayed at the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it. After (see FIG. 175(B)), after the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while being enlarged as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 175(C)) . The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, and then the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 175(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher (see FIG. 175(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 175(F)), when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 175(F)). 175(G)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the process shifts to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 175(H)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the process shifts to the weak S reach effect. In addition, in FIGS. 184 and 197 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is not transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is non-transparent. is displayed in a transparent mode (for example, transmittance of 70% or more) in FIGS. 203 (B1) to (B3), which will be described later, and then in FIGS. 203 (B4) and (B5). (for example, the transmittance is less than 10%). That is, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 203 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent manner, and at the second timing, corresponding to FIG. 203 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent manner. can do.

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the N reach effect develops into the weak S reach effect, it is possible to naturally show that the N reach effect image has changed to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088. Therefore, changes in the production can be seen without any discomfort.

<Strong development performance A>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect A will be explained based on FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing details of a part of the operation example of strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 176(A), in the weak S reach effect, the development symbol with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development effect A is started, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position. The action of falling to the production position is started, and when this falling action is started, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 begins to fall (Fig. 176(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect is started.

In addition, when the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position as a preliminary performance before the cracking performance, and the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 , the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters (see FIG. 176(C)).

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image that is displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and here, it is transparent until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the ratio remains at 0%, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 176(C)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 176(D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG325 for this purpose is displayed so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings (FIG. 176(E) )reference).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is finished and the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden, the movable body 32 starts moving from the presentation position to the origin position (see FIG. 176(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach effect develops (see FIG. 176(G)).

<Strong development performance B>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect B will be explained based on FIGS. 177 and 178. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B.

As shown in FIG. 177(A), when the strong development effect B is started when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the weak S reach effect, the layer 4 image higher than the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the drawing area, and a crack is displayed radially from the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. (See Figure 177(B)). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, but when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the crack appearance is noticeable. It will be displayed as follows.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 177(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed (see FIG. 177(D)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 177(D), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 177(E)). Next, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the decorative pattern in which the developed pattern with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped is displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 177(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 177(G)).

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 177(H)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed, and the developed symbol is hidden (see FIG. 178(I)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect becomes higher (see FIGS. 178(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the weak S reach effect develops into the strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has been broken and changed to the reach title image 006SG326. Therefore, changes in reach performance can be shown without any discomfort.

<Cut-in production>
The details of the operation example of the cut-in effect will be explained based on FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 179(A), when the cut-in effect is started when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach effect, the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect is The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 179(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed. In addition, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in a state where the button is pressed by operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, and is enlarged and displayed as time passes (FIG. 179(C), (See (D)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 179(C)). Note that the operation promotion image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the whiteout image 006SG303, so the first visibility is the same as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed. It is displayed while maintaining the first visibility.

Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible (see FIG. 179(D)), and the operation promotion image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 become hidden. , the character image 006SG307 "Heat!!" becomes visible (see FIG. 179(E)), and after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 179(F)). ), the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden (see FIG. 179(G)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance patterns X and Y of the cut-in performance are both described as performance patterns accompanied by a cracking performance, but as the performance pattern of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern Y with a high expectation of jackpot is used as a performance pattern with a cracking performance. The performance pattern X with a low jackpot expectation may be used as a chance performance pattern that involves a performance, and the performance pattern that does not involve a cracking performance.In such a case, in the performance pattern that does not involve a cracking performance, a belt-shaped The effect may be performed in such a manner that a cut-in image (not shown) is displayed.

<Result notification performance (jackpot)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification performance (jackpot) will be explained based on FIGS. 180 and 181. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 180(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 180(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot display result, after the object image 006SG308 in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 180(C)), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the predetermined production position. At the same time as the falling motion starts, in accordance with this falling motion, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread downward from the movable body 32. Further, the object image 006SG308 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while the glass plate image When 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously (see FIG. 180(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 starts to be displayed at a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 180(E)), and a return-to-origin operation is performed in which the movable body 32 rises from the predetermined presentation position to the origin position. In response to the start of the whiteout image 006SG303, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 180(F)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(F), at the timing when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and the corresponding white-out image 006SG303 is displayed. Instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters is executed. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 180(G)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 180(H)), the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The display of is completed, it is announced that the jackpot game state is controlled (see FIG. 181(I)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See Figure 181(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect is started in response to the start of the upward movement for the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible. By completing the rising motion of the movable body 32 to return from the predetermined performance position to the origin position before the end (becoming non-display), it is possible to quickly notify that a jackpot has been achieved.

<Result notification performance (missing)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be explained based on FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure.

As shown in FIG. 182(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 182(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result is an off display result, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time in the layer 7 image drawing area without moving the movable body 32 (FIG. 182(C) reference). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305.

Thereafter, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from the approximate center position in the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. (See FIG. 182(D)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

In this way, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state was maintained and the cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301 was broken was not performed, so that it was possible that the jackpot game state was not controlled. be notified.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked manner, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again in the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 182(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed. After being displayed (see FIG. 182(F)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 182(G)).

(Details of performance)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 185, FIG. 166, and FIG. is displayed (first stage crack display period). Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of the present embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot see the broken pieces. It is now impossible to visually recognize 006SG302. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect) (second stage crack display). period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have transparency, and other images ( For example, background images, etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over the above-mentioned crack display period of 500 ms, and the glass plate For 1000 ms from the cracking timing of the image 006SG301A, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, but in the first continuous cracking effect, the types of cracking effect sounds shown in Fig. 166 (E ) is output, and in the second continuous crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character shown in FIG. 167(E) is output together with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect. Furthermore, the crack effect sound has a louder volume than the crack effect sound and is a sound that is easily recognized by the player, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even higher volume than the crack effect sound, Moreover, since the output period is longer than that of the crack effect sound, the sound is more easily recognized by the player than the crack effect sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed. In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 400ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 186, and FIG. 168, as a dialogue preview performance, first, as an operation promotion performance, an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, the first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from the timing (1st stage crack display period). Next, when it comes time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period ). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the speech preview performance of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. It becomes. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, and the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect). Incidentally, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview performance have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragment images 006SG302. person is visible.

In addition, in the dialogue preview production, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period). For 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (breaking effect sound output period). In addition, the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the dialogue preview performance, the first continuous cracking performance, and the second continuous cracking performance, and the cracking performance sound was output in the dialogue preview performance. Afterwards (when the crack effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of character image 006SG306 is output. This can prevent dialogue voice sounds from becoming difficult to hear due to cracking effect sounds.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed.

As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 187(A), FIG. 187(B), FIG. 169, and FIG. is displayed, and an image in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (first stage operation period). A crack is displayed for 2000 ms from the end timing of the preceding action (action of the character) (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 187(B), the crack display period of 2000 ms is composed of a 1000 ms pre-crack display period and a 1000 ms post-crack display period after the pre-crack display period. . In the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the pre-crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that has been displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 170) reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (the first period of whiteout display), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change effect A in the success pattern, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack pre-display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack. Along with the sound output period), a character voice corresponding to the action of the character is output, and for 2500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Cracked production sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusively for background change effect A, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 2500ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. Furthermore, although the output period of the crack sound is set to 500 ms, it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or the sound may be output in accordance with the progress of the crack over 2000 ms. Furthermore, overlapping with the cracking sound, a motion effect sound is output for a period of 100 ms corresponding to the motion effect display period. The motion effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound, and the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the motion effect sound is output, but since the output period is shorter than the cracking sound, the motion effect sound is It becomes possible to hear the cracking sound after the output.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image light emission data table until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission is white in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). The light emission data for the crack display period mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light for 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display period to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the table, light is emitted in a manner that corresponds to the displayed crack. Furthermore, by using the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) for 1000 ms from the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect. Light emission is mainly performed. In addition, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, the white light emission is mainly performed in the manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Light emission is performed without In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 500ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness. Although an example has been described in which the light emission data table for the normal background image is used in the pre-stage operation period, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-stage operation mainly uses green light emission corresponding to the character in FIG. 169(D) throughout the pre-stage operation period. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using the light emission data table. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in FIG. 169(D), but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. By doing this, there will be a sharp difference between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the background change effect A is produced. The effect can be further enhanced. The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 187(C), in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary operation. That is, in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the cracking effect is not executed, and therefore the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be executed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 169(B) and 169(C), although the character is displayed or not, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. An image emission data table is used.

As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 188(A), and FIG. 171, as the background change effect B of the successful pattern, first, a crack in the first stage is displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5. (1st stage crack display period). In the first-stage crack display period, from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. be done.

Further, from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed in a wider area in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms than in the first stage crack display period. (2nd stage crack display period). In addition, even in the second stage crack display period, from the start timing of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. will be displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the first-stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the second-stage crack display period have different values for the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. While each small pod fragment image is designed to have a different size and number, the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are commonly displayed in a downward frame-out. It has become.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (Fig. 171 reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 750 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Incidentally, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change production B in the success pattern, the first stage crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the first stage crack display period in accordance with the display of the crack. (1st stage cracking sound output period), the speakers 8L and 8R output the second cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack for 500ms from the start timing of the second crack display period (2nd stage cracking sound output period). For 150 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (the cracking effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect B is a sound exclusively for background change effect B, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 1250ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 250 ms. In addition, the volume related to cracking in background change effect B is that the cracking effect sound is the loudest, and the volume may be the same for the 1st stage cracking sound and the 2nd stage cracking sound, or the volume of the 2nd stage cracking sound may be the same. may be made louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) for 1000ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). .

As shown in FIG. 188(B) and FIG. 188(C), background change effect B in failure pattern 1 shows the crack in the first stage for 1500 ms and the crack in the outer first stage for 200 ms. Although the small fragment image corresponding to the failure pattern 2 is displayed, the second stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken. The first stage crack and a small fragment image are displayed for 200ms, and the second stage crack is displayed for 1500ms from the timing when 1500ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, and the second stage crack is displayed for 200ms. Although a small fragment image corresponding to the crack is displayed, the effect pattern is such that the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In the background change effect B with these failure patterns, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 189, and FIG. 172, as a pseudo-continuous effect, first, in the display area of the image display device 5, a "left" decorative pattern, a "right" decorative pattern, and a "middle" decorative pattern are displayed. Temporarily stop in this order. A crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern which is the "medium" decorative pattern (crack display period). During the crack display period, a falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed for 1500 ms as a preliminary operation (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. It should be noted that the cracks in the crack display period of the pseudo continuous effect and the cracks in the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to occur in different ways. For example, the crack in the background change effect A is displayed in such a manner that the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301 progresses step by step over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. The cracks are displayed in such a manner that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is a period in which the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible.

Incidentally, for 3000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect (break effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the pseudo continuous effect is a sound exclusively for the pseudo continuous effect, and includes the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. This is a composed sound, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is output for 1000 ms out of the 3000 ms output period, as well as the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, and then for 2000 ms. The sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is continuously output. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, that is, the end timing of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background Light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the image (second background image 006SG082), and for 2000 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A, it is used for crack display. By using the light emission data table, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack display. Then, for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. Light emission is mainly performed. After the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, for 2000 ms, by using the light emission data table for pseudo continuous effect corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect has been executed, the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is used. The light is emitted. For example, when executing the first pseudo continuous effect, the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in green according to the execution of the first pseudo continuous effect, and when the second pseudo continuous effect is executed, the second pseudo continuous effect is emitted. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit red light in accordance with the execution of the performance. After the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081 ) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment have different crack display periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the length of the crack display period may be the same in the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 183, FIG. 190(A), FIG. 173, and FIG. is an image that acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern in the glass plate image 006SG301. The images that act on the display area 5C are displayed in sequence over 10,000 ms (first-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L ( Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the crack is displayed for 4000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. The small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R are different from each other as shown in FIG. Because the values of the parameters of "intensity" and "repetition" are different, the scattering speed and the size and number of each small fragment image are designed to be different, while the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same. Because of this, they are commonly displayed in a frame-out direction.

When the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the pre-stage operation period and the pre-stage operation period ends, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that has been displayed up to that timing becomes the normal reach background corresponding to the reach effect of normal reach. The image will be updated. Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (the first period of whiteout display), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the reach-suggesting effect of the success pattern of this embodiment, in the early white-out display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the player is obstructed by the white-out image 006SG303 and visually recognizes the broken image 006SG302. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 1500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, from the end of the latter half of the white-out display period, the highlighted display of the decorative symbols will be increased to 3000 ms to notify the player that the player has reached a reach, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols. This is carried out over a period of time (decorative pattern highlighting period).

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern, a left crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack display period). Along with the cracking sound output period), the first character voice corresponding to the first action of the character is output, and the right sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned right crack display period. At the same time as the cracking sound is output (right cracking sound output period), the second character voice corresponding to the second action of the character is output, and for 2000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speaker 8L , 8R, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output (break effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion production (success pattern) is a sound exclusively for the reach suggestion production, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the temporary enlargement of the decorative pattern are used to indicate the reach. This is a sound that includes a sound effect of emphasizing the decorative pattern to notify the player that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 1000ms out of the 3000ms output period. The highlighted sound effect is output together with the cracked sound effect, and then the highlighted sound effect is continuously output for 2000 ms. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image will be output. Furthermore, when the action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is produced in the decorative pattern display area 5L where the action effect is on the "left". It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is controlled by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Alternatively, light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and within 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. By using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms), light emission mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. After the light emission in a manner corresponding to the crack effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 190(B), in the reach-suggesting performance in the failure pattern, as a preliminary operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed in the decorative pattern display area on the "left". 5L, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C are sequentially displayed for 14000 ms (first stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, a crack is displayed for 12000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, so the scattering speed of the small fragment image 006SG302 and the size and number of each small fragment image are different. Since the player cannot determine whether the pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the pattern, it is possible to incite whether or not the normal reach is executed appropriately.

In addition, in the failure pattern reach suggestion performance, a left crack sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack Right crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period (sound output period) in accordance with the display of the crack (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern (timing 10000 has elapsed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms. (whiteout display period). The white-out display period is a period in which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are rendered invisible to the player by displaying the white-out image 006SG303. Furthermore, when the motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the motion effect is output. It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In addition, in the reach suggestion effect of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) using the light emission data table for normal background images or chance background images or the chance background image After light emission is executed in a manner according to the display of the second background image 006SG082, during the whiteout display period, white light is emitted in a manner according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the whiteout light emission data table. Light emission mainly involves light emission. Then, from the end of the white-out display period, the failure notification light emission data table is used to emit white light in a manner corresponding to the notification that there is no reach (that the reach suggestion effect is a failure pattern). The main light emission is performed. Incidentally, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach is not reached (that the reach suggesting performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display is stopped. Note that the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the light emission data table for whiteout, and the light emission data table for failure notification are all light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. , White light emission based on the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white emission and low-intensity white emission, whereas for whiteout White light emission based on the light emission data table and the failure notification light emission data table is executed without including a blinking pattern. Further, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the failure notification light emission data table (until the variable display ends by stopping the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 184, FIG. 191, and FIG. The image acting on the central part is displayed for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Although the pre-operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-operation period (2000 ms) pattern is provided, and when it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pre-operation period (4000 ms) is set as 4000 ms. It may be determined at a high rate to execute the weak development effect using the pattern of the first stage operation period (2000 ms).

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of normal reach that had been displayed up to that point changes to the weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, during 3000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 comes to an end, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that had been displayed up to that point is updated to the super reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α. Ru.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible. Although the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency, this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency during the fragment image display period. Out of a certain 3,500 ms, the display is displayed in a transparent mode for 1,500 ms after the display starts (e.g., transmittance of 70% or more), and then gradually becomes non-transparent for 1,000 ms. (eg, transmittance of 70% to 10%), and then displays in a non-transparent mode (eg, transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (break effect sound output period). In addition to the crack effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the crack timing. It should be noted that the crack effect sound has a higher volume than the weak development effect sound, so it is a sound that is easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the pre-stage operation, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. By using the light emission data table for weak development effects over the 4000ms from the start timing of the pre-stage operation to the breakage timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, light emission that is not mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the weak development effect is performed. is performed, and for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter half period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), it is displayed in a manner according to the cracking effect. The light emission is mainly white light emission, and for 2500 ms from the end of the whiteout display latter period to the end of the fragment image display period, the weak development effect is produced by using the light emitting table for weak development effect again. Light emission is performed in a manner depending on the situation. In addition, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission other than mainly white light emission occurs.

In addition, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5, the weak development effect background image is updated to the super reach The update to the reach α background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image in this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in accordance with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the whiteout light emission data table. Note that the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed at a timing before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500 ms before the end), and in this case, the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed before the fragment image display period is displayed frame-out. The display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will start at .

As shown in FIG. 184, FIG. 192, and FIG. 176, in the strong development performance A, first, as a pre-stage operation, a falling motion of the movable body 32 is performed for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1000 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α that had been displayed up to that point changes to the strong development effect A. The fragment image 006SG302 is updated to the strong development effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to , and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 described above from the player is displayed for 1500 ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display first half period is displayed. Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Incidentally, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect A background image corresponding to the strong development effect A that had been displayed at that timing changes to the super reach β background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β. Updated. The movable body 32 that fell as a preliminary operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period. (moveable body rising period). Furthermore, from the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the start timing of the movable body rise period), the sound corresponding to the strong development effect A (strong development effect A effect sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. be exposed. Note that in the strong development effect A, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect unique to the strong development effect A. In addition, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output in the strong development effect A, and in this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect A effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a corresponding manner, and by using the light emission data table for strong development effect A for 2500 ms from the start timing of the fall of the movable body 32 to the end timing of the fragment image display period, Light emission that is not primarily white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong development effect A. From the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the end timing of the fragment image display period), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be displayed by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs in a corresponding manner.

In addition, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, an example is given in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the initial period of whiteout display for 1500 ms from the falling timing of the movable body 32, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the whiteout display early period of the strong development effect A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

As shown in FIG. 184, FIG. 193, FIG. 177, and FIG. 178, as the strong development effect B, first, a crack appears in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. is displayed (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the strong development effect B and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion effect, etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. Each one is designed to be different in size and number.

When the crack display period ends after 1500 ms has passed, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. When the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α that had been displayed up to that time corresponds to the strong development effect B. Updated to strong development performance B. Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (the first period of whiteout display), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, a normal rotational speed, and a normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development effect B that had been displayed up to that time corresponds to the reach effect of super reach β. It is updated to the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). In addition, in strong development effect B, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the above crack display period (crack sound output period) according to the display of the crack, From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken to the end timing of the fragment image display period, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the strong development effect B (strong development effect B effect sound) for 3000 ms. Note that in the strong development effect B, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect that is unique to the strong development effect B. Furthermore, in strong development effect B, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output. In this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect B effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

Furthermore, with regard to the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088). By using the light emission data table for strong development effect B, the light emission data table for strong development effect B is used for 1500 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to B, and light emission for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is performed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter period of whiteout display. By using the data table, the light emission is mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, and the strong light emission is performed for 2000ms from the end timing of the late whiteout display period to the end timing of the fragment image display period. By using the light emission data table for advanced performance B, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong development performance B. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B, by using the light emission data table for the super reach B background image, the manner corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission other than mainly white light emission occurs.

In the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image, the strong development effect B is displayed by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5. The update from the background image to the super reach β background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image in this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using a whiteout light emission data table. In this case, the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for whiteout are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. White light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the white-out light emission data table Light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern. Further, although the crack display period of strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the crack timing. For example, cracks may be displayed so that they gradually expand at first, second, and third timings between the start timing of super reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in FIGS. 184, 194, and 179, as a cut-in performance, first, as an operation promotion performance, an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). In particular, the operation promotion image during the execution period of the operation promotion effect of this embodiment is displayed as a pre-operation mode image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation mode image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, this timing is displayed as the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. The broken glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a suggestion image according to the effect pattern is displayed until the cut-in effect ends (over 5000ms from the breakage timing), and the above-mentioned fragments are displayed for 500ms. After the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the image 006SG302 from the player is displayed (whiteout display early period), the whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms. (later period of whiteout display). For this reason, in the cut-in effect of this embodiment, during the initial white-out display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the white-out image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestion image. has become impossible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the broken image 006SG302 and the suggestion image are visible to the player as a period in which the broken image 006SG302 is visible. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragment images 006SG302. person is visible. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, normal rotational speed, and normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Further, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a post-operation mode image is displayed for 1000 ms, which is the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation mode image display period). Since the after-operation mode image is an image that is displayed with priority over the white-out image 006SG303, the player can visually recognize the operation mode image for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. .

In addition, in the cut-in effect, a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cut-in effect sound output period). . Note that in the cut-in effect, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that it is possible to enjoy the crack effect unique to the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output in the cut-in effect.In this case, by setting the priority of the cut-in effect sound high, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output. The output may be limited.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 will be controlled according to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). The light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is displayed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter half of the whiteout display period. By using the light emission data table for cut-in effect, light emission mainly consisting of white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, and from the end timing of the late white-out display period to the end timing of the suggested image display period. By using this, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. In addition, after the light emission is completed in the mode corresponding to the cut-in effect, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image again, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission other than mainly white light emission occurs.

As shown in FIG. 184, FIG. 195(A), FIG. 180, and FIG. fall period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms have elapsed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). In this crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The small fragment image 006SG302A, which is also small in size, is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. It is designed to vary in speed, size, and number of small fragment images. In addition, since the values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters are different between the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (failure pattern), the scattering speed and small fragments are different. Each image is designed to have a different size and number.

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α that has been displayed up to that time or the super reach β The super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach effect is updated to the jackpot notification background image (5th background image 006SG085) that indicates that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragments are displayed for 1500ms. Image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period). Although not particularly shown in FIG. 195(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and after 10,000 ms (the variable display stop timing of the variable display) ) is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and then updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game state from the variable display stop timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (the first period of whiteout display), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the success pattern result notification performance of the present embodiment, in the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302. has become impossible. On the other hand, for 1000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

Note that the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body rising period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. sound output period). Note that in the result notification performance (success pattern), unlike the weak development performance and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that it is possible to suitably notify that the jackpot has been determined. Also, in the result notification performance (success pattern), a sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output. In this case, by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image ( Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the weak S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and whiteout occurs from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. For 1000 ms up to the end timing of the late display period, by using the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), light emission is mainly performed in white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, by using the light emission data table for the jackpot notification background image, the light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the jackpot game light emission data table, light emission mainly including rainbow color light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the jackpot game background image.

As shown in FIG. 195(B), in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, the fall of the movable body 32 and the cracks accompanying the fall of the movable body 32 are not displayed, and the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301A for the success pattern are not displayed. From this timing, a crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms (crack display period). In addition, from the start timing of the crack display period, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) or the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, becomes variable. This is an image indicating that the display result is a failure, and is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image. The display of the deviation notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, and is updated to a color eye-catching image at the end of the crack display period. The display period of the eye-catch image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catch image ends, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) in color like the eye-catch image is displayed. is started. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying the monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (the first background image 006SG081) is now displayed.

In addition, in the result notification effect for the failure pattern, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned crack display period (crack effect sound output period).

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image (weak Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084), and the variable display stops from the start timing of the crack display period. At this timing, by using the light emission data table for the failure notification background image, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the failure notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the normal background image light emission data table, light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). . Note that the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the deviation notification background image are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly using white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for white out (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high brightness white light emission and low brightness white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for white out White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the broken image 006SG302). The whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying at a timing earlier than the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Fragment speed when performing cracking effect)
Next, the above-mentioned first continuous cracking effect, second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect. The display speed of the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 196(A), among these performances, the first consecutive cracking performance, the second consecutive cracking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, and the weak development. The broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when performing the cracking effect as the effect, the strong development effect A, or the result notification effect, is displayed throughout the broken image display period including the early white-out display period and the late white-out display period. It is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 196(B), the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the cracking effect as the cut-in effect are executed, is different from the white-out display early period and the white-out display period. While it is displayed moving at a speed of V1 for 1000ms with the latter period, during the fragment image display period after the whiteout display latter period (2000ms for strong development effect B, 1500ms for cut-in effect). , and is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) that is lower than the speed V1. Note that as the effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the speed V0, FIG. 196 shows the strong development effect B and the cut-in effect, but the background change effect B and the strong development effect A are also as described below. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at a speed of V0, and when indicating to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect B and strong development effect A is displayed moving at a speed of V1. It is also decided to move and display at a speed V0 at a high rate.

(Details of cracking effect)
Next, details of the crack effect will be explained based on FIGS. 197 and 198. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in a crack effect. FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a display example of each crack pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, in the cracking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, something appears from the rear side at the approximately center position of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A crack in which a crack starts under the settings where an impact (force) is applied, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed. The image is now displayed as an animation. That is, the cracking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to the broken image 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a broken state (fragmented state). In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to crack when a sphere collides with it from the rear at a substantially central position.

Note that the animation display in which the glass plate breaks and the fragment images scatter is actually composed of a number of still images (for example, about 30 to 100 frames) depending on the fragment image display period, but in Fig. 198, the broken image is Five still images are extracted from among the plurality of still images that make up the animation display of broken fragment images from the start to the end, and are arranged in chronological order. Furthermore, in FIG. 198, the five-frame images of each crack pattern are not five consecutive frames, but actually a plurality of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

There are various ways of breaking when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and multiple types of cracking patterns (for example, cracking patterns A to G) are set in advance, and the performance control CPU 120 can break the glass plate image 006SG301A according to the type of performance to be executed. It is possible to perform a cracking effect based on a preset cracking pattern.

Specifically, crack pattern A is a pattern that corresponds to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, break pattern B is a pattern that corresponds to background change effect B and strong development effect B, and crack pattern C is a pattern that corresponds to background change effect B and strong development effect B. , is a pattern corresponding to a pseudo continuous performance and a result notification performance (jackpot), a cracking pattern D is a pattern corresponding to a first continuous cracking performance, a second continuous cracking performance, and a line preview performance, and a cracking pattern E is The cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a weak development effect, the cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a strong development effect A, and the cracking pattern G is a pattern corresponding to a cut-in effect.

Each of the crack patterns A to G is different in at least one of the following items: "acting entity," "crack mode," "crack range," and "fragment image display mode." Note that the display period, display timing, etc. are as described in FIGS. 183 and 184, and therefore their description will be omitted below.

"Agent" indicates the actor who acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A. For crack patterns A and E, the crack effect is executed according to the action of the "character", and for crack patterns C and F, the action of the "movable body" is performed. A cracking effect is executed according to the splitting pattern B and D, and the breaking effect is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the actor. "Crack mode" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack mode before it breaks, and for crack patterns A to D, the crack effect is executed after the "crack mode" is displayed, and the crack pattern In E to G, the crack effect is executed without the "crack mode" being displayed. Note that the "crack mode" includes a plurality of types of modes in which the display position on the display screen, the number of displays, the shape of the crack, etc. are different. The "crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and the crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "whole" display screen, and the crack pattern D is "part". "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent mode, and a part of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are set as "non-transparent", and other crack patterns are set as "transparent". .

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the near side of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, since the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 has a shape that reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area. , when the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is large (45 degrees to 90 degrees), the light is easily transmitted without being reflected, making it easier to see the lower layer image drawing area, while the second At an angle of (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light with respect to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), the light is reflected and difficult to pass through, making it difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area (Figure 207 reference). For example, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then When a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, vertical and horizontal positions, depth position, etc. of this light can be changed in various settings, and the setting values regarding the light may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

Further, the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken include a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 having different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, and the like. Furthermore, each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions, at various speeds, and in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts to when it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, those that are displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction). There are some that are displayed in a manner that they move towards the target, and others that have different moving speeds, rotational speeds, number of rotations, display periods, etc. Regarding the direction of movement, it is possible to move not only in one direction among the X, Y, and Z axes, but also in multiple axes among the X, Y, and Z axes (for example, the XY-axis direction and the XY-axis direction). Including those moving toward the target.

In other words, each of the crack patterns A to G includes at least one part of the plurality of pieces when the fragment image 006SG302 is scattered, in addition to the items of the above-mentioned "acting subject", "crack mode", "crack range", and "fragment image display mode". The display mode such as the shape, size, rotation speed, rotation speed, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period of the fragment image 006SG302. At least one of them is a different pattern.

In addition, the cracking patterns A to G are cracking animations created using, for example, the shutter function of a predetermined animation creation software, and the created cracking patterns A to G are based on multiple parameters shown below. The numerical values of at least some of the parameters are different.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in FIG. 197, "Gravity" allows setting of the gravity, and adjusts the acceleration at which the scattered pieces gradually fall. Because of gravity, it is not constant but gradually accelerates downward. The "gravity direction" can be set as the direction in which gravity is applied, and can be specified as up, down, left, or right with 0 degrees (upward direction) as a reference. The "gravity gradient" allows gravity to be adjusted closer in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with the "direction of gravity." It is possible to specify all directions in 3D space: front and back, top, bottom, left and right. Note that for values of "-90" and "90", since the direction is the Z-axis direction, the "direction of gravity" is essentially treated as invalid. "Strength" allows you to adjust the force of the flying debris; increasing the value will increase the speed at which the debris will fly. "Amount of variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move a large and heavy object. Therefore, if the same impact is applied, small objects will move or rotate faster, and large, heavy objects will move or rotate more slowly. The difference in physical animation depending on the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%; when it is 0%, size and weight are not taken into consideration, so small and large fragments will move in the same way. Note that the default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repeat" allows you to adjust the size of the broken pieces; increasing the value will make each piece smaller and increase the number of pieces. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of fragments, and increasing the value will increase the time it takes for movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. In addition, as if it were attached to a sticky object, resistance is also applied to gravity, so the falling speed becomes slower. In other words, when the value of "viscosity" is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the pieces becomes slow motion. In addition, as crack patterns in which the value of "viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than usual, FIG. 197 shows crack pattern B, crack pattern E, and crack pattern F, but as described later, crack pattern G also has The value of "Viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than normal.

The above parameters are just examples, and in addition to the above, there are also "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and "position", which allows the position of the force to be adjusted in the X-axis and Y-axis directions. ", "Depth" which allows you to adjust the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "Rotation speed" which allows you to set the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302. It may also be possible to set a "random degree" or the like that can be set.

Next, the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering mode) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern will be briefly described.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "gravity direction" is set to "180°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to the surrounding area, it naturally moves downward. On the other hand, for crack patterns B and G, the value of "Gravity direction" is set to "0°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to spread to the surroundings, Compared to crack patterns A, C to F, it is less likely to fall downward.

In this way, crack patterns A, C to F (first pattern) and crack patterns B and G (second pattern) have different "gravitational direction" settings, so crack patterns A, C to F are " 180°'', which means that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves and is displayed is different. This allows you to create a variety of patterns, increasing your interest.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "variation amount" is set to "30%", so the fragment image 006SG302 is a small fragment image 006SG302 that moves and rotates quickly, and the large heavy fragment image 006SG302 is is a slow mode, while for crack patterns B and G, the value of “variation amount” is set to “0%”, so in the fragment image 006SG302, small and large pieces are in the same mode with no difference. Therefore, it is considered a cracking pattern with a high degree of animation.

In other words, the crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G can be used when you want to show a scene.Crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way and fall in the same way, regardless of the size, and are suitable crack patterns depending on the scene. can be selected.

In addition, crack patterns A and C (first pattern) and crack patterns D to F (second pattern) have the same "gravity direction" setting but different "gravity value" settings, so the fragment image The speed at which 006SG302 falls is different. In this way, by varying the numerical value of the parameter "gravity value" and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved. More specifically, since the crack patterns D to F have larger numerical values, the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall is faster.

In addition, for crack patterns A to C, E, and G, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while While the crack patterns D and F are displayed as if they are moving in the axial direction, that is, toward the front, the fragment images are 006SG302 is a mode in which it is displayed by only moving in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in crack patterns A to C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves toward the front side, the fragment image is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, so that It can emphasize that you are approaching. In particular, for crack patterns B and G, the numerical value of the "gravity gradient" is set to "90", so the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves further toward the front.

Furthermore, for crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and " The second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

In addition, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) are, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern). The first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, which are different from each other. The first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "2" for crack pattern E (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern). "5" is common. In this way, each pattern has a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of cracking patterns A to G having different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and a cracking effect is executed based on the cracking patterns A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be performed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the type of performance to be executed by the performance control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the determined performance may be It is possible to determine the numerical values of various parameters according to the type of item, jackpot expectation level, etc., create breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values, and display an animation display of the glass plate breaking based on the created breaking animation data. You can also use it as

(Display example of crack pattern)
Next, details of display examples of crack patterns A to G will be explained based on FIGS. 199 to 205. FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. FIG. 201 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. FIG. 202 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of FIGS. 199 to 205, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303. This is an example of displaying a crack pattern in a mode in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed although it is a corresponding image. In other words, this is a diagram comparing a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 0%, and the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3). In (A4), the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 100%.

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of FIGS. 199 to 205, in the animation display in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, in the frame at the beginning of the cracking (for example, (B1)), the glass plate image 006SG301A is at approximately the center position. Since the setting is such that the cracking starts when an impact (force) like a sphere colliding from the rear side is applied, the scattering starts from the fragment image 006SG302 near the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the surrounding area A large number of fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started scattering. In other words, at the stage when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed over the entire display screen instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the timing of the cracking, started to change to a broken state, a large number of glass plate images 006SG301A, which were hidden from view at the timing of the cracking, filled almost the entire area of the display screen. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the images displayed in the lower display layer image drawing area than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 are almost difficult to see.

Therefore, at the start timing of the cracking effect, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed for several frames and filling almost the entire display screen, changes to a broken state, and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are created. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is better if the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner, as in the cracking patterns A to D. However, as in the cracking patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A If the crack effect suddenly starts without being displayed in the crack mode, the image that was displayed before the crack effect will be drowned out will suddenly be displayed to fill the display screen. Since the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a broken state and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, there is a possibility that this may give an unnatural impression to the player.

Therefore, at the beginning of cracking, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 to hide a large number of fragment images 006SG302, as shown in the whiteout display early period of (A1). This can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in the latter period of whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), the whiteout image 006SG303 is not suddenly hidden, but is faded out and the transmittance is gradually increased to prevent debris. Since the image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has been moved from the center of the display screen to the surrounding area to some extent, the manner in which the fragmented image 006SG302 breaks and scatters can be made to look natural and natural.

As shown in FIG. 199, in the crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 199 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 spread radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 199 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 199 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 200, in the crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 200 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 200 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 200 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 201, in the crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 201 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 spread radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 201 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 201 (B3) to (B5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a pseudo continuous effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, and a cut-in effect are executed, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as a background image. The present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly illustrated, for example, background images may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type of effect.

As shown in FIG. 202, in the crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 202 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 spread radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, to the right) or the Y-axis direction (for example, to the left) (see Figure 202 (B2)), it falls downward and is displayed as a frame-out mainly from the bottom side (see Figure 202 (B2)). 202 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 203, in the crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 203 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 203 (B2)), it moves in slow motion. 203 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E has been adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to FIGS. 203 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 203 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Furthermore, in FIG. 203 (B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally not shown in order to make it easier to see the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, the fragment image 006SG302 in the crack pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from FIG. 203 (B3), and it takes time to display it out of frame. A super reach α effect may be performed by white-out while moving in slow motion so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 204 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering radially in the X-axis direction (for example, to the right) and Y-axis direction (for example, to the left) (see Figure 204 (B2)), the main body falls downward in slow motion. 204 (B3) to (B5)). Further, since the small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, it falls first and is displayed out of frame, whereas the large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 is slow, so it is displayed out of frame after the small fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern at the top right of the display screen in the reach mode will be temporarily hidden, and will be displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in the breaking effect is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to omit as much display as possible that is not related to the cracking effect, and to enhance the effect of the cracking effect. In addition, when a cracking effect occurs not only during the strong S reach effect but also during other reach effects such as the weak S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern of the reach mode is temporarily hidden, and the fragment image in the corresponding cracking effect is temporarily hidden. 006SG302 may be displayed again when it becomes hidden.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 205 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 205 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 205 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which corresponds to FIGS. 205 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 205 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of fragment image)
Next, details of the fragment image will be explained based on FIGS. 206 and 207. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in (A) a pseudo continuous effect and (B) a cut-in effect. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing fragment images displayed in (A) background change effect A and (B) strong development effect B. Note that the fragment image indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 207 indicates that it is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 206(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect is in a non-transparent mode (for example, the transmittance 0%), on the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect recognizes at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 and character image 006SG307 that are in a superimposed relationship. Since the image is in a transparent mode (for example, 100% transmittance) that allows the fragmentation image to be displayed, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 206(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized. (the background is transparent), and the second fragment image 006SG302 is an image in a transparent mode (the characters are transparent) that allows at least part of the character image 006SG307 (special image) to be recognized. The image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and text are transparent) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the character image 006SG307. By varying the display mode of the images, the presentation effect of each presentation can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(A), all the fragment images 006SG302 among the fragment images in the background change effect A are moved downward to the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5, and are moved downward into the frame. While the first fragment image 006SG302 out of the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is hidden in the out-display mode, as shown in FIG. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is hidden by moving vertically and horizontally and displayed out of frame, and which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5. By being hidden from the front, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 207(A), the fragment image 006SG302 has a first angle (for example, an angle where the plane faces the front side) depending on the rotation operation, and the incident angle of the irradiation light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees. When the angle of the fragment image 006SG302 is a large angle), it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and the rotation operation causes the fragment image 006SG302 to move to a second angle smaller than the first angle. (for example, a small angle at which the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end face faces the front side), at least one of the background images in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302. It becomes difficult to recognize the parts. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 207(A), when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image is at the second angle, so that the fragment image The presentation effect when displaying 006SG302 can be enhanced.

(Effects of each form)
[Form A1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, the player It is possible to control the jackpot game state which is advantageous for players. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, which is a presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state will be controlled during variable display, and a dialogue notice. Control means for executing performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, result notification performance, etc. It is equipped with a certain performance control CPU 120. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 draws images with different display priorities in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5. It has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas.

For example, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative designs as layer 2 images, and objects such as characters as layer 3 images. A layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging crack precursor images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as a layer 4 image, a glass plate image as a layer 5 image. Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and placing 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 (glass shards, etc.), Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and placing operation effect images as layer 6 images, White as layer 7 images Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the out image 006SG303, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the operation promotion image as the layer 8 image, variable display compatible display (pending display, etc.) as the layer 9 image. Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the active display), drawing and arranging the small pattern (4th pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the right-hand hitting notification image as the layer 10 image. It has layer 10 image drawing area for. Further, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

Note that unless a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, and the layer 9 image drawing area is the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is a layer 9 image. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority on the display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. Yes, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. This is an image with a low priority, and the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background image (second background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Background image 006SG082, 7th background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084) can be drawn, and layer 1- A background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (5th background image 006SG085) can be drawn in the 3rd image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area is layer 2. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is not drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This is an image with a low display priority in No. 5.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different timings. Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the background change effect A includes a crack display period in which a crack is displayed when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the image 006SG301 is broken and a fragment image display period is displayed, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.As shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a fragmented image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than the background change effect due to the operation.

Furthermore, the background change effect A is displayed on the image display device 5 before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started. The strong development performance A is a performance that changes the background image of the image display device 5 before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A starts. This is an effect that changes the background images displayed in the . In other words, in this embodiment, background change effect A is used to display the crack and fragment image 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and background change effect A is used to display the fragment image 006SG302 without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. By being able to execute the development effect A at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is common to the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. Since the types of background images displayed before and after the display are different, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. be able to.

[Form A1-2]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is better when strong development effect A is executed without background change effect A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when performance A is executed and strong development performance A is executed (for example, see FIGS. 157 to 160). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and increase interest.

[Form A1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, It is also possible to provide a case where the game goes through different chance background stimulation effects (FIG. 154). Also, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A, it is better to change the background image via background change effect A to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed by either the background change effect A or the chance background stimulation effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-4-1]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the strong development effect is better when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A is executed. Before the execution of A, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background change effect A is not executed (for example, see FIGS. 157 to 160). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making the user expect that both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A will be executed during the first variable display.

[Form A1-4-2]
As shown in FIGS. 187 and 192, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. It is. In addition, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) and a chance background image (first 2 background image 006SG082), a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a background image indicating that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) shown in FIG. The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). ), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form A1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A has transparency, the chance background that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen through the fragment image 006SG302. It is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the image (second background image 006SG082), and since the background image displayed in strong development effect A does not have transparency, the fragment image 006SG302 Since it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302 in these background change effects A. It is possible to enhance the display and the effect of strong development effect A.

[Form A1-4-4]
Further, as shown in FIG. 213, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches the first angle due to the rotation operation, the player can see at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. However, when the fragment image 006SG302 is at the second angle due to the rotation operation, it is difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. good. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A1-4-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 213, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plural fragment images 006SG302 becomes the first angle, one of the plural fragment images 006SG302 The second fragment image 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in multiple directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction is The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the axial direction. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A both exhibit speed changes from the start of display to the timing of the end of display. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving without accompanying movement, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally without any discomfort in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form A1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form A1-7-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes invisible on the display screen (Fig. 199, 204). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it disappears, so that the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form A1-7-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 213, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed. The number of rotation operations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed until it becomes hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 The number of rotation operations until the display area becomes non-display may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form A2-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 192, in both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of white-out image 006SG303 in these background change effects A and strong development effect A is the first half of the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303, and the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303. Since it consists of a white-out display latter period during which the person can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that they can be displayed at various times. In addition to being able to surprise the player, the whiteout image 006SG303 can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change effect A and strong development effect can be suitably executed. .

[Form A2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 192, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the strong development effect The display period of whiteout image 006SG303 in A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms, so by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, background change effect A and strong development effect A are As the relevance increases, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, so it is possible to enhance the effect of both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. can.

[Form A2-3]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A shown in FIG. ) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. By doing so, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started with the whiteout image 006SG303 without causing any discomfort.

[Form A2-4]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 169 and 176, whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A, and whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is an image that is displayed in the same manner, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner is increased, and both The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form A3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 189 and 194, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed moving at a speed of V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragmented image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed in accordance with the progress of the effect. Since the speed changes from the speed V1 to the lower speed V0, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a suitably different impression can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be increased. .

[Form A3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, if the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times in the first variable display, but the cut-in effect can be executed only once, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times. When the cut-in effect is executed, the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once, and when the cut-in effect is executed once, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the game is executed twice. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, and increase interest.

[Form A3-3]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the cracked state (glass plate image 006SG301A) in the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect. The whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the two timings, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (FIGS. 172(C) and 179). (C)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be made different between the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A3-4-1]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed moving at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the whiteout Since the image 006SG303 is moved and displayed at a speed V0 lower than the speed V1 from the timing when the display period of the image 006SG303 ends, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form A3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 194, when displaying the white-out image 006SG303 when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in effect, as shown in FIG. 196, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 is may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V1, but not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V0. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in performance from deteriorating.

[Form A3-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the first fragment among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect The number of rotation operations performed from when the image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is longer than the number of times the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of times the rotation operation is performed from the time the image is displayed until the image becomes non-display in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 189 and 194, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, the player can see the fragment images 006SG302 displayed on the image display device 5. While the background image is not visible, the fragmented images 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragmented images 006SG302. is visible, so even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way in the pseudo-continuous performance and the cut-in performance, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. I can do it.

[Form A4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous rendering is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is a character image. The third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image in which at least a part of the image 006SG307 can be recognized, and among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect, the third fragment image 006SG302 is a combination of at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and a character image. This is a transparent image in which at least a portion of 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 206). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance in this way, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form A4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the rotation movement causes the first fragment image 006SG302 to rotate at the first angle. If this happens, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and if the first fragment image 006SG302 becomes at the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may be difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A4-3-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is rotated at the first angle in the cut-in effect. Sometimes, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 189 and 194, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo continuous effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effects include at least one of the glass plate images 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo continuous effects. The display starts displaying a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a period shorter than the crack display period until the fragment image 006SG302 that partially imitates is displayed, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are created. The fragment image 006SG302 is commonly displayed in a manner of moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 208), and is displayed in a manner of moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302 may take a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form A5-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden on the display screen (Fig. 201, Fig. 205). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it disappears, so that the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form A5-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form A5-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect are hidden on the display screen in a manner that they move toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 207(A)), and the fragment images in the cut-in effect are hidden. The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It is preferable to hide the display before moving towards the target (for example, see FIG. 207(B)). By doing this, it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different in the way it is presented between the pseudo-continuous presentation and the cut-in presentation, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance of this embodiment are performances with different execution timings in the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these reach-suggesting performances and weak-development performances, the right crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is longer than the preceding movement period in the weak-development performance, and the fragment image display period in the reach-suggesting performance and the fragment in the weak-development performance are longer. The length may be different from the image display period (see FIGS. 190 and 191). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A6-2]
Further, in the reach suggestion performance, the right crack display period may be made longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 190). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach-suggesting performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form A6-3]
In addition, as the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment, there is a case in which the success pattern is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, and a case in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after the crack is displayed. There are cases where the glass plate image 006SG301A is executed in a failure pattern that does not break, and when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the failure pattern, there is a broken image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the success pattern. For a period of 6000 ms, which is longer than 2000 ms of the display period (fragment image display period), cracks appear in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period. Since this is displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate to the player that the reach suggestion performance will not be executed in a successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form A6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion performance is a performance that informs that it will become a reach if executed in a successful pattern, it will not become a reach if it is executed in a failure pattern. Since this is a performance that suggests that the rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low, the player is dependent on whether or not the reach-suggesting performance is executed and whether the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. It can attract attention and increase interest.

[Form A6-4-2]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be performed during the variable display of 1, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is different from the weak development effect. When the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is made executable after it has started, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is started before the execution of the weak development performance, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not performed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect and increase interest.

[Form A6-5]
At the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the reach suggestion performance, and at the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development performance, In common, a whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (FIG. 173(G), FIG. 175 (D)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A6-6]
It is possible to highlight the decorative pattern in the reach state in the reach suggestion effect, and in the fragment image display period, the period in which the reach state glue pattern is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so (see FIGS. 174(I) to 174(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that a ready-to-reach state has been reached.

[Form A6-7-1]
In response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 in the reach suggestion effect, the movement effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302, and the timing to start displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 (see FIG. 173(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without causing any discomfort.

[Form A6-7-2]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 190, in the reach suggestion production, the timing at which a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301 and By displaying the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the small fragment image 006SG302A for a longer period of time than the motion effect image 006SG323, the player is informed that a crack has been displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This can be suitably shown.

[Form A6-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 190, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started; When acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the motion effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, cracks may be displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character appears in the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to prevent the reach-suggesting performance from becoming a monotonous performance by giving a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggesting performance when acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form A6-7-4]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 190, in the reach suggestion effect, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period in which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (the small fragment image display period). is also a long period of time, so when a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the character is It is possible to prevent the reach-suggestion performance from becoming a monotonous performance by giving a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggesting performance when acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form A6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effect have transparency, the player can visually recognize the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect do not have transparency, the player cannot see at least part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. , the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-9]
Further, as shown in FIG. 196, the speed of both the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect changes from the display start timing to the display end timing. Since the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving without any movement, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form A6-10]
Further, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be set to be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see FIGS. 190 and 191). By doing this, it is possible to create a difference between the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance, and increase interest through various presentations.

[Form A7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 194, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 194, when a cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the player presses the push button. 31B is operated or when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking occurs, the cut-in effect is executed, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, it is given priority over the white-out image 006SG303. An image of the state after the push button 31B is operated is displayed. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is 2500 ms, the display period of the state image before the operation of the push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the state image after the operation of the push button 31B is the display period of the state image of the whiteout image 006SG303. The display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect (cut-in image display period) is 1000 ms, which is the same as the display period. ) and longer than the display period of the state image after operation of the push button 31B (post-operation state image display period), the cut-in effect becomes monotonous and the interest of the cut-in effect decreases. This can be prevented.

[Form A8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous effect, the combinations of decorative patterns displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the combinations of decorative patterns are different). However, after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo continuous effect). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A8-2]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect, may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form A9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, the period in which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period in which cracks are displayed in pseudo continuous effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, which is different in length. . In both the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started at the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, and these whiteout images are The display period of the image 006SG303 consists of an early white-out display period in which the player cannot see the broken image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303, and a late white-out display period in which the player can see the broken image 006SG302. Therefore, the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be reduced by the whiteout image 006SG303, and the background change effect A and the pseudo-sequence can be suitably executed.

[Form A9-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the same, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect. , may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form A10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 193, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B is displayed in white from the start of display. Until the out image 006SG303 is displayed, it is displayed moving at a speed of V1, and at the transition, it is displayed moving at a speed of V0, which is lower than the speed V1. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A10-2]
A first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a state where it is displayed in a cracked state to a cracked state in the background change effect A, and a second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect B; In common, a whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 169 (G), Fig. 177 (H)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V0 in strong development effect B is longer than the period in which it is displayed moving at speed V1. The presentation of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different from the presentation B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the period in which fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V1 in strong development effect B is the same as the display period of whiteout image 006SG303, and fragment image 006SG302 moves at speed V0. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is moved and displayed, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the strong development presentation B from deteriorating.

[Form A10-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A are hidden on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 207(A)), and the fragment images in the strong development effect B The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It becomes hidden before moving toward the object (see FIG. 207(B)). By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are both transparent images, so when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form A10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen. It is preferable that there be. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form A10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs between when the display starts and the timing before it disappears on the display screen (Fig. 199, see Figure 200). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it disappears, so that the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form A10-7-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 213, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the plurality of fragment images displayed in the background change effect A are rotated. The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is greater than the number of times the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed until it becomes non-displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 213, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the rotation movement causes the fragment image 006SG302 to become the first When the angle becomes the second angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 becomes the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A10-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 213, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is When the angle is , the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. By doing this, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form A10-8]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, when both background change effect A and strong development effect B can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is set at the timing before the reach, and the strong development effect is Output B can be executed at the timing after reach, and when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect B is executed, the rate of control to jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the background change effect A is being executed and increase interest.

[Form A10-9]
In addition, regarding the background change effect A and strong development effect B shown in FIGS. 187 and 193, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the background change effect A, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous performance. and may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form A11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 183, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect does not have transparency, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A has transparency. Even if the effect is displayed, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 193, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the lengths of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B are made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are made common. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in a plurality of directions, at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction is the fragment image that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302, which takes a longer time to disappear in the display area of the image display device 5 than 006SG302, and is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in the strong development effect B, The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed. By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, while the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion production, the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change production A, and the display period of fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) in the reach suggestion production is 1500ms. On the other hand, since the display period (fragment image display period) of fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is 20,000 ms, a suitably different impression is given even if the effect similarly displays fragment image 006SG302. , can increase interest in games.

[Form A13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack mode according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed from the third crack front mode to the third crack mode. By being able to change the display (see FIGS. 173 and 169), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked manner.

[Form A14-1]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of this embodiment shown in FIG. 185 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, surprises can be given to the player at various timings during the variable display. can give. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect can be executed at a timing after the first continuous cracking effect, and the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have the same length of crack display period, and the fragment image The length of the display period is also the same, and when the second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous cracking effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect is temporarily hidden. Since the crack display period of the second crack effect is started, a new crack is displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed, and the effect of the effect is prevented from deteriorating. I can do it.

[Form A14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect have at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. The fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including the above, and the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A14-3]
The character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed in common with the fragment image 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, and the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous breaking effect can be displayed in the first mode (for example, , character image of Jam), and the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect is displayed in a second mode (for example, the character image of Mumu) different from the first mode (Fig. 166 ( F), see FIG. 167(F)), the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be presented differently to increase interest.

[Form A14-4]
Further, while the length of the fragment image display period is different between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect shown in FIG. 185, the character image 006SG305 displayed as a result of the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect The length of the display period may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A14-5]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 151, in this embodiment, a pattern in which a second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which a second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, There is a pattern in which the cracking effect is not executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is better than a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the second consecutive winning performance is executed and increase interest.

[Form A14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are both displayed moving from the display start timing to the display end timing without changing the speed. It is possible to enhance the relationship between the first consecutive cracking performance and the second consecutive cracking performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. 185, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302, and is displayed in the first continuous cracking effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect can be increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form A14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. The relationship between the cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form A15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 195, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as a result notification performance when the jackpot game state is not controlled, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragmented image 006SG302 to disappear in the background change effect A, and the time required for the cracked image of the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled. Since the required time is different, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form A15-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 187, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the background change effect A requires 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled, the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Since it takes 5500 ms for the image containing the icon to disappear, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form A15-3]
There is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification effect (miss). There is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302), and the display size of the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) is larger than that of the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302). This is preferable (see, for example, FIGS. 170(J) and 182(D)). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 different in how they are displayed, and to increase interest.

[Form A15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background image in the superimposed relationship to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) is in the superimposed relationship. By using a transparent image in which at least a portion of a certain background image can be recognized (see FIG. 197), it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different in how it is presented and to increase its interest.

[Form A15-5]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) have in common a plurality of images including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). It is preferable that the screen be displayed in a manner of moving in the direction (see, for example, FIGS. 199 and 201). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 more relevant and more interesting.

[Form A15-6]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the cracked state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the background change effect A, and the broken image 006SG302 in the result notification effect (disappearance). The white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the second timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. . Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIG. 169 (G) , see FIG. 182(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (missing), thereby increasing interest.

[Form A16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 195, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, The game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a corresponding manner. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, while the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the failure pattern result notification effect. The light emission 9 may continue until a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as stopping the variable display after the failure pattern result notification effect ends, or starting the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the control will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A17-1]
When it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled by the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the second cracked mode, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked mode. The type of background image is different between before and when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect (see Figures 169(A) to 169(F), Figures 170(I), and Figure 170(K)). , Display of the background image before it is announced whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled by the result notification effect, and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is announced that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled. The aspects are different (see FIGS. 182(A) to 182(B) and FIG. 182(D)).

By doing this, it is possible to execute the background change effect A in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, which can surprise the player. By changing the display mode of the background image before notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled, the player can be appropriately notified that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled.

[Form A18-1]
Background change effect A includes a first predetermined part that displays the character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked manner according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the glass plate image. This is a performance that includes a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the pseudo-continuous performance includes a third predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 with a second crack. a fourth predetermined part that is displayed in the same manner, a fifth predetermined part that starts the falling motion of the movable body 32, and a fragment image imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a production that includes a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of 006SG302, and the execution timing is different between the background change production A and the pseudo continuous production, and in the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production, the movable body 32 is different from the first action. A different second operation is started, and after the fragment image 006SG302 is no longer displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the second operation of the movable body 32 ends (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 172).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect that display the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 can be executed at different timings, giving surprises to the players at various timings. Furthermore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302 after displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form A18-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 189, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may be possible to change and display it. In this case, in the background change effect A, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and in the pseudo continuous effect, the glass plate The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form A18-3-1]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. , a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 169 (G), Fig. 172 (C)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A18-3-2]
The first motion is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the production position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 172). See C). In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form A18-3-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 189, in the pseudo continuous effect, the movable object falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be set to be longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance.

[Form A18-4]
Further, as a performance different from the pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 189, a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to be controlled to a jackpot game state may be executed. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect is enabled to be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body moves as a pseudo continuous effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pseudo continuous effect from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 195, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 195, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This is an effect that starts the ascent of 32 and ends the ascent before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form A19-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 195, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may also be possible to display the image. In this case, in the background change effect A, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and in the result notification performance, the glass plate The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form A19-3-1]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot) A white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 169 (G), Fig. 180 (Refer to (E)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby increasing interest.

[Form A19-3-2]
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the production position toward the origin position, and when the second operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 180(F)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form A19-3-3]
In addition, regarding the result notification effect shown in FIG. 195, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is the movable body rising period. Since it is longer than , it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the result notification performance.

[Form A19-4]
Further, as a performance different from the result notification performance shown in FIG. 195, it may be possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect is enabled to be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A20-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 192, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the strong development effect A is a effect that displays the fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. is also a short period. Furthermore, in strong development performance A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the origin position above the image display device 5 after falling, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period ends. As a result, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form A20-2-1]
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the first operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 176(B)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form A20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 192, the strong development performance A includes an early whiteout display period and a whiteout latter display period. Here, the initial whiteout display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may have substantially the same length, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the strong development performance.

[Form A20-3]
Furthermore, as a performance different from the strong development performance A shown in FIG. 192, it is possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 will be controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. good. In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area overlapping with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the strong development performance A performance from decreasing due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form A21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the background image can be viewed together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when not in use, are displayed with the first visibility, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is in a cracked state. The first background image 006SG081 when displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in background change effect B. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas whose priority is lower than that of the predetermined display layer when For example, the crack display area 006SG324) is displayed with the first visibility (see FIGS. 169(E), (F), and FIG. 171(C)).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack modes, can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack mode, even when the glass plate image 006SG301 is similarly displayed, it is suitably different. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form A21-2]
By being able to display the boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view of FIG. 171(C)), the background The performance effect of change performance B can be enhanced.

[Form A21-3]
The first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that support variable display can be displayed in the layer 9 image drawing area that has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 The corresponding image when is displayed in a cracked manner is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 171(C)). The corresponding image can also be suitably displayed.

[Form A21-4]
Further, for the background change effect B shown in FIG. 188, the second stage crack display period may be set to be longer than the first stage crack display period. By doing so, it is possible to make the glass plate image 006SG301 look different between the background change effect A and the background change effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form A22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the background change effect A and the dialogue preview effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Regarding the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, the visibility of the background image may be different between the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance is made longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack modes are provided in the dialogue preview performance (see FIGS. 169 and 168). The ratio of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type and the second crack mode is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type and the second crack mode is displayed. may be set to be high. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the speech preview performance, and even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the interest of the game. can be increased.

[Form A22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type in the second crack mode is displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type in the second crack mode is displayed, it is displayed lower than the predetermined display layer. The visibility of the background image differs (see FIGS. 169 and 168). By doing so, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form A22-3]
It is preferable that the whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance. (For example, see FIGS. 169 and 168). By doing so, the display patterns of the white-out images 006SG303 can be made different and more interesting.

[Form A23-1]
The image display device 5 can display corresponding images (for example, first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103) that are compatible with variable display in the special display layer (for example, layer 9 image drawing area). , the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer (for example, layer 9-1 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the special display layer, and a second predetermined display that has a lower priority than the special display layer. Special information regarding variable display in a special display layer (for example, layer 10 image drawing area) that can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a layer (for example, layer 4 image drawing area) and has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and the 2 When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on a predetermined display layer, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when the background change effect A is executed, the change effect is not executed and the background change effect B is executed. It is possible to perform a change effect when the change effect occurs (see FIG. 215).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B can be executed at different timings, so that surprises can be given to the player at various timings. Even if the image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, so suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased.

[Form A23-2-1]
The change production is a production in which the character image 006SG305 is displayed and the display mode of the corresponding image is changed by the character image 006SG305 performing an action that acts on the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 has a higher priority than a predetermined display layer. can be displayed in a lower display layer (for example, layer 3 image drawing area) (see FIG. 215). By doing so, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background changing effect B to the minimum.

[Form A23-2-2]
By being able to display a change emphasis image (for example, effect image 006SG330) in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 215), The changing effect can be suitably executed even while the background changing effect B is being executed.

[Form A24-1]
The display modes are different between the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A suggests that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be executed. The display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A. (See Figures 169, 216, and 217).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that surprises can be given to the player at various timings, and furthermore, the background change effect A The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is different between the strong development performance A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A and the subsequent performance can be increased, so the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed. , the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the first special performance is executed, and the suggestion mode is the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed, and the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed. (See FIGS. 216, 217, and 218). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment images 006SG302 (for example, the fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form A24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode This is displayed more often than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggested mode (see FIG. 218). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form A24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can perform a rotational movement, and in the strong development effect A, it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode has a larger amount of rotational movement than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode (Fig. 218 reference). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form A24-4]
The strong development effect A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in a second predetermined part, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part. In the part, a single fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 217). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form A25]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 194 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, the effect can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the white-out image 006SG303, and during the operation promotion effect execution period before the cut-in effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the cut-in effect. (and the fragment image 006SG302) are not visible for a period longer than the initial white-out display period, so the operation promotion effect creates a reserve for the crack effect, and the fragment image display period creates a sense of speed. It is possible to achieve a unique cracking pattern.

[Form A26]
Further, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 194 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, it is an effect that can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation promotion effect execution period. By doing so, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form A27]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In presentation A, strong development presentation B, cut-in presentation, and result notification presentation, at least a portion of the display period of white-out image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of white-out image 006SG303 is the fragment image. The period is shorter than the display period. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a latter whiteout display period. Note that the latter half of the whiteout display period may be longer than the first half of the whiteout display period. By doing this, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is whiter than the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents image 006SG303 from being emphasized.

[Form A28]
As shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of glass plate image 006SG301, starts to break or the display has just started. The fragment image 006SG302 is hidden from view from the player. Here, the white-out image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form A29]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 in the whiteout display early period is displayed. The fragment image 006SG302, which has just begun to crack or display, is hidden from the player's view, and the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in the latter period of the white-out display when the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is increased. It is possible. Therefore, in the latter period of whiteout display, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which is moved and displayed after a sufficient period of time has elapsed from the start of display.

[Form A30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 191, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form A31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 187 and 191, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the gaming state is a normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be performed when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the late white-out display period of the background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving during the late white-out display period of the weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form A32]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to emit light using the light emission data table for cracking performance over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. From the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so the display is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. Light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks can be suitably performed.

[Form A33]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least in part, and the speakers 8L and 8R are in the whiteout state. Since the crack effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is output from the display start timing of the image 006SG303, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form A34]
As shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern and when it is executed in the second pattern, the sound corresponding to the breaking effect (corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The difference may be whether or not the sound produced by the user is output. By doing this, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack effect.

[Form A35]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, if it is possible to actually execute the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern in the second pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled to a jackpot game state as the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern. A sound may be output depending on the situation. By doing so, it is possible to provide patterns of cracking effects that give different impressions depending on the condition.

[Form A36]
As shown in FIGS. 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production pattern for the cracking production in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern, the breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301. On the other hand, when the breaking effect is executed in the second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the images from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed in accordance with the display of the broken image 006SG302. The crack effect sound may not be output. By doing so, it is possible to provide crack patterns with different impressions.

[Form A37]
185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the fragment image is output. When 006SG302 is displayed, the effect sound (crack effect sound) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a louder volume than the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, a contrast is created between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the crack pattern is impressed.

[Form A38]
As shown in FIG. 212, as a crack effect in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, character voices are output from the speakers 8L and 8R as sounds corresponding to the displayed character. When output is enabled and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a crack effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing this, a sharp contrast is created between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form A39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). value (for example, "30%"), the operating speeds of the first size fragment image 006SG302 and the second size fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different, The second pattern has a variation amount of 0 (for example, "0%"), so that the third size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern The operating speed is the same as that of 006SG302 (see FIGS. 197 and 198).

By doing this, the first pattern will be affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in a cracking pattern that looks realistic. The second pattern can be used when you want to show movement, and the second pattern is affected by the animation regardless of the size, so all the objects fly in the same way and fall in the same way, so you can choose the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. You can choose.

[Form A40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and the display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (for example, a crack pattern). There are patterns D to F), and the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs depending on the setting of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 197 and 198). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved.

[Form A41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). , the direction of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a moving manner differs due to the different gravity direction settings (see FIGS. 197 and 198). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and improve the interest.

[Form A42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern B), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern C). For crack pattern B and crack pattern C, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A and "5" for crack pattern B. 3'', and the crack pattern C is different from ``7'' (see FIGS. 197 and 198). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

[Form A43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern F), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) have the same first parameter of "gravity" as "0" and crack pattern F and crack pattern G. The second parameter of `` is ``3'' for crack pattern E and ``5'' for crack pattern F, and crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) are The first parameter is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5", which is common (see FIGS. 197 and 198). In this way, each pattern has a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form A44]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns for the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302), and the crack image according to the first pattern is usually The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time saving state, a variable probability state), and the cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. , the type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, and before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. It is preferable that the types of background images displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer differ after the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern (for example, see FIGS. 169 and 170). . By doing so, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when using the crack patterns A to G in the normal state and when using the crack patterns A to G in the special state.

[Form A45]
Background change effect A is a effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode, and the image display device 5 displays a normal state and the normal state. In special states (for example, time saving state, variable probability state) that are more advantageous than the above, an effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed when the broken image is displayed in the first mode, and the broken image is displayed in the first mode. The effect image is hidden at a timing before it is displayed in the second mode (for example, see FIGS. 169 and 170). By doing so, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form A46]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the cracking effect of the first pattern can be executed in a normal state, and the breaking effect of the second pattern can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the two patterns of cracking effects may be displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Furthermore, the speed of movement may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of cracking effect. By doing this, the performance effect during the time saving state or the variable probability state can be enhanced by using a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time saving state or the variable probability state.

[Form A47]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the line preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the first pattern of cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, the second pattern of breaking effect can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state, and when the first pattern of breaking effect is executed, The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be different depending on when the second pattern of cracking effect is executed. By doing this, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled is different depending on the crack pattern, so that the crack pattern can draw more attention.

[Form A48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially Overlapping, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a mode in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer is This is a transparent mode that can be recognized (see FIG. 218). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form A49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially The first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 have different display modes, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302. long (see Figure 218). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form A50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose the information on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, is better than the second display area over which the movable body 32 overlaps. The display amount is larger than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the display area L2 (see FIG. 218). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form A51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is a period in which the movable body 32 overlaps from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap. The second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 moves from the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. It is displayed in a moving manner (see FIG. 218). By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not go into the area where the movable body 32 overlaps makes it possible to recognize that it is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps is prepared. By doing so, it is possible to provide a dynamic performance.

[Form A52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least partially, and even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display screen, the fragment image 006SG302 continues. (See Figure 218). By doing so, while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form A53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A), and The type of fragment image 006SG302 takes a shorter period of time to disappear from the display screen than the first type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIGS. 173 and 174). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form A54]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before one type of cracked image is displayed and after the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern. are different, and a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern. The types of background images displayed are different (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 173 to 175). By doing this, the specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common in the plurality of crack patterns, so that the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form A55]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. , when displaying a broken image using the first pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a predetermined image is displayed after displaying the first type of broken image 006SG302. When the effect image is hidden at the timing and the broken image is displayed using the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second type of broken image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 173 to 175). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form A56]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns for the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern for character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the second type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is Over the display period of the type of fragment image 006SG302, it is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed (see FIGS. 173, 174, 169, and 170). By doing so, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, thereby increasing the presentation effect.

[Form A57]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The degree of expectation to be controlled into a jackpot state is different depending on when the image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see FIGS. 169, 170, 173, and 174). By doing so, expectations for the character image 006SG305 are increased, and interest is increased by drawing attention to the type of crack pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the embodiment described above, the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the first half of the whiteout display period of each effect is all constant (first continuous crack effect, second continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A). , background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, V1 for result notification performance, V0 for strong development performance B and cut-in performance), but this The invention is not limited to this, and as a first modified example, these first continuous cracking effects, second continuous breaking effects, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, and reach suggestion effect are included. , weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. The advancing speed (display speed) in the vertical direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction), and in the direction toward the player (also referred to as the Z-axis direction) may be different.
The degree may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208(A), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect in the result notification effect is a fragment image 006SG302A, Fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed of 0 in the axial direction, a speed of Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 speed in the Z-axis direction, 0 speed in the X-axis direction, 0 speed in the Y-axis direction, In addition to the fragment image 006SG302C that travels in the Z-axis direction at a speed of Vz1, there is also a fragment image 006SG302 that travels in two of these X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment image 006SG302 that travels in three directions. It may have a fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208(B), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect has a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction and a speed of Vx2 in the Y-axis direction. Fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction, a speed of 0 towards the X-axis direction, a speed of Vy2 towards the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction In addition to the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C that moves at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, these images in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction Among the axial directions, the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in two directions, and the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in three directions.

Note that since moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in an enlarged manner, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as an enlarged display speed.

Here, in each production, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that advances only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that advances only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that advances only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 208 (C) In this modification example 1, unlike the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C is only enlarged and displayed toward the player. It is set longer than image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, by displaying the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A ends when the fragment image 006SG302B is displayed. Since the three-dimensional effect can be continued even after the splitting, the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208(D), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. , the result notification performance is the performance group X, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, and the cut-in performance is the performance group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the cracking performance of these performance group X and the cracking performance of the performance group Y. Comparing the displayed fragment image 006SG302C, in this modification 1, the traveling speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the presentation group The fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group Y is set to have a longer period from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group X, for example, by setting the display speed to be high (Vz1>Vz2). Therefore, in the present modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification. By being able to execute the background change performance A and the strong development performance B at different timings, it is possible to make the player pay attention to these performances at various timings, thereby giving surprise to the player. , since the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to be hidden is different between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, the same broken effect is executed to display the fragment image 006SG302. Even in the case of a presentation, it is possible to give suitably different impressions to the player depending on the presentation, so that the interest in the game can be increased.

In particular, in this modification example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to require a longer period of time to hide the fragment image 006SG302C than the effects included in effect group X. When the cracking effect is executed as the included effect, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when the breaking effect is executed as the effect included in the effect group X.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed (enlarged) toward the player as the fragment image 006SG302 of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is provided, but the present invention is directed to this. However, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed toward the player (enlarged display) changes as it is enlarged and displayed from the display start timing to the display end timing. You may also do so. By doing so, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , Comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. As shown in FIG. 208(C), the fragment image 006SG302C is exemplified in such a manner that the period from the start of display to the end of display is set to be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B. The period from the start of display to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific production (for example, a cut-in production) is not limited to a predetermined production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production) that is different from the specific production. The period may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302A, B that move only in the X-axis direction and Y-axis direction in the presentation). By doing this, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is made different between the specific performance and the predetermined performance (in the above example, the cut-in performance and the pseudo continuous performance), and the interest of these specific performance and predetermined performance is increased. can be increased.

In addition, in the embodiment and the present modification 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by being moved and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect or background change effect A), all the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Regarding the fragment image 006SG302 that is hidden by completely moving toward the target and displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed on the image display device 5. While the fragment image 006SG302 may be hidden by moving completely outside the area, other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while being moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the display modes of the fragment image 006SG302 between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest of the specific performance and the predetermined performance.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as each crack effect are displayed moving in multiple directions such as the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the first continuous crack effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second continuous crack effect. . By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed as a result of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken as the breaking effect of each effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each The number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 209(A), the whiteout display early period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A has a length L1, and is a period that is continuous with the whiteout display early period, The latter period of white-out display in which the white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the first period of white-out display is displayed has a length L2 (L2>L1).

In addition, the fragment image display period is set to a length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the total period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period. It consists of a first fragment image display period and a second fragment image display period that is continuous with the first fragment image display period and has a length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2).

Here, as shown in FIG. 209(B), in the second fragment image display period, more fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than in the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the game interest of the cracking effect. I can do it. Furthermore, in this modification example 2, in the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early white-out display period, while the latter period of the white-out display In the period that overlaps with the period, the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 through the white-out image 006SG303, and the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is equal to the total period of the early white-out display period and the latter white-out display period. Since it is longer than the length (L1+L2), during the early period of whiteout display, by making the broken image 006SG302 invisible to the player, the player feels uncomfortable with the cracking effect as the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. In addition, it is possible to prevent the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragmentation image 006SG302 in the latter half of the whiteout display period, thereby preventing the game enjoyment of the cracking effect from decreasing. There is.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the performance and result notification effect has transparency, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the pseudo continuous effect and the weak development effect does not have transparency. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, and a reach effect. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all have transparency, or all of them may be transparent. It does not have to have a gender.

(Modification 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 210 as a third modification, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. , the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect of strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the transmittance changes as the effect progresses (in this modification example 3) If so, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is 0 at the display timing of the fragment image 006SG302, T1 (T1>0) at the end timing of the whiteout display period, and T2 (T2>T1) at the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. , the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed at T3 (T3>T2) at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends.By doing this, for example, immediately before the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5. When sufficiently scattered over the display area, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In particular, in this modification example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Since the image can be easily recognized through the image 006SG302, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the image displayed as a result of the cracking performance being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this third modification, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an example in which the transmittance increases as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may decrease as the effect progresses.

(Modification 4)
Furthermore, in modification 3, a first continuous cracking performance, a second continuous cracking performance, a dialogue preview performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, As the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 211(A) and 211(B) as a fourth modification, the effects to be executed include a first continuous breaking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, Fragment image 006SG302 depending on whether it is background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect. The transmittance of the fragment images 006SG302 may be different depending on the game state even if they are the same effect (in FIG. 211, the background change effect A and the weak development effect are different). (Illustrating the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 in and).

As shown in FIG. 211, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts as a crack effect, the whiteout display period ends. This makes the fragment image 006SG302 visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the weak development effect have different transmittances when they are visible to the player. Therefore, even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, it is possible to create a difference in the content of the effect. Therefore, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. It is possible to enhance the production effect between when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production of the weak development production.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 211, a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in a normal state, and a weak development effect when executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. Even when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect of , the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect as the background change effect A when executed in the time saving state or the variable probability state. When the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as a weak development effect when executed, the transmittance in the state where it is visible to the player is different, so in both cases, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed as a breaking effect. Even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, it is possible to create a difference in the content of the effect even if there is a break effect. It is possible to enhance the production effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production in the development production.

(Modification 5)
In addition, in the embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, a breaking effect is executed as a effect within these background change effect A or reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, a voice corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may also be output. By doing so, it is possible to give contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 212 as modification example 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, the output of the character voice is The character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol1 in the example of FIG. 212) so that at least a part of the period and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this modification 5, as shown in FIG. 212, the crack effect sound that is output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed has a louder volume than the crack sound that is output when the crack is displayed. (Vol2 in the example of FIG. 212) may be output. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, the crack effect can be added as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. The player can get an impression that the performance is executed, that is, that the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance are executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of the cracking performance.

(Modification 6)
In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display. Furthermore, the number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different depending on which of the effects is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213 as modification example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the breaking effect of the dialogue preview effect rotates R three times from the start of display to the end of display. However, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A is larger than R3 from the start of display to the end of display. Fragment image 006SG302, which is rotated a small number of times R2 (R3>2) and displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, rotates fewer times than R2 from the start of display to the end of display. It is sufficient to rotate R1 (R2>R1) times.

In this way, in this modification 6, even if the timings that can be executed during variable display are different, by having an effect in which the number of rotations from the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display is the same, The combination of the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, the strong Like the combination of development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the relevance within each combination of performances increases, so the performance effect within the combination of these performances can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, in this modification 6, the number of rotations from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which effect is the cracking effect. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect has a higher number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the cut-in effect, so the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are Cracks performed as production, dialogue preview production, background change production A, background change production B, pseudo-continuation production, reach suggestion production, weak development production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, result notification production Variations in presentation can be increased, and the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modification 6, the first consecutive cracking performance, the second consecutive cracking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, and the strong development performance A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is displayed in rotation has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and while the fragment image 006SG302 is rotating. When these fragment images 006SG302 reach the first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, and when these fragment images 006SG302 reach the second rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. At least a portion of the background image may be made invisible. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when these fragment images 006SG302 are displayed. Furthermore, in the case where the presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302 as described above, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 are not rotated synchronously. Image 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle, part of the other fragment image 006SG302 has the rotation angle 2, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302. be able to.

(Modification 7)
Further, as the pseudo-continuous effect in the above embodiment, a form in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed according to the operation of the movable body 32 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 214(A) as modification example 7, as a pseudo continuous effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the crack may be displayed as a crack display period after a preliminary operation period in which the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 214(B), by configuring the crack display period into a crack pre-stage display period and a crack post-stage display period as in the background change effect A of the embodiment, the crack can be displayed in two stages. The cracking effect may be executed after being displayed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 214(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the embodiment. By doing so, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to increase the effect patterns until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displayed.

Furthermore, in this modification example 7, like the background change effect A in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's action and the movement of the movable body 32 operate. In the example shown in FIG. It is also possible to create an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a pre-stage operation period in which the action of 1 and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is composed of a crack-pre-stage display period and a crack-post-stage display period, and the length of the crack-front stage display period in the reach-suggesting performance is changed from the background change performance A of the embodiment. The period may be different from the pre-crack display period. By doing this, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displayed.

(Modification 8)
In the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are placed in the layer 4 image drawing area and the layer 5 image drawing area below the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. Although the display form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the active display area 5F and It may be possible to display not only the layer 4 image drawing area below the special figure pending storage display area 5U, but also the layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modification example 8, as shown in FIGS. 215 (A1) to (A5), in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is placed in a layer higher than the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. It can be displayed in the image drawing area. In addition, in response to the kicking motion of the character image 006SG305 toward the front, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After being displayed in the previous stage mode (see FIG. 215 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to the crack mode, a part of the crack is displayed in the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. They can be displayed in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 215 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed in such a way that it overlaps the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 are displayed. In this case, the visibility of the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 215 (B1) to (B5), in background change effect B, as explained in the embodiment above, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 are displayed in the active display area 5F and on special figure hold. It can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the storage display area 5U. In addition, in response to the action of character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of glass plate image 006SG301 (Fig. 215 (B1 ), two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed at the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324 in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305 to start descending. The appearance of cracks changes stepwise (see FIG. 215 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area that is lower than the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, if the crack grows and the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation Even if it is displayed so as to cover the storage display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

Furthermore, even when the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, the character image 006SG305 is superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. It may be possible to display the effect image 006SG330 in a layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U without displaying it (see FIG. 215 (B3)). Thereafter, an active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 215 (B4)).

In this way, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the background change effect A that may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U is an active change effect ( By overlapping the execution period with the effect production by the changing character), the execution of the active change production that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked mode, In background change effect B that does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U, by making it possible to execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, the crack precursor image can be similarly displayed. Even if the effect is displayed, since the display layer and the presence or absence of the active change effect are different, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game. Note that the target of the change effect may be the first pending display 006SG101 or the second pending display.

In addition, in background change effect A, part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, thereby improving the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. However, if the display mode of the pending display or active display changes in such a situation, it will be difficult to tell whether the change is due to the change effect or the crack mode, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is preferable that the changing effect can be executed in the background changing effect B in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U does not deteriorate even if it becomes a crack mode.

Further, in this modification example 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in the background change effect A, execution of the active change effect is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack effect is executed and the broken image 006SG302 After the whiteout image 006SG303 is scattered and the whiteout image 006SG303 is hidden, the active change effect can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of variation or during reach). Furthermore, the active change effect may be performed in a simplified manner (for example, in a manner in which the changing character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display becomes difficult to see due to the break effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the break effect and the change effect.

(Modification 9)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that it will develop into the strong S reach effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the performance are fragment images 006SG342M in a suggestive manner suggesting that any one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different expectations will be executed; 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc. may be included.

To be more specific, as shown in FIGS. 216(A) to (F), the cracking effect is executed in strong development effect A, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. Before being hidden, a fragment image 006SG342M that suggests that strong S reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed, and a fragment image 006SG342J that suggests that strong S reach effect J will be executed, A fragment image 006SG342N indicating that the strong S reach effect N will be executed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see FIG. 216(G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, only one fragment image 006SG342M is displayed while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden, and if multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed, the strong S It is announced that reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed (see FIGS. 217 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and while the single fragment image 006SG342J is displayed, other fragment images 006SG342M are displayed. , 006SG342N is hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it is announced that the strong S reach effect J will be executed (see FIGS. 217 (B1) and (B2)), and the fragment images If the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden while 006SG342N is displayed as a single image, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it will be announced that the strong S reach effect N will be executed ( (See FIGS. 217(C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the relationship between the fragment image in the strong development effect A and the subsequent strong S reach effect, so it is also suitable even if the effect displays the fragment image 006SG302. It is possible to give a different impression to the player and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification, the type of strong S reach effect to be executed is indicated by the non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N that display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach effects. However, the suggestion mode is not limited to the above one, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image has a mode that allows the type of strong S reach performance to be executed. It may be a fragment image displaying related information such as a reach title name and a background image that can identify the type of production.

Furthermore, if one of the plurality of fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N is displayed while the others are hidden, it is suggested that the type of fragmentation image 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N has been determined to be executed Any one of them may be suggested by displaying it in a large size, displaying it in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Further, the strong S reach effect may be executed with two or more fragment images finally displayed.

(Modification 10)
Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas. It may also be displayable.

For example, in this modification 10, as shown in FIG. 218, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on layer 5-1 in a transparent manner. The small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the image drawing area in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. Further, in this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a crack precursor image is displayed in each of the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the crack timing. Furthermore, as explained in modification example 9, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect drawn. It is said to be a mode.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area is This is a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area that is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area can be recognized. In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 218(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are the first display that does not overlap with the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the production position. It is composed of an area L1 and a second display area L2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the production position, the amount of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. . By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 overlaps the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, any first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving from the first display area L1 to the second display area L2, while the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 Any second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes it clear that it is broken, while the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 is prepared, creating a lively effect. can be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 imitating a glass plate was applied as an example of the crack precursor image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A crack precursor image imitating an object other than glass may be applied. Further, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Further, the crack precursor image may be displayed in a plurality of layered image drawing areas so that crack effects can be produced individually.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of the fragment image, a form in which a glass fragment image 006SG302 imitating a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is a replacement for the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image, can be displayed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed. The broken fragment image may be displayed in part. Further, although the fragment image is displayed in a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed in a lower display layer than the crack precursor image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking patterns A to G are set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect is based on cracking patterns of types other than those described above. may be executable.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example was given in which a cracking effect can be executed during execution of an effect such as a preview effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The breaking effect may be performed independently and separately from other effects other than the breaking effect. In this case, by making the jackpot expectation different depending on the form of the cracking pattern, the breaking performance may be performed as one of the preview performances, or the performance stage, performance mode, and game state may be changed. It may also be performed as a change effect.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the crack effect, the crack starts when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear side to the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cracking may be started by applying some kind of impact (force) to a predetermined position of the crack precursor image from the front side. Further, the force may be applied to multiple locations on the crack precursor image at a predetermined timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the embodiment, depending on the type of preview effect, cracking may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a crack mode, or cracking may start suddenly without changing to a crack mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview effect, all crack effects include the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changing to a crack mode. Alternatively, cracking may start suddenly without all the cracking effects changing to the crack mode.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the object image (such as a character), decorative pattern, and background image displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. The various images to be displayed may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the crack may be displayed in a way that makes it stand out by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the portion representing the crack.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the character image 006SG305 was mainly used as an example of the object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character type may be of a type other than the above. It's okay. Furthermore, instead of a character, it can be changed to a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, a target, etc. in various ways.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking effect includes two cases in which cracking is started in accordance with the movement of the object image, a case in which cracking is started in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32, and a case in which the cracking is started in accordance with the movement of the object image and the movable body 32. Although we have exemplified a case in which cracking starts regardless of the movement, and a certain form, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, cracking may be started in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 in all effects, or cracking may be started in all effects regardless of the object image or the movement of the movable body 32. In addition, although the movable body 32 as a logo accessory is used as an example of the movable body, a board-side movable body provided elsewhere on the game board 2 may be applied, or a movable body provided at another location on the game board 2 may be used. A frame-side movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied. Furthermore, cracking may be started according to the operation of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect is started, the whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image in a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is difficult to visually recognize in the period immediately after the start of the effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the white-out image 006SG303 is not necessarily displayed at the start of the crack effect to display the fragment image. It is not necessary to make it difficult to visually recognize 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and by increasing the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect, that is, by displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a fade-in manner, the breaking effect can be started. It may be made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at this time.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and arranged to display a crack in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as an image of the actual crack (changes to the fragment image 006SG302) in the layer 5 image drawing area. Although the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area. In this case, a fragment image 006SG302 is drawn and placed as an image in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301A may not be drawn and placed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be displayed in a cracked manner. The transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the broken image. For example, the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A to be displayed in a cracked manner is made higher than the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked manner (glass plate image 006SG301 is made a non-transparent image). ), the timing at which a crack is displayed and the timing at which a crack effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, at the same time as the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner in the layer 4 image drawing area is hidden, the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked appearance in the layer 5 image drawing area is displayed. Although the starting form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timings of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the cracked form and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to the cracked form overlap at least in part. It's okay.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner is illustrated as the crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image is The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301 may be an image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 as long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken.

In addition, in the embodiment, the character kicks (see FIG. 169), hammers (see FIG. 173), punches (see FIG. 173), and punches (see FIG. 175), etc., the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effects of background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect are illustrated. As a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301, in addition to or in place of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, the background change effect of this embodiment includes background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick, causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to break (it breaks due to the impact of the kick); In addition to background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action (see Figure 154), as described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword (the sword The background change effect C (broken by a slash) can be executed, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled can be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of effect patterns in which the glass plate 006SG301A breaks that can be performed as a breaking effect, and to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the cracking effect as the result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be displayed instead of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301. The whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break. By doing so, it is possible to increase the sense of speed from when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and to provide a powerful and memorable breaking effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a cracking effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode, the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode itself is broken. It may be displayed as follows. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A will not be displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so when the cracking effect is executed, the glass plate image 006SG301A will be displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This can prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency may be displayed. In particular, if the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B, the display on the image display device 5 until immediately before the cracking effect is executed. A part of the background image displayed in the area may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance have been exemplified forms in which the cracking performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first continuous cracking performances and second continuous cracking performances are illustrated. , dialogue preview performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, cracking performance as a performance other than result notification performance may be executable. For example, a jackpot game state that is variable and has a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-probable variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game with a probability variable jackpot C in which the number of rounds is 2) At the timing after the player is notified that the game will be controlled in a variable state), or in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display, a jackpot game state that is highly advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game) A promotion effect that once again announces that the jackpot game state will be controlled in the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A (which is a jackpot with 10 rounds and the number of rounds is 10), or a promotion effect that announces that the jackpot game state will not be controlled because it is in a variable display. After that, a cracking effect may be executed as a revival effect to once again notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , When performing a cracking effect as a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the glass plate image are performed after the actions of the character and movable body 32, the display of cracks, etc. Although the form in which the cracking of 006SG301A is performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be performed by whiteout without the action of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks, etc. A case may be provided in which the image 006SG303 is displayed or the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the cracking effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) are targeted for cracking, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for these cracking effects, an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as a crack target (for example, the operation promotion image 006SG310 in the case of a cracking effect of a dialogue preview effect or a cut-in effect).

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the broken image 006SG302, Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the white-out image 006SG303 can be displayed on a glass plate. It may be displayed as an image between the image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the front side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be created by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 127, 128), the character may act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal flat image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the cracking effect, which is a performance that suggests that the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed due to the fact that it is executed like a cut-in performance or a cut-in performance, the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed stereoscopically. It may also be displayed as a 3D image. By doing this, when performing a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a breaking effect makes the player aware that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state. I can do it.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The fact that the performance itself is executed as such suggests that the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed, and the cracking performance in performances other than these strong development performances and cut-in performances. The moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the two. By doing this, for example, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed as a strong development effect or a cracking effect in a cut-in effect can be changed to the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, and the background change effect. A, Background change effect B, Pseudo continuous effect, Reach suggestion effect, Weak development effect, By setting the movement display speed slower than the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect in the result notification effect, strong development effect or cut-in When performing the performance, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 allows the player to recognize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high.

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. As the cracking effects of the production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, while as the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production and the weak development production. , the form of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by itself being executed like a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, other effects can be realized. The presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 is determined by the cracking effect in the effect that suggests that the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when executing , and the breaking effect in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. It may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state, depending on whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect is transparent.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the invention is not limited to spherical game media, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, etc. It may be a medium.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a gaming value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

Moreover, in the embodiment, by allowing the game ball to enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole or the general winning hole 10. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot game state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than in the normal state. A time-saving state or a variable probability state may be set as an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to a player such as the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of winnings. Further, a gaming machine capable of playing games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, but may be a general gaming machine.

EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION The form for carrying out the gaming machine based on this invention is further demonstrated below based on an Example. In the following embodiments, the "variable display" of special symbols and decorative symbols may be referred to as "variable display" or simply "variation."

[Form B1]
The gaming machine of form B1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “advantageous state” corresponds to the “jackpot gaming state” in this embodiment,
"Game control means" corresponds to "CPU 103" in this embodiment,
The "effect execution means" corresponds to the "presentation control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
The "retention storage means" corresponds to the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number" corresponds to "the number of first special figure reservation memory and the number of second special figure reservation memory is four" in this embodiment,
The "start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "midway mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
“Pending shift” corresponds to “shift animation” in this embodiment,
The “specific period” corresponds to “330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation” in this embodiment,
The "predetermined period" corresponds to "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "hold display position" corresponds to the "hold storage display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B2]
The gaming machine of form B2 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B3]
The gaming machine of form B3 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode to the completion mode based on the timing, the pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B4]
The gaming machine of form B4 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Display from aspect,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Immediately before the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "timing of less than 33 ms until the variable display with the number of pending memories of 0 ends".
"Immediately after the variable display with the number of pending memories of 0 ends" corresponds to "timing less than 33 ms after the variable display of the number of pending memories of 0 ends".

[Form B5]
The gaming machine of form B5 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the gradual change of the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot can recognize retained memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290 to Figure 292

[Form B6]
The game machine of form B6 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for displaying the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot be placed on hold. Can recognize memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B7]
The gaming machine of form B7 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode to the completion mode based on the timing, displaying the pending display;
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change it, and it is possible to show the player a gradual change. When a hold display that has already been displayed at the Nth hold display position is moved, a new hold display position corresponding to the Nth hold display position is displayed. Even if the hold display displayed on the screen overlaps, the newly displayed hold display uses a wider display area, so the newly displayed hold display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for displaying the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot be placed on hold. Can recognize memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B8]
The game machine of form B8 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Displayed from the aspect,
Starting the hold display in the start mode than the display area used for displaying the hold display during the period from displaying the hold display in the completion mode until reaching the hold shift start timing, and starting the hold display in the start mode. The display area used in the stepwise change from to the plurality of intermediate modes and then to the completed mode is larger;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the new pending display overlaps with the already displayed pending display, the display area used for the gradual change of the new pending display is wider, so the player cannot can recognize retained memories.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 274, Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294, Fig. 299 to Fig. 302

[Form B9]
The gaming machine of form B9 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
When the N time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N If a new pending memory is stored while the time variable display is being executed and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, and if the number of pending memories N time variable display ends. and the entry prize performance can be performed in either case, whether a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, since the prize-winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 310
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Winning performance" corresponds to "Flash performance when winning a prize".

[Form B10]
The gaming machine of form B10 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and becomes an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing for starting the next variable display is reached in the current situation, the pending display is displayed while being changed to the completion mode based on the timing;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed at the N-th pending display position in the starting mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N While a time variable display is being executed, if the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored, and during the execution of the suspended storage number N time variable display, the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, and the next variable display is started. When a new suspended memory is stored during the period immediately before the suspended memory number N time variable display ends and a new suspended memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts. In either case, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned award performance.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, since the prize-winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 310

[Form B11]
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. , and change from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. Starting with the start mode, changing from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and in a situation where the intermediate mode is different from the pre-completion mode, the next variable display is started. By changing the completion mode based on the timing and displaying the pending display,
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N When a new pending memory is stored while the time variable display is being executed and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the number of pending memories is 0 and the time variable display is executed. Among them, when a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories 0 hours is being executed. , when a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories ends at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period; is practicable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change it, and it is possible to show the player a gradual change, and even if the pending display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, and the newly displayed pending display that is displayed at the Nth position is superimposed, Since the display area used for the newly displayed hold display is wider, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, since the prize-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 310

[Form B12]
The gaming machine of form B12 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When a pending memory is stored, a pending display is displayed by changing stepwise a start mode, a completion mode, and a plurality of intermediate modes including a pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the completion mode. It is possible and
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute the winning performance,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that has already been stored during the variable display is changed from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to correspond to the next variable display. It is possible to move it to the position
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, the hold display is placed in the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number in the start mode. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, The hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the +1 number, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is to be started in the current situation, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, The hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set, so that the next variable display is started based on the timing. displaying the pending display by changing it to the completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the N-time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the pending display is placed in the starting mode at the N-th pending display position. displaying the pending display by performing a stepwise change from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
If a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display. displaying the pending display by starting with the start mode, changing stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the new pending memory is not immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In this case, the pending display is started in the starting mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the pending display is changed from the starting mode to an intermediate mode that is different from the pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display is started in the situation where the mode is set, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed;
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. In this case, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the next variable display is started in the situation where the start mode is set. Displaying the pending display by changing the completion mode based on the timing,
If a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is finished, the pending display is placed at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0. Displayed from the aspect,
When a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display at the time of the number of pending memories N, and when the number of pending memories N While a time variable display is being executed, if the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored, and during the execution of the suspended storage number N time variable display, the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, and the next variable display is started. When a new suspended memory is stored during the period immediately before the suspended memory number N time variable display ends and a new suspended memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts. and a case where a new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period while the variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed. , during the execution of the pending memory number 0 hour variable display, when the period until the pending memory number 0 hour variable display ends is shorter than a predetermined period, the pending memory number 0 hour variable display ends. When a new pending memory is stored at a time other than immediately before, and when the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period while the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours is being executed. In this case, a new pending memory is stored immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends, and a new pending memory is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends. In either case, the entered award performance can be executed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, since the prize-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not there is a change in the completion mode of the stepwise change, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294, Fig. 299 to Fig. 302, Fig. 310

[Form B13]
The gaming machine of type B13 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. The normal hold display starts in the normal start mode, changes from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and then When the variable display starts, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. In a situation where the special hold display is started in the special start mode, changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is in a special half-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, When the variable display starts, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
If the number of pending memories N time variable display ends and a new pending memory is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing and the normal pending display is displayed, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of pending memories is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When the N-time variable display of the number of pending memories ends and a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of pending memories is displayed. starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period; to display the special hold indication;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change can be completed. There is no need to change the game, and the player can see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute such changes are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290 to Figure 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "normal hold display" corresponds to the "white hold display due to the decision not to execute the hold change effect" in this embodiment,
The "special hold display" corresponds to the "blue and red hold display due to the decision to execute the hold change effect" in this embodiment,
The "normal start mode" corresponds to the "white pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment,
The "normal completion mode" corresponds to the "pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment. death,
The "normal mid-way mode" corresponds to the "holding display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the holding change effect" in this embodiment,
The "special start mode" corresponds to the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the execution of the pending change effect has been decided" in this embodiment,
"Special completion mode" in this embodiment is "a blue or red pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when execution of the pending change effect is decided. ” corresponds to
The "special midway mode" corresponds to the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" in this embodiment. .

[Form B14]
The gaming machine of type B14 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the normal start mode to the normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the normal intermediate mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal pending display is displayed with the normal completion mode changed based on the timing. ,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the special midway mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is displayed by changing to the special completion mode based on the timing. ,
When the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is stored. When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the normal start mode. By changing the mode to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displaying the normal pending display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is stored. When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the special start mode. By changing to the special completion mode based on the timing and displaying the special pending display,
Immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the special pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. Starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, to display the special hold. show display,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, with the hold memory stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the hold display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completion mode, and the player can show gradual changes. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute such changes are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B15]
The gaming machine of type B15 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is performed by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. The normal hold display starts in the normal start mode, changes from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and then When the variable display starts, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. In a situation where the special hold display is started in the special start mode, changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is in a special half-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, When the variable display starts, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes in stages, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. Starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the special hold display,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. The normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the position, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and is a normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode. When the next variable display starts depending on the situation, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
When a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. The special pending display is started in the special start mode at the position, and is changed from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode, and is a special mid-way mode different from the special before-completion mode. When the next variable display starts due to the situation, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. It is possible to show the player a gradual change without the need to change the number, and when the hold display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, the hold display that is newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed. However, since the display area used for the newly displayed hold display is wider, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute the change are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B16]
The gaming machine of type B16 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
When the suspension memory is stored, one suspension display is displayed among a plurality of types of suspension displays including a normal suspension display and a special suspension display that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal suspension display. It is possible and
When the pending memory is stored, a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the normal pending display,
When the pending memory is stored, a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode that is one mode before the special completion mode are changed stepwise. can display the special hold display,
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number is The special hold is made by starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the normal start mode to the normal middle mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the normal intermediate mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal pending display is displayed with the normal completion mode changed based on the timing. ,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, change from the special start mode to a special mid-way mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and When the next variable display starts in a situation where the special midway mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is displayed by changing to the special completion mode based on the timing. ,
When the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is stored. When displaying, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the normal start mode. By changing the mode to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displaying the normal pending display,
When the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is stored. When displaying, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and set the timing at which the next variable display starts in the special start mode. By changing to the special completion mode based on the timing and displaying the special pending display,
Immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed. The normal hold is performed by starting the hold display in the normal start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. show the display,
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed immediately after the N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the special pending display is displayed at the N-th pending display position. Starting the hold display in the special start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, to display the special hold. show the display,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed when the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. starting the normal pending display at the position in the normal start mode, changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes in stages, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period. display the corresponding normal hold display,
When the period until the variable display ends when the number of pending memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, when a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, a pending display corresponding to the next variable display is displayed. starting the special hold display at the position in the special start mode, changing the special start mode to the plurality of special middle modes in stages, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the special hold display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end of the variable display, a new pending memory is stored. When displaying a normal hold display, start the normal hold display at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display in the normal start mode, and from the normal start mode to the normal midway mode that is different from the normal pre-completion mode. When the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal completion mode is different from the normal pre-completion mode, the normal completion mode is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing, and the normal completion mode is changed to the normal completion mode. show the display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end of the variable display, a new pending memory is stored. When displaying a special hold display, start the special hold display at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display in the special start mode, and from the special start mode to the special intermediate mode that is different from the special pre-completion mode. By changing the timing to start the next variable display in a situation where the special intermediate mode is different from the special pre-completion mode, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing, and the special pending mode is changed to the special completion mode. show the display,
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. When displaying the normal hold display, start the normal hold display in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and start the next variable display in the normal start mode. When the timing is reached, the normal pending display is displayed by changing to the normal completion mode based on the timing,
A new pending memory is stored when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends. When displaying the special hold display, start the special hold display in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and start the next variable display in the special start mode. When the timing is reached, the special completion mode is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special pending display is displayed;
If a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is to be displayed immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is completed, a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the normal pending display from the normal completion mode;
If a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is to be displayed immediately after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is completed, a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display for the number of pending memories at 0 is displayed. displaying the special pending display from the special completion mode;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized, and misidentification can be prevented. Furthermore, even if a special pending display is displayed, the rules for changing the staged display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not to execute the change are the same as when the normal pending display is displayed. is applied, it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302

[Form B17]
The gaming machine of type B17 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the first mode start mode changes to a first mode midway mode that is different from the first mode completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. to display the first mode pending display,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the second mode start mode changes to a second mode midway mode that is different from the second mode pre-completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. to display the second mode pending display,
The device is in the first mode, the variable display for the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
The device is in the second mode, the variable display of the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. later changing to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the second mode pending display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. There is no need to change the game, and it is possible to show the player a gradual change. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 310
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “first mode” corresponds to the “production mode A” in this embodiment,
"Second mode" corresponds to "production mode B" in this embodiment,
"First mode pending display" corresponds to "cube pending display in production mode A" in this embodiment,
"Second mode pending display" corresponds to "octahedron pending display in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode A" in this embodiment,
The "first mode completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in production mode A" in this embodiment,
The "intermediate mode of the second mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode start mode" corresponds to the "holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode completion mode" corresponds to the "suspension display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in production mode B" in this embodiment,
The "intermediate mode of the second mode" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in the production mode B" in this embodiment.

[Form B18]
The gaming machine of form B18 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
A plurality of types of suspension display can be displayed, including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the first mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode, and the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode to the first mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started from the second mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the second mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, and the mode is in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the second mode. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode to the second mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where , the first mode pending display is displayed by changing to the first mode completion mode based on the timing,
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display, a new hold is applied. When the memory is memorized and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where , the second mode completion mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and the first mode pending display is displayed by storing a new pending memory immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the N The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the first mode pending display;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display is started, the N The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes, changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the second mode pending display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, when a new hold memory is stored at the same timing as the start of a variable display, the hold display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode. It is possible to show the player a gradual change. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 310

[Form B19]
The gaming machine of type B19 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the first mode start mode changes to a first mode midway mode that is different from the first mode completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. to display the first mode pending display,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+ The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the first number, and the second mode start mode changes to a second mode midway mode that is different from the second mode pre-completion mode. and the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, so that the mode changes to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. to display the second mode pending display,
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to later change to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, , the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode start mode is changed from the first mode start mode to the first mode midway, which is different from the first mode completion mode. The first mode is completed based on the timing when the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode,
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, , starts the second mode hold display in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and changes from the second mode start mode to the middle of the second mode which is different from the pre-second mode completion mode. The second mode is completed based on the timing when the next variable display is started in a situation where the second mode is in a state that is different from the state before the second mode is completed. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, if a new hold memory is stored during a specific period when the hold display position moves from the start of the variable display, the hold display will be displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so the gradual change will not be completed. It is possible to show the gradual change to the player without having to change the number of changes, and when the hold display that has already been displayed at the Nth position is moved, even if the hold display that is newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed. Since the display area to be used is wider for the newly displayed hold display, the newly displayed hold display is easier to visually recognize, and misidentification can be prevented. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 310

[Form B20]
The gaming machine of form B20 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance execution means,
a retention storage means;
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, N+1. The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode middle modes, the second mode hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the first mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode, and the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the first mode. displaying the first mode pending display by changing the mode to the first mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new suspended memory is created. is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started from the second mode start mode. The timing at which the next variable display is started in a situation where the second mode is changed to a mode in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, and the mode is in the middle of the second mode which is different from the mode before the completion of the second mode. displaying the second mode pending display by changing the mode to the second mode completion mode based on the timing;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. In this situation, when the next variable display is to be started, the mode is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When the second mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts, a new hold is applied. When the memory is memorized and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where , the second mode completion mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and the first mode pending display is displayed by storing a new pending memory immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display starts, the N The first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes, changing the mode completion mode over the predetermined period and displaying the first mode pending display;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed immediately after the pending storage number N time variable display ends and the next variable display is started, the N The second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the number, and after the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes, displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to change the mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
During the execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0, which is a variable display in a situation where no pending memories are stored,
When a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed when the first mode is in effect and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
When a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed when the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display of pending memory number 0 hours ends is longer than the predetermined period, , the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change to later change to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
In the first mode, when the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end, When a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode hold display is The mode is changed from the mode start mode to the first mode halfway mode which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, and the next variable display starts in the situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode. When the timing is reached, the mode is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When the second mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the time period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours is not immediately before the end, When a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. The mode is changed from the mode start mode to the second mode middle mode which is different from the second mode before completion mode, and the next variable display starts in the situation where the second mode middle mode is different from the second mode before completion mode. When the timing is reached, the mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode pending display is displayed;
When the first mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and the time period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends immediately before the end; , when a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is to be displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode. When the next variable display is started in the situation where the first mode start mode is set, the first mode pending display is displayed by changing to the first mode completion mode based on the timing,
when the second mode is in effect, the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 hours ends; , when a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is to be displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode. When the next variable display starts in the situation where the mode is in the second mode start mode, the second mode is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode pending display is displayed;
If the first mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends, the next one after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the first mode pending display from the first mode completion mode at a pending display position corresponding to the variable display of;
If the second mode is in progress and a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 ends, the next one after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is stored. displaying the second mode pending display from the second mode completion mode at a pending display position corresponding to the variable display of;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, if the number of pending memories has reached the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the pending memory will not be stored until the next variable display starts, so new pending memories will be added in stages. Changes are not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the newly stored pending memory during the specific period in which the pending display position moves from the start of the variable display to the pending display. Since the display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, there is no need to change the stepwise change to the completion mode, and the stepwise change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if a hold display that has already been displayed at a predetermined number is moved and a hold display that is newly displayed at a predetermined number overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed hold display is wider. Therefore, the newly displayed pending display can be easily recognized, and misidentification can be prevented. Further, even if the performance mode is different, the same rules regarding changes to the completion mode of the staged display are applied, so it is easier for the player to recognize the suspended memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294, Fig. 299 to Fig. 302, Fig. 310

[Form B21]
The gaming machine of form B21 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290 to Figure 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "effect control means" corresponds to the "presentation control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
"Storage means" corresponds to "RAM 102, especially game control data holding area 001SG150" in this embodiment,
"Specific identification information" corresponds to "eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs forming the special figure unit 201, especially the LEDs forming the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B" in this embodiment, and corresponds to the "effect control means". Means-side light emitting means" corresponds to "LEDs forming the first sub-holding display 151A and the second sub-holding display 151B" in this embodiment,
“The variable display storage area” corresponds to “the entry (storage area) of the reservation number “0” in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A or the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B” in this embodiment,
The "first pending storage area" corresponds to the "entries (storage area) of pending numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment,
The "starting area" corresponds to the "first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) and second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B)" in this embodiment.

[Form B22]
The gaming machine of form B22 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, in particular, in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the first pending storage area is a storage area in which information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in the shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories shows 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories shows only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B23]
The gaming machine of form B23 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of pending memories. In addition, in particular, in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the first pending storage area is a storage area in which information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in the shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories shows 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories shows only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B24]
The gaming machine of type B24 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
The performance control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, especially in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no pending storage, in the processing of the game control means, the storage area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area. After storing the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is suspended. By changing the mode in which the number of stored memories is 1 to the mode in which the number of pending memories is shown as 0, the number of pending memories is changed to a mode in which the number of pending memories only shows 1, which makes the display mode rather cumbersome and gives the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 257, Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294, Fig. 299 to Fig. 302

[Form B25]
The gaming machine of form B25 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 306, Figure 307
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Display means" corresponds to "image display device 5" in this embodiment,
The "pending pitch count display" corresponds to the "pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B26]
The gaming machine of type B26 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B27]
The gaming machine of type B27 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period. display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B28]
The gaming machine of form B28 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, the display of the number of pending pitches is changed. The aspect corresponds to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, a plurality of intermediate modes including a start mode, a completion mode, and a pre-completion mode that is one mode before the completion mode; It is possible to display a pending display by changing the
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved balls can be recognized using a plurality of means, and in particular, A stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294, Fig. 299 to Fig. 302, Fig. 306, Fig. 307

[Form B29]
The gaming machine of type B29 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If the variable display for the number N of pending storage is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored before the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, the pending display corresponding to the N-th number is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 303
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" in this embodiment is the "LED that constitutes the special symbol unit 201, especially the LED that constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B"
The "initial state" corresponds to the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment,
The "final mode" corresponds to "the mode in which the 8th LED among the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment,
"Specific display" corresponds to "active display" in this embodiment.

[Form B30]
The gaming machine of form B30 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; indicate,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the next variable display starts is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by separating the display immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the stepwise changes at the time of storing the new suspended memory. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling as if only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 303

[Form B31]
The gaming machine of type B31 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the next variable display of specific identification information starts is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold corresponding to the N+1 number is stored. The pending display is started at the display position in the starting mode, the starting mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the next specific identification is performed in a situation where the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
When a variable display of pending memory number 0 is being executed, which is a variable display of specific identification information in a situation where information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. In a situation where the hold display is started in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the start mode, the start mode is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and the pending mode is different from the pre-completion mode. Displaying the pending display while changing the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 303

[Form B32]
The gaming machine of type B32 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number, and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
The performance control means is
When variable display of specific identification information is performed, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial mode and then the final mode. start displaying the specific display until the mode is reached,
When the variable display of specific identification information is not executed, when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the start mode, the completion mode, and the mode immediately before the completion mode are stored. It is possible to display a pending display by changing in stages a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state, and
When the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, the pending display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the pending storage area is replaced by the variable display of the next specific identification information. It is possible to move from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the hold shift start timing to the hold display position corresponding to the start of variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the suspended memory number N time variable display, which is the variable display of the specific identification information, is being executed in a situation where the suspended storage area stores information regarding the variable display of N number of specific identification information that is less than the predetermined number; ,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than the predetermined period, a pending display corresponding to the N+1 number is displayed. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new specific identification When information regarding variable display of information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and changes from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. Then, when the variable display of the next specific identification information starts in a situation where the mode is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. display,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, a new When information regarding variable display of identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1 number, and the next specific identification information is displayed in the start mode. When the variable display starts, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing, and the pending display is displayed.
If the information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending storage N times is ended and the next variable display of specific identification information is started, the pending display corresponding to the Nth number of specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing the hold display to the completion mode over the predetermined period; display,
When the pending storage number 0 variable display is being executed, which is the variable display of the specific identification information in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area,
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the variable display of the pending storage number 0 is ended is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display of the next specific identification information is stored. starting the hold display in the start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the hold display position, changing the hold display stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changing to the completion mode over the predetermined period. to display the corresponding pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and when the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end, new specific identification information is When the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and from the start mode the hold display is changed to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode. By changing the display to the completion mode based on the timing when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in a situation where the display is in an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing. Display the pending display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated is shorter than the predetermined period, and immediately before the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is terminated, new specific identification information is If the information regarding the variable display is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the next variable display of specific identification information, and the next specific identification is started in the start mode. When the timing is reached to start the variable display of information, the pending display is displayed by changing to the completion mode based on the timing,
If information regarding a new variable display of specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is ended, it corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information following the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0. displaying the pending display from the completion mode at the pending display position;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the pending memory stored from the time of variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the intermediate mode at the start of variable display, it is changed to the completed mode, so that the subsequent pending display position is changed to the completed mode. It is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of reserved memories without causing any hindrance to movement. In addition, by distinguishing whether there is a change in the completion mode depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, it is possible to suitably inform the player about the number of pending memories and the number of new pending memories. It is possible to show gradual changes during memorization. Furthermore, by dividing the display into immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, it is possible to more suitably show the player the gradual changes when storing a new suspended memory. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories is 0, if the timing at which a new pending memory is stored is that there is no grace period for a predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the new pending memory is stored. By changing the stepwise change in to the completion mode, even in a state where the number of pending memories is 0, there is no problem in moving the pending display position, and misidentification of the number of pending memories can be prevented. In addition, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to notify by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. By starting to display the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 303

[Form B33]
The gaming machine of type B33 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of changing the mode of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means side light emitting means executes the variable display of the specific identification information. Before changing to the mode corresponding to the above, the game control means side light emitting means changes to the mode corresponding to the fact that the specific identification information is being variably displayed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the performance control means side light emitting means visible, variable display of specific identification information is executed using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming value.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 303
In addition, in this embodiment,
"A plurality of reserved storage areas including the first reserved storage area" corresponds to "the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.

[Form B34]
The gaming machine of type B34 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, When the storage of information regarding the variable display of the stored specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area. The manner in which it corresponds to the fact that
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is not adapted to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, but the variable display of specific identification information is displayed in the pending storage area. maintaining the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information about the information is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in a shifting process, but at that time, the light emitting means on the game control means side is moved to the variable display storage area. By changing the mode from a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 1 to a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories will show only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and distracts the player. It is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 257

[Form B35]
The gaming machine of type B35 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and then, Based on moving the storage of the stored information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information to the variable display storage area, the aspect of the light emitting means on the production control means side is changed so that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is transferred to the reserved storage area. A mode corresponding to the fact that it is not remembered,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is not set in a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area, and the specific identification information is variably displayed in the pending storage area. maintain the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the information is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information by passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area in the shifting process, but at that time, the light emitting means on the production control means side is moved. By changing the mode from a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 1 to a mode in which the number of pending memories shows 0, the number of pending memories will show only 1 for a moment, which makes the display mode more cumbersome and distracts the player. It is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 301, Figure 303

[Form B36]
The gaming machine of type B36 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
It is possible to cause the display means to display a number of pending pitches indicating the number of information related to variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
If the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area, the suspended pitch count display corresponds to the fact that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area. It is possible to display
If the first reserved storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the above aspect of the aspect corresponds to the fact that the first reserved storage area stores the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. It is possible to display the number of pending pitches,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display ends, if the first reserved storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. When this happens, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and thereafter, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is stored. When the variable display ends, moving information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. displaying the number of reserved pitches in a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then storing the information in the first reserved storage area. The suspension according to the aspect corresponding to the fact that the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the suspension storage area based on moving the storage of the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information to the variable display storage area. Executes control to display pitch count display,
Even if the game medium passes through the starting area when the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area. , the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not displayed in the mode corresponding to the storage of information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the suspension storage area. maintaining the display of the number of pending pitches in a manner corresponding to the fact that the number of pending pitches is not stored;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, especially in a situation where variable display is not executed and there is no pending storage, the first pending storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the processing of the game control means. After storing information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area in the area, the information is moved to the variable display storage area by a shifting process, but at this time, the display means displays the number of reserved pitches. By changing the display from where the number of pending balls is 1 to a display where the number of pending balls is 0, the number of pending balls will be displayed as 1 for a moment. It is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable, and as a result, it is possible to provide a stable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 318

[Form B37]
The gaming machine of type B37 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area when
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The effect control means is configured to start the effect when the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. When the game medium passes through the area, after the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, The mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the performance control means side light emitting means visible, it is possible to make the number of pending memories recognized using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B38]
The type B38 gaming machine is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a number of reserved pitches indicating the number of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, the game control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side to display the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area. It is possible to set the mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display is stored,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, the effect control means changes the mode of the display of the number of reserved pitches to the variable display of the specific identification information in the first reservation storage area. It is possible to display the information in a manner corresponding to the fact that the information is stored,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium has passed through the starting area. sometimes storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the game medium passes through the starting area. At this time, the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means is set to a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area,
The effect control means is configured to start the effect when the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. When the game medium passes through the area, after the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, The mode of displaying the number of reserved pitches is a mode corresponding to the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first pending storage area.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by first making the game control means side light emitting means visible and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, it is possible to recognize the number of reserved balls using a plurality of means. In particular, a stable gaming environment can be provided by first controlling the gaming control means that controls the gaming, such as the provision of gaming values.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B39]
The gaming machine of type B39 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The effect control means is capable of causing the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means. and starting displaying the specific display between when and when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by performing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting a specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to know that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Recognition can be performed by multiple means, among which, by starting to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display from the time when the variable display of specific identification information becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the identification information can be recognized by multiple means. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling as if only the variable display of identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 303

[Form B40]
The gaming machine of form B40 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is capable of switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means from an initial mode to a final mode when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is also capable of causing the switching to be executed multiple times. can be,
The effect control means is capable of causing the display means to display a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the game control means to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means. Starting variable display of the decoration identification information between the time when the final mode is reached and the time when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by performing variable display of the specific identification information and then performing variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to indicate multiple times that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Among them, by starting the variable display of the decorative identification information from the time when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the initial mode until the final mode, the variable display of the specific identification information can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the display is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305

[Form B41]
The gaming machine of type B41 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production control means side light emission means controlled by the production control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the mode of the production control means side light emitting means can be switched from an initial mode to a final mode, and the switching can be executed multiple times,
It is possible to cause the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the effect to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information. and starting displaying the specific display between when and when the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means on the production control means side and then displaying a specific display, it is possible to indicate multiple times that the variable display has started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Among them, by starting to display a specific display from the time when the display mode of the light emitting means on the production control means side becomes the initial mode to the final mode, the display mode on the production control means side can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling as if only the mode of the light emitting means is being changed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.

[Form B42]
The gaming machine of form B42 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production control means side light emission means controlled by the production control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The performance control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the mode of the production control means side light emitting means can be switched from an initial mode to a final mode, and the switching can be executed multiple times,
It is possible to cause the display means to display a variable display of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The effect control means changes the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the effect to the initial mode when the game medium passes through the starting area in a situation where the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information. and starting variable display of the decoration identification information between the time when the final mode is reached and the final mode is reached.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means and then performing variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display is started in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. This can be recognized by a plurality of means, among which the variable display of the decoration identification information can be started from when the display mode of the light emitting means on the side of the production control means becomes the initial mode until it becomes the final mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as though only the mode of the light emitting means on the effect control means side is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305

[Form B43]
The gaming machine of type B43 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
By switching the image corresponding to the specific display a special number of times according to the switching cycle when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area. moving an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is ended, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed the special number of times according to the switching cycle. terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area by switching a specific number of times smaller than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, variable display By impressing a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of the game, it is possible to give an impression that the game medium passes through the start area, and as a result, a suitable game environment is provided. I can do it.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270, Figure 299 to Figure 302
In addition, in this embodiment,
The “switching cycle” corresponds to the “image update cycle of 33 ms” in this embodiment,
"Special number of times" corresponds to "10 times (shift animation compatible number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of shift animation (10 frames)" in this embodiment,
The "specific number of times" corresponds to "5 times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames (5 frames) of the end animation" in this embodiment.

[Form B44]
The gaming machine of type B44 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, and information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the pending storage area, the starting area is When passing, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle, and the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is ended, the information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display area. switching the image corresponding to the specific display a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle, and terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, game media By impressing an animation by switching a predetermined number of times of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, which is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium, It is possible to give an impression of the passing of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270, Figure 290, Figure 291
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number of times" corresponds to "20 times (number of times corresponding to the appearance animation) corresponding to the number of frames (20 frames) of the appearance animation" in this embodiment.

[Form B45]
The gaming machine of type B45 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, and information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, the game medium passes through the starting area. when the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle to display the image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, and stored in the first reserved storage area. When the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being displayed is moved to the corresponding variable display area, the first suspension is performed by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a specific number of times that is less than a predetermined number of times according to the switching cycle. moving and displaying an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first holding storage area is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium, rather than the moving image for moving the image corresponding to the specific display, which is executed in response to the start of the variable display. By creating an impression of a moving image by switching the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the specific display a predetermined number of times, it is possible to impress the passing of the starting area by the gaming medium, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment is provided. can do.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 270

[Form B46]
The gaming machine of type B46 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first reserved storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area according to the switching cycle N (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
When the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the corresponding variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed a number of times less than N times according to the switching cycle. moving and displaying an image corresponding to the specific display from a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area by switching;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image whose period is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area has many opportunities to be viewed by the player, the switching period is By increasing the number of switching according to the above, it is possible to create a smooth moving image, and the moving image that moves the image corresponding to the specific display that is executed in response to the start of the variable display has an opportunity for the player to view it visually. Therefore, by reducing the number of times of switching according to the switching cycle, it is possible to convey the feeling of movement while giving a sense of speed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B47]
The gaming machine of type B47 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first reserved storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area according to the switching cycle N (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
An image corresponding to the specific display when the game medium passes through the starting area when the variable display of the specific identification information is not executed and the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information. displaying an image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image a number of times less than N times according to the switching period;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image whose period is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area has many opportunities to be visually recognized by technicians, the switching period is A smooth moving image can be obtained by increasing the number of times of switching according to the above, and a specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area, which is executed in response to passage of the starting area by the game medium. Since there are few opportunities for players to view moving images by switching images corresponding to the above, by reducing the number of times of switching according to the switching cycle, a specific display can be newly displayed while creating a sense of speed. As a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B48]
The game machine of type B48 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
When information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, variable display of specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if the first reservation storage area stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the next variable display of the specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means is
When the first reserved storage area stores information regarding variable display of specific identification information, the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area according to the switching cycle N (N≧30) switching and displaying the number of times as one cycle,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific identification displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area is changed by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a number of times less than N times according to the switching cycle. Terminate the display of the image corresponding to the display,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a moving image whose period is equal to N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first holding storage area has many opportunities to be viewed by the player, the switching period is By increasing the number of switching according to the above, it is possible to create a smooth video image, and it corresponds to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display area that is executed in response to the end of the variable display. Since there are few opportunities for players to visually check moving images caused by image switching, by reducing the number of changes according to the switching cycle, it is possible to create a sense of speed while conveying that the game has finished, and as a result, A suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B49]
The game machine of type B49 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
comprising a storage means;
The effect control means is capable of controlling the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display storage area stores information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, and the first reservation storage area does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the gaming medium passes through the starting area. storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information in the first reserved storage area when
The performance control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area after a predetermined period of time after the game medium passes through the starting area. By displaying the display in a manner with low transmittance and moving the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reservation storage area to the variable display storage area, the first reservation storage area moving said specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to said variable display storage area to a display position corresponding to said variable display storage area;
If information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, after the predetermined period has elapsed after the game medium passes through the start area, the game medium is moved to a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. Starting the display of the specific display in a mode with high transmittance, and then displaying the specific display by executing an appearance animation that changes from a mode with high transmittance to a mode with low transmittance.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the display mode of the specific display has a low transmittance and is easy to recognize in order to quickly notify that the game medium has passed through the starting area. Therefore, in situations where there is no retained memory but a variable display is executed, we also pay attention to the variable display, so that it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that a specific display has been displayed due to sudden display. Therefore, by gradually displaying the game media, it is possible to convey the passage of the game medium through the starting area using the appearance animation, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 272, Figure 273, Figure 276, Figure 277, Figure 283

[Form B50]
The game machine of type B50 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the demonstration display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while displaying the demonstration display, the display of the demonstration display is ended, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the demonstration display is released, the specific display is once displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area, and then moved to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to easily convey that the game medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Demonstration display" corresponds to "demonstration display effect" in this embodiment.

[Form B51]
The gaming machine of type B51 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
Storage means; The production control means includes:
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to the switching cycle,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
It is possible to display a guide display regarding production settings,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. a plurality of pending storage areas including; and a plurality of storage areas including;
The game control means is
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reservation storage area, and then the moving information regarding variable display of specific identification information stored in a first reserved storage area to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the guide display when the storage means does not store information regarding variable display of specific identification information,
If a game medium passes through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, the display of the guidance display is ended and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area. , starting a movement animation for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area from the next switching cycle after displaying the specific display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the guidance display is released, the specific display is once displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reservation storage area, and then moved to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area. Therefore, during the guidance display, it is possible to easily convey that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and as a result, a suitable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 308, Figure 309
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "guidance display" corresponds to the "menu guide display" in this embodiment.

[Form B52]
The gaming machine of type B52 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information after the variable display storage area and the variable display storage area. a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area, and a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the holding storage area when the game medium passes through the start area while executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and stores the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the memory. transmitting a corresponding specific command to the production control means, and then executing a process of updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side;
The effect control means executes a process of updating the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the performance control means, and then performs processing to update the mode of the game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means itself. Even when the aspect of the side light emitting means is sequentially changed, it is possible to prevent the period from being too empty, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294
Note that in this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending storage number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B53]
The gaming machine of type B53 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information after the variable display storage area and the variable display storage area. a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area, and a plurality of storage areas including a first storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the aspect of the game control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the fact that information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reservation storage area,
The game control means is
When the game medium passes through the starting area while executing the variable display of the specific identification information, information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the holding storage area, and then the specific identification information corresponding to the passage is stored. Based on the start of the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage, the information about the variable display of the specific identification information is moved to the variable display storage area, and a specific command corresponding to the movement is transmitted to the effect control means. , execute a process of updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side,
The effect control means executes a process of updating the aspect of the effect control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the performance control means, and then performs processing to update the mode of the game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means itself, thereby increasing the number of pending memories. Even when the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is sequentially changed in response to a decrease in , it is possible to prevent the period from being too empty, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294
Note that in this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending storage number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B54]
The game machine of type B54 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means,
main status indicator light,
storage means,
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means includes a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means is
It is possible to store information regarding variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
A variable display storage area as an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information, and a first reservation storage area which is an area for storing information regarding variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area. There are multiple pending storage areas containing , and multiple storage areas containing .
The game control means is
When executing variable display of specific identification information, updating the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side,
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the storage means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information based on the passage. Thereafter, a variable display period setting process is performed to set a variable display period for variable display of the specific identification information based on the passing, and then the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated, and then, the variable display period setting process is performed. Start a subtraction process that subtracts the variable display period of specific identification information set in the process;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means on the game control means side is first set to a mode that indicates execution of the variable display, and then the variable display period is subtracted, thereby indicating to the player that the variable display is being performed. The variable display period can be subtracted, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294

(Correspondence between the present invention and this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the "jackpot gaming state" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention, the "CPU 103" corresponds to the "gaming control means" of the present invention, and the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention. The "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "retention storage means" of the present invention, and the "first special symbol reservation storage number and 2. The number of reserved special figures stored is 4" corresponds to the "predetermined number" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "start mode" of the present invention. Accordingly, the "holding display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" corresponds to the "completion mode" of the present invention, and "the 19th frame from the 2nd frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "completion mode" of the present invention. "Holding display displayed as an eye image" corresponds to the "midway aspect" of the present invention, "shift animation" corresponds to the "holding shift" of the present invention, and "330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation" This corresponds to the "specific period" of the present invention, and "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "predetermined period" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "the timing of less than 33 ms until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0" corresponds to "immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0" of the present invention, and "timing when the number of pending memories is 0" The timing "less than 33 ms after the end of the variable display" corresponds to "immediately after the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0" in the present invention.

Furthermore, the "flash effect at the time of winning" corresponds to the "winning effect" of the present invention.

In addition, the "white pending display due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "normal pending display" of the present invention, and the "blue and red pending display due to the decision to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "normal pending display" of the present invention. "Display" corresponds to the "special pending display" of the present invention, and "a white pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special pending display" of the present invention. "Normal start mode" and "holding display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the holding change effect" is the "holding display" of the present invention. "Normal completion mode", and "pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" is included in the "normal completion mode" of the present invention. Accordingly, the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation due to the decision to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special start mode" of the present invention, and the "pending change effect" The blue or red pending display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when execution of the effect has been decided corresponds to the ``special completion mode'' of the present invention, The "blue or red pending display that is displayed as an image from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the pending change effect" corresponds to the "special midway mode" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "Production mode A" corresponds to the "first mode" of the present invention, "Production mode B" corresponds to the "second mode" of the present invention, and "Suspended display of cube in production mode A" This corresponds to the "first mode pending display" of the present invention, and the "regular octahedron pending display in production mode B" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention, and "one of the appearance animations in production mode A" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention. ``Hold display displayed as the image of frame 1'' corresponds to the ``first mode start mode'' of the present invention, and ``displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation in production mode A. The "hold display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention, and the "hold display displayed as images from the 2nd frame to the 19th frame of the appearance animation in production mode B" corresponds to the "1st mode completion mode" of the present invention. 2 mode midway mode'', and the ``holding display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in production mode B'' corresponds to the ``second mode start mode'' of the present invention, and the ``appearance in production mode B The "holding display that is displayed as the 20th frame image of the animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" corresponds to the "2nd mode completion mode" of the present invention, The "holding display displayed as the 19th frame image" corresponds to the "second mode intermediate aspect" of the present invention.

In addition, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance control means" of the present invention, the "RAM 102, especially the game control data holding area 001SG150" corresponds to the "storage means" of the present invention, and the "first special symbol The eight LEDs that make up the display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention. The LEDs constituting the second sub-pending display 25B correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and the "LEDs constituting the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display 151B" correspond to the "light emitting means on the game control means side" of the present invention. It corresponds to the "light emitting means on the production control means side", and "the entry (storage area) of the reservation number "0" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" is the "variable display memory concerned" of the present invention. "area", and "entries (storage areas) of reservation numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "first reservation storage area" of the present invention. , "the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) and the second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B)" corresponds to the "starting area" of the present invention.

Further, the "image display device 5" corresponds to the "display means" of the present invention, and the "holding display displayed in the holding storage display area 5U" corresponds to the "holding pitch count display" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "the LEDs constituting the special symbol unit 201, especially the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and " The mode in which the first LED of the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "initial mode" of the present invention, and the "first special symbol display device 4A and the mode in which the 8th LED among the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "final mode" of the present invention, and "active display" falls under the "specific display" of the present invention. Applicable.

In addition, "the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to "a plurality of reserved storage areas including the first reserved storage area" of the present invention.

In addition, "image update period of 33 ms" corresponds to the "switching period" of the present invention, and "10 times (shift animation compatible number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of shift animation (10 frames)" corresponds to the "special number of times" of the present invention. ", and "5 times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames of the end animation (5 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention, and "the number of frames of the appearance animation (20 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention. The corresponding 20 times (the number of times corresponding to the appearance animation)" corresponds to the "predetermined number of times" of the present invention.

In addition, "demonstration display effect" corresponds to the "demonstration display" of the present invention, "menu guide display" corresponds to the "guidance display" of the present invention, and "pending memory number notification command" corresponds to the "specific command" of the present invention. ”.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 219 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

A special figure unit 201 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the lower left of the game area). As shown in FIG. 236(A), the special symbol unit 201 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, and a normal symbol display. It is composed of a normal drawing holding indicator 25C, a round number indicator 26, a hit indicator light 27, a right hit indicator light 28, and a status indicator light 29.

(Special symbol display device)
The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of eight LEDs, and the second special symbol display device 4B is also composed of eight LEDs. Each of the eight LEDs is called specific identification information (special symbol). Further, a group of eight LEDs is called multiple types of specific identification information (multiple types of special symbols). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are capable of changing multiple types of special symbols when a winning occurs in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole (starting conditions are met). A device that displays a “big hit” or “miss” when a combination of special symbols (a combination of eight LED lights on and off) becomes a predetermined combination in the pachinko game machine 1. It is.

(Variable display of special designs)
The "variable display" of special symbols indicates the period until a combination of special symbols appears by turning on and off the eight LEDs according to a predetermined rule. Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". The number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

(Hold indicator)
The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B each include two LEDs. The first reservation display 25A displays the number of first special symbols reserved according to the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode, and the second reservation display 25B displays the number of second special symbols reserved according to the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode. Display the number of memories. For example, the first reservation display 25A and the second reservation display 25B indicate that the number of special symbols reserved is one by lighting only the first LED, and By lighting up the LED, it is shown that the number of special pictures reserved is 2, and while the first LED is blinking, by lighting the second LED, the number of special pictures reserved is 3. By flashing both the first LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols pending is 4.

(Normal symbol display)
Further, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of four LEDs, and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

The standard game reservation indicator 25C is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the number of standard game games pending, which is the number of standard game games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting mode. For example, the ordinary figure reservation display 25C indicates that the number of ordinary figures held is 1 by lighting only the first LED, and by lighting the first and second LEDs. It shows that the number of stored figures is 2, and by flashing the first LED and lighting the second LED, it shows that the number of stored figures is 3, and the first By flashing both the LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of stored general drawings is 4.

(Round number display)
The round number display 26 is composed of five LEDs, and indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, which will be described later, by a combination of turning on and off these LEDs. The hit indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are each one LED. The hit indicator light 27 is an LED that lights up during a period of a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later.The right-hand hitting indicator light 28 is an LED that lights up during a period of a time saving state, a probability change state, and a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. is an LED that lights up during the time saving state and variable probability state, which will be described later.

(Image display device)
As shown in FIG. 219, an image display device 5 is provided near the center of the gaming area on the gaming board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, decorative patterns are displayed variably (for example, vertically direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (suspended memory display area 5U, active A display area 5F) is provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, although the common pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol representing the variable display where execution of the first special symbol is pending is provided. A first special symbol pending memory display area in which a pending display is displayed, and a second special symbol pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. They may be provided separately. In addition, in this embodiment, the hold storage display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. In some cases, it is a display area that displays a pending display according to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and an active display according to the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. This is a display area that displays an active display.

(Winning ball device)
A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started. In addition, the winning ball device 6A in this embodiment is arranged so that among the game balls hit by the player, the game balls flowing down the left side area (left gaming area) of the image display device 5 can win. There is.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 220). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 219, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A normal prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the normal winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 220), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is turned into a big winning hole. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the normal winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole including the normal winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 in this embodiment are configured such that among the game balls shot out by the player, the game balls flowing down the right side area (right game area) of the image display device 5 are While it is possible to win a prize, the game balls flowing down the area on the left side of the image display device 5 (left gaming area) are arranged so that it is impossible or difficult to win a prize.

(passing gate)
A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

(Out port)
In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

(Other performance devices)
At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 219), and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 220). Further, various lamps will be described later.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 220).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 220).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (symbol per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol hit symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is maintained until the earlier of the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Continued. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure variable display time (period for changing the special figure) than in the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot. Although details will be described later, the probability variable state of this embodiment is a game state in which the average special figure variable display time is shorter than the time saving state.

That is, in the normal state in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly by the player launching a game ball toward the left side game area (left game area) of the image display device 5. The time-saving state and the probability-changing state in this embodiment are the gaming states in which the player mainly launches the game ball toward the right gaming area (right gaming area) of the image display device 5, and the second This is a gaming state in which a variable display of special symbols is executed. In addition, in the jackpot game state in this embodiment, the player mainly hits the game ball toward the right side game area (right game area) of the image display device 5, so that the game ball enters the big prize opening. This is a gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be paid out.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

In addition, in the normal state in this embodiment, the game ball can enter the first starting winning hole by the player launching the gaming ball mainly toward the left gaming area, while the gaming ball can enter the second starting winning hole. The player is in a gaming state where winning is difficult or impossible. In addition, in the time saving state and variable probability state in this embodiment, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole by the player mainly launching the game ball towards the right gaming area, while the game ball can enter the second starting prize opening. 1. It is difficult to win a prize in the starting winning opening, or the game state is such that winning is not possible.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a serial communication circuit 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, a gate switch 21, a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a normal winning port switch 24, a magnet sensor (not shown) for detecting errors, a radio wave sensor, The input port 105a receives various signals from the proximity sensor and the frame proximity sensor through the switch circuit 110, and controls (drives) the solenoids 81, 82 and the display devices and indicator lights that make up the special figure unit 201. ), and an output port 105b through which a signal is output (transmitted) via the output circuit 111.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning port switch 24 (when the game ball passes or enters and the switch is turned on). (a detection signal indicating that the detection signal, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the input port 105a. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

In addition, the gate switch 21 in this embodiment is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and the first starting port switch 22A is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the first starting prize port. The second starting opening switch 22B is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening, and the counting switch 23 is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the big winning opening. The normal winning hole switch 24 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal winning hole 10.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the output circuit 111 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door.

The serial communication circuit 106 has a data format using a full-duplex method, an asynchronous method, and standard NRZ (non-return zero) encoding, and communicates with the CPU ( If it is the effect control board 12, it performs serial communication with the effect control CPU 120). The serial communication circuit 106 includes a transmitter that transmits various data (for example, payout signal (prize ball number command) and performance control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and a transmitter that transmits various data (for example, , prize ball ACK command).

Further, on the main board 11 in this embodiment, an external RAM 107 is also provided for temporarily storing data to be processed by the game control microcomputer 100. Furthermore, although not particularly shown, the main board 11 includes a setting key switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value setting state in which the setting value can be set, and a jackpot winning probability (described later) in the setting value setting state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a touch switch to change set values such as ball rate), a door/frame opening switch to detect opening of the gaming machine frame 3, and displaying the base value of this pachinko gaming machine, etc. A possible display monitor is also connected. Note that the setting key switch, setting changeover switch, and display monitor are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that they cannot be operated by the player.

A payout control board (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. The payout control board includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the reception of the payout signal. and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device pass, and the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor is connected to the game ball detection sensor. It is possible to stop driving the dispensing device depending on the situation.

Further, a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball batting operation handle 30 are connected to the payout control board. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls a firing device capable of firing game balls onto the game board 2. Further, a signal indicating whether the touch ring is detected or not and a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired by the firing device are input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed. Further, a vibration motor 36 is provided inside the push button 31B. The vibration motor 36 is connected to the production control board 12, and can be driven by receiving a drive signal from the production control CPU 120. That is, the push button 31B of this embodiment may vibrate due to the drive of the vibration motor 36.

Further, an effect display unit 202 is provided at the lower right position of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 236(C), the performance display unit 202 includes a first performance indicator light 152A, a second performance indicator light 152B, a first sub-hold indicator 151A, a second sub-hold indicator 151B, and a right-hand display. It is composed of a lamp 153.

The first performance indicator light 152A is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the second performance indicator light 152B is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. This is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of is being executed. Each of these consists of one LED.

The first sub-holding display 151A is a display for specifying the first special figure holding memory number, and the second sub-holding display 151B is a display for specifying the second special figure holding memory number. This is an indicator for Each of these is composed of two LEDs, and the number of stored first special symbols and the number of second reserved special symbols can be displayed depending on the number of LEDs lit and the manner in which they are lit. For example, the first sub-reservation display 151A and the second sub-reservation display 151B indicate that the number of special figure reservations stored is one by lighting only the first LED, and the first and second sub-reservation indicators By lighting up the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols reserved is 2, and while the first LED is blinking, by lighting the second LED, the number of special symbols reserved is 3. By flashing both the first LED and the second LED, it is shown that the number of special symbols pending is 4.

In addition, the right-handed lamp 153 is one LED that lights up during the time saving state, the probability changing state, and the jackpot game state.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, so these are not stored in the VRAM area. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area is arranged. Each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area. The higher the image, the lower the display priority is set in the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 223, the VRAM area includes an active display in the active display area 5F, and a first pending display that moves from the pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F as a shift animation. Active display image drawing area for drawing and arranging, the first pending display according to the gaming state in the pending memory display area 5U, and the display position of the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U as a shift animation. A second hold display that moves towards the first hold display, a first hold display image drawing area for drawing and arranging, a second hold display according to the gaming state in the hold memory display area 5U, and a shift animation. A second pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a third pending display that moves toward the display position of the second pending display in the pending storage display area 5U, and a game in the pending storage display area 5U. For drawing and arranging the third pending display according to the state and the fourth pending display that moves toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U as a shift animation. A third pending display image drawing area and a fourth pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a fourth pending display according to the game state in the pending storage display area 5U are arranged, respectively.

In this embodiment, in addition to each image drawn and arranged in the active display image drawing area and the first to fourth pending display image drawing areas, a background image is used to draw and arrange a background image. It is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by superimposing images drawn and arranged in the drawing area and the decorative pattern image drawing area for drawing and arranging the decorative pattern image. There is. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 223, in the active display image drawing area, the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, the display priority of the image drawn in the active display image drawing area is the highest. The image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area. The displayed image is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the first held display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the third held display image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second held display image drawing area. The display priority is set lower than the image drawn in the fourth pending display image drawing area, and the display priority is set lower than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area. There is.

In other words, among the images related to the pending display and active display, the image displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display is the image displayed at the lowest layer, and the image displayed at the display position of the third pending display The image and the image of the fourth pending display that moves toward the display position of the third pending display are displayed in a higher layer than the image displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display (priority display The image displayed at the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display are An image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed with priority) than the image displayed at the display position of the hold display and the image of the fourth hold display that moves toward the display position of the third hold display, The image displayed at the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display are displayed at the display position of the second hold display. This is an image that is displayed (displayed with priority) in a higher layer than the image of the third pending display that moves toward the display position of the second pending display, and the display position of the active display (displayed with priority). The image displayed in the display area 5F) and the image of the first pending display moving toward the display position of the active display are the images displayed in the display position of the first pending display and the image of the first pending display This image is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the second pending display image that moves toward the display position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 224(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 224(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 224(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start designation that specifies the start of variable display in a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start designation that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 224(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (low probability high base state, time saving state), and a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state). The third gaming state designation command corresponds to the base state and variable probability state. Note that the high probability/high base state may simply be referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first special figure pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second special figure pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The 1st special figure pending memory number notification command is based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the 1st starting winning opening and the 1st starting condition is satisfied, and the 1st starting opening winning designation command is sent. Sometimes, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second special figure pending storage number notification command is based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is met, and the second starting opening winning designation command is sent. Sometimes, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first special figure pending memory number notification command and the second special figure pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases). It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution of the special figure game.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH determines whether or not it is a reach in the variable display that results in a win (whether or not a reach effect is executed) and which type of reach is executed (normal reach or not). This is a missed effect pattern command that indicates the determination result of whether to execute the reach effect or the super reach effect.

Instead of the first special figure pending memory number notification command and the second special figure pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 224(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 225, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the loss effect, and a random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR4, the random numerical value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numerical value MR6 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random numerical value MR7 for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random numerical value MR1 and random numerical value MR6 can be counted. controlled by. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR7. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 001SG154, which will be described later, to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR7. It is also possible to count numerical data indicating a part of the data.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number MR3 for determining a losing performance is a random number used to determine in advance whether or not the variable display becomes a reach in a variable display where the variable display loses, and for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100". Take. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine in advance whether the variable display is normal reach or super reach when the variable display is off, and the type of super reach to be executed. This is a random number value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR6 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR7 for determining the initial value is a random value used to determine the initial value of the random value MR1 and the random value MR7 described above, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "65536".

FIG. 225 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result determination table, 22 shows that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, the probability (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment) that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to control the special figure display result to be a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot gaming state when it is in the time saving state (low probability state). In comparison, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and controlling it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 227(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Moreover, FIG. 227(B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. The contents are the same as those in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 228 shows an example of the configuration of a losing performance determination table stored in the ROM 101. The losing effect determination table in this embodiment determines whether the missing effect should be non-reach or reach based on the random value MR3 for judging the missing effect when it is determined that the special figure display result is to be ``miss''. In other words, this is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect in variable display. For example, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 85, the losing effect is determined to be non-reach (do not execute the reach effect), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 86 to 100. , the losing effect is determined to be a reach effect (execution of a reach effect).

FIGS. 229(A) to 229(C) show configuration examples of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern type determination table determines the reach (variation pattern type) to be executed when the unsuccessful performance is determined to be a reach (reach performance is executed) in the failure performance determination table.Normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach This is a table for determining which of γ. In this embodiment, the variable pattern type determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 229(A) to 229(C), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation pattern type determination table A and the value of the random number MR4 When the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table B and the value of the random number MR4, and the game When the state is a variable probability state (high probability/high base state), the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination table C and the value of the random number MR4. In addition, determining the variation pattern type as normal reach means deciding to execute the reach effect of normal reach during variable display and making it a miss, and determining the variation pattern type as super reach α means determining that the variation pattern type is super reach α. Deciding to execute the reach effect of super reach α during the display and make it a miss, and determining the variation pattern type as super reach β means executing the reach effect of super reach β during the variable display. Deciding that the variation pattern type is super reach γ is to determine that the super reach γ reach effect will be performed during variable display and that the result will be a loss.

For example, as shown in FIG. 229(A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is set to normal reach. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 95, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach α, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 96 to 100, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach α. is determined as super reach β. In addition, as shown in FIG. 229(B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is set to normal reach. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 100, the variation pattern type is determined to be super reach γ. In addition, as shown in FIG. 229(C), when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern type is set to normal reach. decided on.

FIGS. 230(A) to 230(C) show variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), respectively. Among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display result is "jackpot" corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the cases where . In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), as shown in FIG. (PA1-1), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 5750ms and non-reach is out (PA1-2), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 3750ms and non-reach is out (PA1-3) ), a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach is off (PA2-1A), a special figure variable display time is 25,000 ms, and a pseudo pattern that includes a temporary stop of decorative symbols and a re-variable display during the variable display. Variation pattern (PA2-1B) in which the normal reach is off after the continuous effect is executed once, the special figure variable display time is 60000ms, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once and then the normal reach is reached α A variation pattern that results in a deviation (PA2-2A), a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 65000 ms and a super reach α is deviated via a normal reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice (PA2-2B) , the special figure variable display time is 70,000ms, and the variation pattern (PA2-3A) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and then the super reach β is off via the normal reach, and the special figure variable display time is 75,000ms. , a variation pattern (PA2-3B) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and the super reach β is off after the normal reach, a variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 20000ms and a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1A), A variable pattern (PB1-1B) in which the special figure variable display time is 25,000 ms and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once and then a normal reach jackpot, and the special figure variable display time is 60,000 ms and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. Variation pattern (PB1-2A) that results in a super reach α jackpot via normal reach after being executed, with a special figure variable display time of 65000ms, and a super hit via normal reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. A variable pattern that results in a reach α jackpot (PB1-2B), a variable pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 70000ms and a super reach β jackpot via a normal reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice (PB1- 3A), the special figure variable display time is 75000 ms, and a variation pattern (PB1-3B) is provided in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and then goes through the normal reach and becomes the super reach β jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 4), Variation pattern where the special figure variable display time is 2000ms and the non-reach is off (PA1-5), Variation pattern where the special figure variable display time is 10000ms and the normal reach is off (PA2-4A), Special figure The variable display time is 10,000 ms, and the variation pattern (PA2-4B) in which the normal reach is off after the pseudo continuous effect is executed once, and the special figure variable display time is 30,000 ms, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. A variation pattern (PA2-5A) in which Super Reach γ is off after passing through Normal Reach, and the special figure variable display time is 35000ms, and after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, Super Reach γ is reached via Normal Reach. A variation pattern that results in a miss (PA2-5B), a variation pattern that results in a normal reach jackpot with a special figure variable display time of 10000ms (PB1-4A), a special figure variable display time of 15000ms, and a pseudo continuous effect once. A variation pattern (PB1-4B) that becomes a normal reach jackpot after being executed, a variation pattern that has a special figure variable display time of 30000 ms, and a pseudo continuous effect that becomes a super reach γ jackpot after being executed once. (PB1-5A), the special figure variable display time is 35000ms, and a variable pattern (PB1-5B) is provided in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and then goes through the normal reach and becomes the super reach γ jackpot. .

Furthermore, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 230(C), a variation pattern (PA1- 6), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 500ms and the non-reach is out of reach (PA1-7), Variation pattern in which the special figure variable display time is 5000ms and the normal reach is out of reach (PA2-6), Special figure There is a variable display time of 5000 ms and a variation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a normal reach jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the jackpot expectation level is set high, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the special figure variable The longer the display time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal state, the expected degree of jackpot at which the strange display result is a "jackpot" is set higher for super reach β than for super reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined using, in addition to the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number MR3 for determining a losing performance, and the random number MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined using two or less random numbers including the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination, or the variation pattern may be determined using two or less random numbers including random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The determination may be made using four or less random numbers including the random number MR5.

FIGS. 231 to 234 are explanatory diagrams of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, the loss effect, the type of variation pattern, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 231(A) to 231(F), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the losing effect is non-reach and the variable display is If the number of reserved memories (the number of similar kind of reserved memories) of the special symbol to be executed is less than 1, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table A for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the winning effect is non-reach. In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 2, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table B for loss and the random value MR5, and the loss effect is non-reach and variable display. If the number of reserved special symbols to be executed is 3, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss and the random value MR5, and the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach. If so, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table D for a loss and the value of the random number MR5, and if the loss effect is reach and the variation pattern type is super reach α, the fluctuation pattern for loss is determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the table E and the value of the random number MR5, and if the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach β, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table F for loss and the value of the random number MR5. to determine the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 232(A) to 232(D), when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the loss effect is non-reach and variable display is executed. If the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved memories of the same type) of the special symbol to be played is 1 or less, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table G for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the losing effect is non-reach and If the number of reserved memories of special symbols to perform variable display is two or more, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table H for loss and the value of the random number MR5, and the loss effect is reach and the fluctuation pattern type. When is normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table I for loss and the value of random value MR5, and when the loss effect is reach and the variation pattern type is super reach γ, the fluctuation pattern for loss is determined. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination table J and the value of the random number MR5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 233(A) to 233(C), when the gaming state is in a probability change state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the loss effect is non-reach and variable display is executed. If the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved memories of the same type) of the special symbol to be played is 1 or less, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table K for losing and the value of the random number MR5, and the winning effect is non-reach and If the number of reserved memories (the number of similar kinds of reserved memories) of the special symbol that executes variable display is two or more, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table L for a loss and the value of the random number MR5, and a loss effect is performed. When is a reach and the variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table M for losing and the value of the random number MR5.

As shown in FIGS. 234(A) to 234(C), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot and the The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the numerical value MR5, and when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for jackpot and the value of the random number MR5 are used. When the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table C and the random value MR5. decide.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 231(A) to 231(F), when the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure is selected, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the variation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-1) is selected and the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-2) is selected and the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). 3) and select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern for the failure of the normal reach (PA2-1A). , if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1B), and if the fluctuation pattern determination table E for loss is selected, the random number MR5 If the value is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-2A) that is outside of super reach α, and if the value of random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach. If the fluctuation pattern for α is determined (PA2-2B) and the fluctuation pattern determination table F for failure is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern for super reach β The variation pattern (PA2-3A) is determined, and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PA2-3B) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 232(A) to 232(D), when the fluctuation pattern determination table G for failure is selected, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the variation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-4) is selected and the variation pattern determination table H for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-5) is selected and the variation pattern determination table I for miss is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 920, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-4A). ), and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 921 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern for normal reach (PA2-4B), and if the fluctuation pattern determination table J for loss is selected, If the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 950, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PA2-5A) of super reach γ, and if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 951 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined The pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-5B) in which the super reach γ is off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 233(A) to 233(C), when the fluctuation pattern determination table K for failure is selected, if the value of the random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is rejected. If the fluctuation pattern for out-of-reach (PA1-6) is selected and the fluctuation pattern determination table L for out-of-reach is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the out-of-reach variation. If the pattern (PA1-7) is selected and the variation pattern determination table M for miss is selected, if the random value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-6). ) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(A), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -1A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 80, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1B), and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 81 to 170. If the value is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2A), and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2A). -2B), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 321 to 600, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3A), and the value of random number MR3 is 601 to 997. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(B), when jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 90, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -4A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 91 to 280, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4B), and the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 281 to 580. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A), and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 581 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A). -5B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(C), when jackpot variation pattern determination table C is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 997, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -6).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a ratio of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the determination ratio of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns may be made different depending on the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 235, in the normal state in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variable display per time is This is a gaming state in which the (jackpot probability) is lower than the probability variable state, and it is also the gaming state where the average special symbol variable display time is the longest among the normal state, time saving state, and probability variable state. In addition, in the time saving state in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (jackpot probability) is variable based on the variable display per time. This is a gaming state in which the average special symbol variable display time among the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state is shorter than the normal state and longer than the variable probability state. In the probability variable state in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion (jackpot probability) of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display per time is the normal state. It is a gaming state that is higher than the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variable state, and is the gaming state in which the average special figure variable display time is the shortest among the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

Here, variable display of special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 236(B), the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided with eight LEDs as described above, and these LEDs constitute a special symbol. There is. In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs to be lit are switched one by one every time 40 ms elapse, and when 40 ms has elapsed from the start of lighting of the 8th LED, The first LED starts lighting up again. In other words, in this embodiment, one cycle is the process in which the LED to be lit changes in order from the first, second, third...eighth, and the periodic lighting of these LEDs is repeated. By executing this, a variable display of special symbols is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 236(D), each of the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is provided with one LED, and these LEDs constitute a sub-symbol. In the first effect indicator light 152A and the second effect indicator lamp 152B, the LEDs are switched on and off every 60 ms. In other words, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, one cycle consists of turning on the LED for 240 ms and turning off the LED for 240 ms, and by repeating the periodic lighting of these LEDs, the sub-symbols are displayed. A variable display of is executed.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 220 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 001SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 001SG150 shown in FIG. 237 includes a first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 001SG151C, a game control flag setting section 001SG152, and a game control timer setting section. 001SG153, a game control counter setting section 001SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 001SG155.

The first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is a special symbol game in which a game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred but has not yet been started. (Special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A) pending data is stored in the winning order.

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is a special symbol in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred but has not been started yet. Pending data of the game (special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B) is stored in order of winnings.

As an example, the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning hole with the pending number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes (enters). Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for loss performance determination, random number MR4 for fluctuation pattern type determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the random number MR1. , the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the pending number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). A random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, a random number MR3 for determining the losing performance, a random number MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the numerical data of the pending number 0 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is data according to the variable display of the special symbol in progress, and the numerical data of the pending numbers 1 to 4 are still This is data (pending data) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols that have not been executed.

In this way, the pending data stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is such that execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The normal figure reservation storage unit 001SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 001SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the numerical data of the pending number 0 in the ordinary pattern pending storage unit 001SG151C is data corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed, and the numerical data of the pending numbers 1 to 4 are the data of the normal symbol that has not been executed yet. This is data (pending data) that corresponds to the variable display.

The game control flag setting section 001SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 001SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 001SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 001SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 001SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 in this embodiment includes a special figure display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A for temporarily storing the numerical value of the random value MR1, and a random number buffer 001SG155A for temporarily storing the numerical value of the random value MR2. Random number buffer 001SG155B for determining jackpot type, Random number buffer 001SG155C for determining loss effect for temporarily storing the value of random number MR3, Random number for determining fluctuation pattern type for temporarily storing the value of random value MR4 A buffer 001SG155D and a random number buffer 001SG155E for determining a variation pattern for temporarily storing the random number MR5 are provided.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 220 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

FIG. 238 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for the input port 105a. As shown in FIG. 238, at input port 0, bit 1 receives a signal from the count switch 23, bit 2 receives a signal from an outlet switch (not shown), bit 3 receives a signal from a specific area switch, and bit 6 receives a signal from the normal winning port switch 24. is input. In input port 1, bit 2 receives an out confirmation switch signal 1, bit 3 receives an out confirmation switch signal 2, bit 5 receives a magnet sensor signal, and bit 7 receives a frame radio wave sensor signal. In addition, at input port 2, bit 2 is input with a board proximity sensor error signal, bit 3 is input with a frame proximity sensor error signal, bit 4 is input with a setting key switch, bit 5 is a touch switch, and bit 6 is with a door. - The signal from the clear switch is input to the frame open switch, bit 7. Further, in the input port 3, a signal from the first starting port switch 22A is inputted to bit 1, a signal from the second starting port switch 22B is inputted to bit 2, and a signal from the gate switch 21 is inputted to bit 3. Further, a power supply confirmation signal is input to bit 6, and a prize ball control signal RX0 is input to bit 7.

FIG. 239 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for the output port 105b. As shown in FIG. 239, signals are output from bits 1 to 8 at the output port DG1 to each LED constituting the first special symbol. At the output port DG2, signals are output from bits 1 to 8 to each LED constituting the second special symbol.

In addition, at the output port DG3, from bit 1, the starting opening winning memory number indicator light 2 (the second LED of the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A) in the first special symbol, and from bit 2, the second In the special symbol, the starting gate winning memory number indicator light 2 (the second LED of the LEDs forming the second reservation indicator 25B), and from the bit 3, the gate passage memory number indicator light 2 (constituting the normal symbol display 20). (2nd LED among the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A), bit 4 to start opening winning memory number indicator light 1 in the first special symbol (1st LED among the LEDs constituting the first reservation indicator 25A), bit 5 From bit 6, the starting gate winning memory number indicator light 1 (the first LED of the LEDs constituting the second reservation indicator 25B) in the second special symbol, and from bit 6, the gate passing memory number indicator light 1 (normal symbol display). A signal is output to each of the LEDs (the first LED among the LEDs constituting the device 20). Then, at the output port DG4, signals from bits 1 to 4 are outputted to each LED making up the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in the output port DG5, signals are output from bits 0 to 4 to each LED that constitutes the round number display 26, and from bit 5, a signal is output to the LEDs that constitute the winning indicator light 27. From bit 6, a signal is output to the LED forming the right-hand drive indicator light 28, and from bit 7, a signal is output to the LED forming the status indicator light 29.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 220 has a performance control data holding area 001SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 001SG190 shown in FIG. 240(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 001SG191, a performance control timer setting section 001SG192, a performance control counter setting section 001SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 001SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 001SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 001SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 001SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 001SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 001SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A as shown in FIG. 240(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 001SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the starting prize receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (the A set of four commands: 1 special figure pending memory number notification command or 2nd special figure pending memory number notification command), symbol designation command, and missed production pattern command are sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. . The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, pending storage number notification commands, and symbol designation commands. , a storage area (entry) is secured for storing the losing effect pattern commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning reception command buffer 001SG194A in this embodiment, there is a pending display flag in which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display, and a flag that is a target of the winning flash effect described later. The storage area is large enough to store the winning flash effect flag, which is set with a flag value indicating whether or not there is a winning flash, in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. , are reserved for each storage area (entry).

If execution of the pending change performance is not determined in the pending change performance determination process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending display is stored in the pending display flag, and the pending change effect is stored in the pending display flag. When it is decided to execute the performance, "1" (blue) or "2" (red) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display in a special mode (for example, blue or red) different from the normal display mode is now set. After the pending change effect determination process is executed, the pending appearance animation process, retention animation process, shift animation process, etc., which will be described later, are further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are displayed in a manner according to each pending display flag. (For example, if the value of the pending display flag is "0", the color is white with a shape that corresponds to the gaming state, and if the value of the pending display flag is "1", the color is blue with a shape that corresponds to the gaming state, and the value of the pending display flag is If it is "2", it is displayed in red with a shape corresponding to the gaming state.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 001SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 001SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and losing performance pattern command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and losing performance pattern command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 240(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol pending memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "1-0", and ” to “1-4”, a pending display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U. In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "2-0", and an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in the buffer number "2-1". A pending display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U based on the data stored in "2-4".

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 241, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), it is determined whether the setting value confirmation condition is satisfied based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is opened or not, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S4). If the setting value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S4; Yes), the currently set setting value is displayed on the display monitor as a setting value confirmation process (step S5).

Then, after executing the set value confirmation process, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step S4; No), after executing the recovery process (step S6), the random number circuit setting process (step S12) is performed. Execute. Through the recovery process in step S8, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

In addition, if the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), it is determined whether the set value setting condition is satisfied based on whether the gaming machine slot 3 is opened or not, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S7). If the set value setting condition is satisfied (step S7; Yes), set value setting processing is executed (step S8). In the setting value setting process of this embodiment, for example, setting values that have been set may be set by operating a touch switch and operating a setting key switch.

After the set value setting process is executed, or if the set value setting condition is not satisfied (step S7; No), it is determined whether the set value confirmation condition is satisfied or not in the same way as in step S4 and step S5. A setting value confirmation process is executed (steps 9 and 10). After executing the set value confirmation process, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step 9; No), after executing the initialization process (step S11), execute the random number circuit setting process (step S12). do.

The initialization process in step S11 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S12), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S13), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S14). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 242. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 242 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning opening switch 24 (step S21). Next, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract various timer values related to the game (for example, the values of the normal symbol process timer, starting opening 2 or more winning error invalidation timer, security information timer, information output extension timer, and illegal winning notification invalidation timer). After executing (Step S22), a starting hole 2 abnormal winnings monitoring process (Step S23) for monitoring whether an abnormal winning to the second starting winning hole has occurred, and whether or not the game ball has entered various winning holes. A winning notification process (step S24) for transmitting a winning designation command based on the occurrence of an abnormal winning and an error command indicating the abnormal winning based on the occurrence of the abnormal winning to the production control board 12, and a winning notification process for notifying the occurrence of a magnet error. Magnet error notification processing (step S25), radio wave error notification processing to notify the occurrence of a radio wave error (step S26), switch error notification processing to check for disconnections or disconnections in the wiring of various switches (step S27), and switch By diagnosing the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing the abnormal error notification process (step S28) and the ejected ball error notification process (step S29) for notifying the ejected ball error, if necessary according to the diagnosis result. It is possible to generate a warning if After this, a random number update process (step S30) for updating at least a part of the random numbers for gaming such as the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result, the random number MR1 and the random number MR6 are performed. A random number update process for initial value determination (step S31) for updating the random value MR7 for determining the initial value of the numerical value MR6, a special symbol process process (step S32) that performs variable display of special symbols, control to jackpot gaming state, etc. ), normal symbol process processing (step S33) that performs variable display of normal symbols, control of solenoids 81 and 82 as opening control of the jackpot in the jackpot game state and second start winning opening control according to the winning of the jackpot. (step S34), jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, starting information (number of starting winnings, etc.) Information output processing (step S35) that outputs data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state etc.), etc.), and awarding prize balls according to the winnings in each winning opening. Prize ball processing (step S36), display processing for setting data for lighting up the LEDs that constitute the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, and the regular figure reservation display 25C (step S37), the game Test terminal processing to output a test signal so that the control state of the machine can be checked outside the gaming machine (step S38), and content related to the connection signal and content related to the solenoid in the RAM area of output port 0 is output to the output port. Output processing (step S39), special symbol display control processing (step S39) that sets special symbol display control data for variable display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data; Step S40), normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for variable display of normal symbols according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data (step S41) , frame state output processing (step S42) of transmitting a command in which information indicating the error state of the gaming machine is set to the production control board 12 in order to display the error state of the gaming machine, etc.; Based on the data, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the normal symbol display 20, the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C, etc. are configured. display control processing to control the lighting of the LED (step S43), setting key confirmation processing to check the status of the setting key switch (step S44), displaying the base value etc. on the display monitor provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. After executing the performance display monitor control process (step S45) and permitting the interrupt (step S46), the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(switch processing)
Next, the switch processing (step S21) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. In this embodiment, when the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passing continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that the switch has indeed been turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch-on is started. FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 102 used in switch processing. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of port 3 input this time are stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which a corresponding bit is set to 1 when a switch is detected to be on, and a corresponding bit is set to 0 when a switch is detected to be off.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch processing in step S21. In the switch process, the CPU 103 first inputs the data input to the input port 3 (step S51), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S52).

Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 102 is set (step 53), and the value of the weight counter is subtracted by 1 until the value of the weight counter becomes 0 (steps S54, S55).

When the value of the wait counter becomes 0, the data of input port 3 is inputted again (step S56), and a logical AND is performed for each bit between the inputted data and the data set in the port buffer (step S56). S57). Then, the result of the AND operation is set in the port buffer (step S58). Through the processing in steps S53 to S58, out of the two input data input from input port 0 at a time interval of approximately [initial value of weight counter x (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], both input data are Only bits that are set to "1" become "1" in the port buffer. That is, when the detection signal of the switch continues to be on for a predetermined period of [initial value of the wait counter x (processing time of steps S54 and S55)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes "1".

Further, the CPU 103 performs exclusive OR on a bit-by-bit basis between the data set in the port buffer last time and the data set in the port buffer (step S59). In the exclusive OR operation result, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) is different from the current switch on/off determination result is " 1”. The CPU 103 further performs a logical product for each bit between the exclusive OR operation result and the data set in the port buffer (step S60). As a result, among the bits (according to the exclusive OR operation result) corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on/off determination result and the switch on/off determination result determined to be on this time are different, the bits that are currently on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined to be ``1'' (based on the logical AND operation) remains.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the logical product calculation result in step S60 in the switch-on buffer (step S61), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the calculation result in step S108 has been set in the previous port buffer (step S62). .

Through the above processing, among the switches that have been in the on state continuously for a predetermined period of time, the switch whose previous switch on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, that is, the switch has changed from the off state to the on state. The bit corresponding to the switch is set to "1" in the switch-on buffer.

(Random number update processing)
Next, the random number update process (step S30) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 245 is a flowchart illustrating an example of random number update processing. In the random number update process, the CPU 103 first specifies the value of the random number counter for judging the special figure display result (the value of the random number MR1) (step 71), and when the value of the random number counter for judging the special figure display result reaches the maximum value. It is determined whether or not (step S72). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result has not reached the maximum value (step S72; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S73). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S72; Y), the minimum value 1 is set in the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result, and the process proceeds to step S75. The process proceeds (step S74).

In step S75, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result (step S75). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are the same value (step S76). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are the same value (step S76; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result That is, the random number MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, is extracted (step S77), and the value of the extracted random number MR7 is used as the random number for determining the special figure display result. At the same time as setting it in the counter (step S78), the value of the extracted random number MR7 is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result (step S79).

After executing step S79, or if the current value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result are not the same value (step S76; N), the CPU 103 The value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result (the value of random number MR6) is specified (step 80), and it is determined whether the value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S81). If the value of the random number counter for ordinary figure display result determination has not reached the maximum value (step S81; N), the value of the ordinary figure display result determination random number counter is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S82). If the value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result has reached the maximum value (step S81; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result is set to 1, which is the minimum value, and the process proceeds to step S84. Proceed (step S83).

In step S84, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the general figure display result with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the ordinary figure display result (step S84). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for ordinary figure display result determination and the initial value of the ordinary figure display result determination random number counter are the same value (step S85). If the current value of the random number counter for ordinary figure display result judgment and the initial value of the ordinary figure display result judgment random number counter are the same value (step S85; Y), the value of the ordinary figure display result judgment random number counter That is, the random number MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number MR6 for determining the result of displaying a common figure, is extracted (step S86), and the value of the extracted random number MR7 is used as the random number for determining the result of displaying a common figure. At the same time as setting it in the counter (step S87), the value of the extracted random number MR7 is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for general figure display result determination (step S88), and the random number updating process is ended. Incidentally, if the current value of the random number counter for determining the display result of ordinary figures and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of ordinary figures display are not the same value (step S85; N), steps S86 to S88 are executed. The random number update process ends without any error.

In this embodiment, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result both take values from 1 to 65536, so in step S74 described above, the special figure display result is Although the value of the random number counter for determination is set to 1, and the value of the random number counter for determining the normal figure display result is set to 1 in step S83 described above, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of possible values of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR6 for determining the regular figure display result is set to 0 to 65535, and in step S74 described above, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure display result is set. 0. In step S83 described above, the values of the random number counters for determining the normal figure display result may be set to 0.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S32 shown in FIG. 242 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the game ball has won in either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole by referring to the input port 3 shown in FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step S100). When a game ball wins in either the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening (step S100; Y), a starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S101).

In the starting port switch passage process, the occurrence of a starting prize is detected, the pending information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and the pending storage number is updated. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. Furthermore, when the reservation information and the number of reservation memories are stored, a production control command is sent to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of reservation memories, and the determination results such as pre-reading determination.

After executing the starting port switch passing process in step S101, or when a game ball has not won in either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port (step S100; N), the CPU 103 stores the data in the RAM 102. Depending on the value of the provided special figure process flag, one of the processes in steps S110 to S116 is selected and executed. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S116) of the special symbol process process, a process of transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result is determined as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, the process of determining the fluctuating pattern into one of multiple types using a random value for determining the fluctuating pattern based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot" ( (variation pattern setting) is also performed.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variable display time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbols. It specifies the contents of the content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "1". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, if the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and if the display result is a "loss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". be done. When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big prize opening pre-opening process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". This pre-opening process includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot to open based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is included. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". The value is updated to "6". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start port switch passage processing)
FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process (S101) shown in FIG. 246. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting opening switch 22A is activated based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether it is on (001SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (001SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (001SGS102). For example, the CPU 103 specifies the first special figure pending memory number by reading the first special figure pending memory count value, which is the stored value of the first special figure pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. I wish I could. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 001SGS102 (001SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 001SG155 is set to "0" (001SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 001SGS101 (001SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 001SGS102 (001SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (001SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (001SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (001SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 specifies the second special pattern pending storage number by reading the second special pattern pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second special pattern pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. I wish I could. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 001SGS105 (001SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 001SG155 is set to "2" (001SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 001SGS103 and 001SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (001SGS107). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the first special figure pending memory number count value is added by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending memory number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending storage number count value is calculated when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. , is updated to increase by 1. In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is calculated when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. , is updated to increase by 1. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (001SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 001SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 001SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. A random number MR2, a random number MR3 for determining a missed performance, a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, a random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern are extracted, and the extracted random number MR1 is sent to the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special figure display result. , the extracted random number MR2 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the jackpot type, the extracted random number MR3 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the winning performance, the extracted random number MR4 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the variation pattern type, and the extracted random number MR5 is placed in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the variation pattern type. Each is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination (001SGS109 to 001SGS118).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the transfer destinations of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B from the starting opening buffer value and the pending memory number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value ( 001SGS119). Then, the random numbers stored in the random number buffer 001SG155A for special figure display result determination, the random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, the random number buffer 001SG155C for losing performance determination, the random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. The numerical values MR1 to MR5 are transferred to the transfer destination set in step 001SGS19 (001SGS120).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the losing performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processes of 001SGS109 to 001SGS120, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining variable display modes including variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols, It is stored as pending information (pending memory).

That is, in the starting port switch passing process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. are extracted, and the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR5 are temporarily stored in the game control buffer setting unit 001SGS155 in the random number buffer 001SG155A for special figure display result determination, the random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, the random number buffer 001SG155C for loss performance determination, It is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination and the random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. Then, as shown in FIG. 311(B), the CPU 103 inserts a random number buffer for special pattern display result determination into the head of an empty entry among the entries with reservation numbers "1" to "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A. Transfer the values of random numbers MR1 to MR5 stored in 001SG155A, random number buffer for jackpot type determination 001SG155B, random number buffer for losing performance determination 001SG155C, random number buffer for fluctuation pattern type determination 001SG155D, random number buffer for fluctuation pattern determination 001SG155E, Stored as a retained memory.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 311, the storage and transfer of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 when a winning occurs in the first starting opening has been explained, but when a winning occurs in the second starting opening, special Random numbers MR1~ stored in random number buffer 001SG155A for diagram display result determination, random number buffer 001SG155B for jackpot type determination, random number buffer 001SG155C for losing performance determination, random number buffer 001SG155D for fluctuation pattern type determination, and random number buffer 001SG155E for fluctuation pattern determination. Since the transfer destination of the value of MR5 is only the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, the explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 247, after executing the winning effect processing (001SGS122), the CPU 103 stores the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. , sends a pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 (001SGS123).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS126), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (001SGS124;N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS125), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Processing when winning a prize)
FIG. 248(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS122 of FIG. 247 as the winning performance process. When the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, it is determined whether or not the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state by special symbol normal processing described later. will be held. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning effect process of step 001SGS112. , it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which winning performance pattern the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. As such, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning performance process shown in FIG. 248(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 001SG152, etc., and determines the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The setting value set is specified (step 001SGS131). In the process of step 001SGS131, for example, it may be determined whether or not the set value is set to a normal value (for example, "1"). Further, when an abnormal value is set as a setting value, a process may be executed to output a command indicating that the abnormal value has been set to the outside.

Following the process of step 001SGS131, the CPU 103 selects and sets the special figure display result determination table (step 001SGS132). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 001SGS109 of FIG. 247 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 001SGS133). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table selected by the process of step 001SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 001SGS133 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 001SGS133; N), in response to the variable display result being "miss", A first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command, is transmitted (step 001SGS134), and the losing performance determination table shown in FIG. 228 is selected (step 001SGS135). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining a losing effect extracted in step 001SGS113 of FIG. 247 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136). If the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is within the determination range of non-reach (step 001SGS136; Y), a winning effect pattern designation command (see Figure 248 (B)) corresponding to non-reach is sent and the winning effect is executed. When the process is finished (step 001SGS144), and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is outside the determination range of non-reach (step 001SGS136; N), it is determined whether the probability change flag is set, that is, the gaming state is likely to change. It is determined whether it is in the state (high-accuracy/high-base state) (step 001SGS137).

If the variable probability flag is set (step 001SGS137; Y), set the variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 229(C) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS141); if the variable probability flag is not set (Step 001SGS137; N) further determines whether or not a time saving flag is set, that is, whether the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state) (Step 001SGS138). If the time saving flag is not set (step 001SGS138; N), set the fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 229(A) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS139).
If the time saving flag is set (step 001SGS138; Y), the fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 229(B) is set and the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS140).

In step 001SGS142, the CPU 103 determines a losing performance pattern based on the variation pattern type determination table set in any of steps 001SGS139 to 001SGS141 and the numerical data of the random number MR4 (step 001SGS42). Then, if the numerical data of the random number MR4 is within the range of the normal reach judgment value, the failure effect pattern command according to the normal reach, and the numerical data of the random number MR4 are judged as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ. If it is within the value range, a losing effect pattern command (see FIG. 248(B)) corresponding to the super reach is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the winning effect process is ended (step 001SGS143).

If the numerical data of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step 001SGS133 (step 001SGS133; Y), the CPU 103 uses the numerical data of the random number MR2 and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 227(A). The jackpot type is determined (step 001SGS145), and a symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type is transmitted to the performance control board 12, thereby terminating the winning performance process (step 001SGS146).

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 246 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 249, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 001SGS151). The second special symbol pending storage number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 001SGS151, it is sufficient to read out the second special figure pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending memory number is other than "0" at step 001SGS151 (step 001SGS151; N), after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (Step 001SGS153), the process advances to Step 001SGS157.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 001SGS151; Y), it is further determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 001SGS154). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 001SGS154, it is sufficient to read out the first special symbol pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; N), after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (Step 001SGS156), the process proceeds to Step 001SGS157. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

In the process of step 001SGS157, the special figure pending storage number count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by 1. For example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation memory count value is -1, and if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the first special figure reservation memory number count value is -1. All you have to do is decrement the number count value by -1.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol determination process (step 001SGS158) for determining whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, and a variation pattern setting process (step 001SGS159) for determining a variation pattern, and then executes a special symbol process. The flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process and the special symbol normal process is ended (step 001SGS160).

In addition, if the first special figure pending storage number is 0 in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; Y), the CPU 103 sends settings and commands (for example, a demo display effect designation command) for executing the demo display effect. Execute and end the special symbol normal processing (step 001SGS161). In addition, when the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands for executing the demonstration display performance in step 001SGS61, although the variable display of special symbols can be executed, the first special symbol pending storage number and the second Since the number of reserved special symbols is 0, the machine enters a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed.

(Special symbol determination process)
FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 249. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 first executes a special symbol buffer shift process (step 001SGS171). The special symbol buffer shift process, for example, as shown in FIG. 251, determines whether the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" or not, that is, the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not (step 001SGS181).

When the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (step 001SGS181; Y), the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A shown in FIG. 237 are replaced with the contents of the entry with reservation number "0". (Step 001SGS182). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reservation number "2" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" (step 001SGS183), and the contents of the entry with reservation number "3" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1". The contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" (step 001SGS184), and the contents of the entry with the reservation number "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "3" ( Step 001SGS185), the contents of the entry of pending number "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are cleared (Step 001SGS186).

In this way, by executing the processing from step 001SGS182 to step 00SGS186, the shift of the upper entry of the pending storage is realized in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A.

Then, in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a first special symbol pending storage number notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored is transmitted to the production control board 12, and the special symbol buffer is The shift process ends (step 001SGS187).

On the other hand, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (step 001SGS181; N), the entry contents of the reservation number "1" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B shown in FIG. 237 are changed to the reservation number "0". It is overwritten as the contents of the entry (step 001SGS188). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reservation number "2" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten as the contents of the entry with reservation number "1" (step 001SGS189), and the contents of the entry with reservation number "3" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten. The contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "2" (step 001SGS190), and the contents of the entry with the reservation number "4" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are overwritten as the contents of the entry with the reservation number "3" ( Step 001SGS191), the contents of the entry of pending number "4" in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are cleared (step 001SGS192).

In this way, by executing the processing from step 001SGS188 to step 00SGS192, the shift of the upper entry of the pending storage is realized in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B.

Then, in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a second special symbol pending storage number notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored is sent to the production control board 12, and the special symbol buffer The shift process ends (step 001SGS193).

That is, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 312(A) to 312(E) and 313(A) to 313(F), the CPU 103 shifts 312, in the example shown in FIG. 313, in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A), regardless of the number of pending memories stored, the stored contents of the entry with pending number "1" are first copied to the entry with pending number "0". Perform the processing to do. Next, the CPU 103 copies the stored contents of the entry with hold number "2" to the entry with hold number "1", and copies the stored contents of the entry with hold number "3" to the entry with hold number "2". The process of copying the stored contents of the entry with the pending number "4" to the entry with the pending number "3" is sequentially executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 313(E), when the special symbol buffer process is executed when the number of pending memories is 4, the stored contents of the entry with pending number "4" are transferred to the stored contents of the entry with pending number "3". When the process of copying to the entry is executed, the same data exists in the entry with hold number "3" and the entry with hold number "4" (the entry with hold number "3" and the entry with hold number "4" The data of the entry with the pending number "4" before the execution of the special symbol buffer process is stored in both. Therefore, in the special symbol buffer process of this embodiment, the number of pending memories is reduced by finally erasing (clearing) the stored contents of the entry with pending number "4".

Furthermore, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, if the number of pending memories is four, the entry with the pending number "3" and the entry with the pending number "4" are separated as shown in FIG. 313(E). Since a situation occurs where the same data exists, it is necessary to execute the process of erasing the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "4", but as shown in Figure 312, the number of reservations stored is 3 or less. In this case, there is no need to execute the process of erasing the stored contents of the entry with reservation number "4". However, if the processing contents of the special symbol buffer shift process are changed depending on the number of pending memories stored, the amount of data for executing the special symbol buffer shift process will increase, so in this embodiment, , common processing regardless of the number of pending memories stored (processing to copy the memory contents of the entry with pending number "2" to the entry with pending number "1", copying the stored contents of the entry with pending number "3" processing to copy to the entry with hold number "2", process to copy the stored contents of the entry with hold number "4" to the entry with hold number "3", and process to erase the stored contents of the entry with hold number "4") By executing this, the increase in the amount of data for executing the special symbol buffer shift process is suppressed.

Returning to the special symbol determination process in FIG. 250, the CPU 103 reads random numbers MR1 to MR5 from the entry of the reservation number "0" in the special symbol buffer according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS172). Then, the set value is specified (step 001SGS173), a display result determination table corresponding to the set value is selected (step 001SGS174), and the read random value MR1 is the jackpot determination value in the selected display result determination table. It is determined whether or not it is within the range (step 001SGS175). In addition, in the process of step 00SGS175, if the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is determined whether the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in these normal state or time saving state, and the gaming state is changed. When is in a variable probability state, it may be determined whether the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the variable probability state.

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the large value judgment value, it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS176). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 227(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 001SGS177). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the read random number MR2 for jackpot type determination and the "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", and "probable variable jackpot" are displayed in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each of the jackpot types of "B" and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types will be used (step 001SGS178).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 001SGS178, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-accuracy-high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is set, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 001SGS179). Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3".

Further, after executing step 001SGS179 or in step 001SGS175, if it is determined that the value of the random number MR1 is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, that is, it is determined to be a "miss" (step 001SGS175; N), the CPU 103 Confirmed special symbols are set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) and the jackpot type determination result when the jackpot gaming state is set. The special symbol determination process ends (step 001SGS180). In the process of step 001SGS180, for example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the two upper and lower LEDs arranged at the left end of the LEDs constituting the special symbol display device are In response to the predetermined result that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the eight LEDs that make up the special symbol display device are lit in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot. What is necessary is to decide (excluding the above-mentioned combinations).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 252 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step 001SGS159 of FIG. 249 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 252, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201). If the variable display result is not a jackpot, that is, a loss (step 001SGS201; N), select the loss performance determination table shown in FIG. A losing performance (presence or absence of a reach performance) is determined based on the selected losing performance determination table (step 001SGS202b). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect (step 001SGS202c).

If you do not want to perform a reach effect as a losing effect, that is, if you want a non-reach variation pattern (step 001SGS202c; N), proceed to step 001SGS202f, and if you want to execute a reach effect as a missed effect, that is, if you want a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach. If a pattern is selected (Step 001SGS202c; Y), a variable pattern type determination table (see FIG. 229) corresponding to the gaming state is selected (Step 001SGS202d). For example, if the gaming state is a normal state, select the variable pattern type determination table A, if the gaming state is a time saving state, select the variable pattern type determination table B, and if the gaming state is a fixed variable state, select the variable pattern type determination table A. Pattern type determination table C may be selected.

Then, based on the random number MR4 read out in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 250 and the selected variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type (ready-to-reach effect to be executed) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS202f (step 001SGS202e).

In step 001SGS202f, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for a loss (see FIGS. 231 to 233) according to the gaming state, number of pending memories, etc., in addition to the above-described loss performance and variation pattern type, and steps The process advances to 001SGS203 (step 001SGS202f).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201; Y), a variable pattern determination table for a jackpot according to the gaming state (see FIG. 234) is selected and the process proceeds to step 001SGS203.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS203, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR5 read out in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 250 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 001SGS203, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 001SGS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 001SGS204, various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol are transmitted (step 001SGS205). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start designation, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. A result designation command and a first special figure pending memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start designation, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A result designation command and a second special figure pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted.

After executing the process of step 001SGS205, a special symbol variable display time which is a variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern setting process is ended (step 001SGS206). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time.

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 246 as the special symbol variation process. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 increments the variable display time timer value by -1 (step 001SGS207), and determines whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 001SGS208a; N), the special symbol fluctuation process is ended, and if the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is It is updated to a value according to the special symbol stop processing and the special symbol variation processing is ended (step 001SGS08b).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S112 of FIG. 246 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 001SGS211). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 (step 001SGS212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS213).

If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS213; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 001SGS214). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Send any of the hit start 4 designation commands (non-probability variable) (step 001SGS215).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 001SGS216).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 001SGS217). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 001SGS218). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S113), and the special symbol stop process is ended (step 001SGS219).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 001SGS213; N), it is determined in step 001SGS220 whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 001SGS220). If the time saving flag is off (step 001SGS220; N), proceed to step 001SGS25, and if the time saving flag is on (step 001SGS220; Y), check whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. Determination is made (step 001SGS221). If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 001SGS221; Y), the process advances to step 001SGS225.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 001SGS221; N), that is, if the time saving number remains in a high base state, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS222). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 001SGS223), and if it is not "0" (step 001SGS223; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 001SGS223; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS225 (step 001SGS224).

In step 001SGS225, a gaming state designation command is transmitted according to the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 001SGS226).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 246 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 001SGS231). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 001SGS231; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 001SGS232), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 001SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 001SGS233). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 001SGS235).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; N), the probability variable flag and time saving flag are turned on (step 001SGS237, step 001SGS238). Further, the time saving number counter is set to "0" (step 001SGS239), and the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; Y), step 001SGS240 and step 001SGS241 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

In step 001SGS242, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted (step 001SGS243). Then, after transmitting a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 001SGS244), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal process, and the jackpot end process is ended (step 001SGS245).

(Display processing)
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S37 of FIG. 242 as the display process. In the display process, the CPU 103 first specifies the starting port buffer value and the special figure process flag value (step 001SGS251, step 001SGS252). In addition, the first special figure pending memory count value and the second special figure pending memory count value, that is, the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number are specified (step 001SGS253). Then, lighting data for the LEDs in the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is set in accordance with the specified contents.

For example, as shown in FIG. 257(A), when the starting opening buffer value is 1 and the number of second special figure reservations is 0, the special figure process flag value is 0 and the number of first special figure reservations is 1. In this case, even if the LED of the first reservation display 25A is turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of reservation memories (1), the variable display based on the reservation memory will be started at the next interrupt, and the LED will turn off. (all the LEDs that make up the first hold display 25A are turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the first hold display 25A is not turned on, and the special figure process flag value is set to 0 to 6. When the number of one special figure pending memory is 2 to 4, even if variable display based on the first special figure pending memory is started at the next interruption, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A Since any one of them lights up, data is set so that the LED of the first hold display 25A lights up in a manner according to the total number of hold memories.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 257(B), when the starting opening buffer value is 1 and the second special symbol pending memory number is one or more, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. From this, data is set so that the LED of the first reservation display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reservation memories, regardless of the special figure process flag value and the number of first special symbol reservation memories.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 257(C), when the starting port buffer value is 2, the special figure process flag value is 0, and when the second special figure pending storage number is 1, the second pending display Even if the LED of the display 25B is turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories (1), the variable display based on the pending memory is started at the next interrupt, and the LED is turned off (the second pending display 25B is turned off). (All the constituent LEDs are turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the second reservation display 25B is not turned on, the special figure process flag value is 0 to 6, and the second special figure reservation memory number is 2 to 4. In the case of 1, even if the variable display based on the 1st 2nd special symbol pending memory is started at the time of the next interruption, any of the LEDs constituting the 2nd pending display 25B will light up. Data is set so that the LED of the second hold display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of memories.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the lighting data of the LED in the ordinary figure reservation display 25C according to the number of ordinary figures pending storage (step 001SGS255).

The data settings for lighting the LEDs of the first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, and regular hold indicator 25C described above include setting the LEDs to turn on at the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 239. It is sufficient to set the corresponding bit to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

Further, the CPU 103 specifies the gaming state, and if the specified gaming state is a jackpot gaming state, further specifies the jackpot type (step 001SGS256). Then, the lighting data of each LED in the round number display 26, hit indicator light 27, right-handed indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 is set according to the gaming state and jackpot type identified, and the display process is completed ( Step 001SGS257).

The data settings for lighting up the LEDs of the round number indicator 26, hit indicator light 27, right hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 are as follows: The bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off may be set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

(Special symbol display control processing)
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S40 of FIG. 242 as the special symbol display control process. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 1, that is, whether or not any special symbol is being displayed variably (step 001SGS261). When the value of the special symbol process flag is not 1 (step 001SGS261; N), the special symbol display control process is ended, and when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 (step 001SGS261; Y), the variable special symbol is specified. The buffer value, that is, which variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed is specified (step 001SGS262), and the value of the variable display time timer is specified (step 001SGS263). Then, according to the specified variable special symbol designation buffer value and variable display time timer value, the lighting data of the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to control the special symbol display. The process ends (step 001SGS264).

The data settings for lighting the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B described above correspond to the LEDs to be lit at the output port DG1 and the output port DG2 shown in FIG. The bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off may be set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0".

Although not particularly shown, in the normal symbol display control process (step S41), the normal symbol display control process (step S41) determines whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed and the value of the variable display time timer of the normal symbol. What is necessary is to set the lighting data of the LED (at the output port DG4 shown in FIG. 239, set the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0").

(Display control processing)
FIG. 259 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S43 of FIG. 242 as the display control process. The display control process is performed by the special figure unit based on the data ("1" or "0" set in the bit of each output port DG shown in FIG. 239) created in the display process and special figure display control process described above. This is a process for lighting up each LED constituting 201. In the display control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the DG counter value is 4, which is the maximum value (step 001SGS271). Note that the DG counter is a counter for selecting which of the output ports DG1, DG2, DG3, and DG4 shown in FIG. 239 to light up the LED, that is, the first special LEDs constituting the symbol display device 4A, LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, LEDs constituting the first pending display 25A, second pending display 25B, and normal symbol pending display 25C, normal symbol display This is a counter for determining which of the LEDs constituting 20 is to be lit.

If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS271; Y), set the DG counter value to 1 and proceed to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS272); if the DG counter value is other than 4 (step 001SGS271; N), , increments the DG counter value by 1 and proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS273).

In step 001SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether the DG counter value is 1 or not. When the DG counter value is 1 (step 001SGS274; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG5 is stopped (step 001SGS275), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG1 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS276). In other words, when the DG counter value is 1, by outputting a drive signal from the output port DG1, the LEDs (LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG1 are activated. Performs lighting control.

If the DG counter value is not 1 (step 001SGS274; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277). When the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG1 is stopped (step 001SGS278), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG2 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS279). In other words, when the DG counter value is 2, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG2, the LEDs (LEDs forming the second special symbol display device 4B) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG2 are activated. Performs lighting control.

If the DG counter value is not 2 (step 001SGS277; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280). When the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG2 is stopped (step 001SGS281), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG3 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS282). In other words, when the DG counter value is 3, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG3, the LEDs (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) according to each bit of the output port DG3 , and controls the lighting of the LEDs constituting the general figure hold display 25C.

If the DG counter value is not 3 (step 001SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283). When the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283; Y), the output of the drive signal from the output port DG3 is stopped (step 001SGS284), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG4 is started to perform display control processing. (Step 001SGS285). In other words, when the DG counter value is 4, by outputting a drive signal from the output port DG4, lighting control of the LED (the LED forming the normal symbol display 20) is controlled according to each bit of the output port DG4. I do.

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 4 (step 001SGS283; N), it is assumed that the DG counter value is 5, and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG4 is stopped (step 001SGS286), and the output of the drive signal from the output port DG5 is stopped. The output of the drive signal is started and the display control process is ended (step 001SGS287). In other words, when the DG counter value is 5, by outputting the drive signal from the output port DG5, the LEDs (round number indicator 26, hit indicator light 27, right-handed Controls the lighting of the LEDs constituting the indicator light 28 and status indicator light 29.

That is, in this embodiment, the LEDs that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A, the LEDs that constitute the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, and the ordinary symbol reservation display The LEDs constituting the device 25C, the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display 20, the round number display 26, the hit indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are controlled at the interrupt cycle of the CPU 103. By changing the LED to be emitted every 4 ms, a 16 ms off state and a 4 ms on state are periodically repeated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a starting prize is generated by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 242, as shown in FIG. After the determination of the occurrence of the starting prize and the transmission of the command (starting opening winning designation command) corresponding to the occurrence of the starting prize, display processing and display control processing are executed, thereby displaying the hold display corresponding to the starting winning. Light emission control of (first hold indicator 25A or second hold indicator 25B) is started.

In addition, when the variable display of special symbols is executed, as shown in FIG. After the transmission of is executed, display processing and display control processing are executed, so that light emission control in the mode after subtraction of the number of pending memories is started on the pending display in response to the start of the variable display. It has become.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 260(C), the special symbol display control process and the display control process are executed to display the special symbol according to the variable display. After the light emission control of the device is started, subtraction of the variable display time (variable display time timer) is started in the special symbol variation process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 creates a pending memory that can specify the number of pending memories including the new pending memory based on the occurrence of a new pending memory while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the new pending storage has occurred (for example, pending storage). You may send a memory number increase notification command) to the production control CPU 120. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first sub-holding display 151A and the second sub-holding display 151B according to the number of pending memories based on the reception of the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command and pending storage number increase notification command. The light may be turned on in a certain manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 a pending memory number notification command that can specify the number of pending memories after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the CPU 103 simply sends a command indicating that the number of pending memories has decreased (for example, based on the start of variable display of special symbols). A memory number reduction notification command) may be sent to the production control CPU 120. In addition, the production control CPU 120 causes the first sub-holding display 151A and the second sub-holding display 151B to variably display special symbols based on the reception of the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command and pending storage number decrease notification command. The light may be turned on in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories after the start of the process.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 261. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S153). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S153; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command captured at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S153 (step S153; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S154), and command analysis processing is executed (step S155). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S155, the production control process process is executed (step S156). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S156, a performance random number update process is executed (step S157), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S157), a demonstration performance control process (step S158) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an operation to accept the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A are performed. A reception control process (step S158a) and a background display update process (step S159) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S153. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

In addition, in the demonstration production control process, the production control CPU 120 receives a command (for example, a demonstration display production designation command) from the CPU 103 to execute the demonstration display production, so that no new pending memory is generated. Control is executed to display a guidance display on the image display device 5 on the condition that 30 seconds (3000ms) have elapsed, and an image is displayed on the condition that 30 seconds (3000ms) have elapsed without any new pending storage. What is necessary is to execute control to display an image of a demonstration display effect on the display device 5. Furthermore, if a new pending memory occurs while images of guidance display or demonstration display effects are being displayed, control may be executed to stop displaying the images of these guidance displays or demonstration display effects.

In addition, in the operation reception process, the production control CPU 120 uses the push button 31B or Based on the reception of the operation of the stick controller 31A, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and further, by accepting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A while the menu screen is displayed, the speaker 8L is activated. , 8R may perform control to change the volume of the sound output and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control is performed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on a change in the game state or a decision to change the production mode at the start of variable display. is now possible.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S156 of FIG. 261 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 261, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a performance mode determination process (step S160) for determining the performance mode when executing the variable display, which is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U. A pending change performance determination process (step S161) that determines the display mode of the pending display and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F, and the gaming effect lamp 9 indicates that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled based on the occurrence of a starting prize. A winning flash effect process (step 162) for executing a flash effect at the time of entry that is continuously suggested by the light emission of the button vibration effect for executing a button vibration effect in which the push button 31B is driven by the vibration motor 36. processing (step S163), appearance animation processing (step S164) for displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U, and displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. Retention animation processing (step S165), for moving (shifting) the pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 5U toward the previous display position on the pending storage display area 5U or the active display area 5F. Shift animation processing (step S166), termination animation processing (step S167) for ending the display of the active display in the active display area 5F, and the LED constituting the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B. A sub-pending indicator lighting control process (step S168) is executed to control lighting based on the number of pending memories. The sub-holding display lighting control process is also a process of updating the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory in the display area 5S, which will be described later. After the end animation process is executed, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. In addition, in the variable display performance processing in this embodiment, lighting control of the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is also executed. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends. In addition, the process of step 172 in this embodiment also performs the process for executing variable display of small symbols in the display area 5S, which will be described later.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. " and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Production mode)
As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, performance modes A to D are provided, and performance mode A and performance mode B are performance modes that can be selected when the gaming state is the normal state, Performance mode C is a performance mode selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and performance mode D is a performance mode selected when the gaming state is a variable probability state.

In the production mode determination process, when the gaming state is the normal state, the production mode is set to production mode A at the start timing of the first variable display in the normal state. In addition, at the second and subsequent variable display start timings in the normal state, if the set production mode is production mode A, the production mode is set to production mode B by lottery, and the set production mode is set to production mode A. If it is mode B, the production mode is set to production mode A by lottery.

In addition, in the performance mode determination process, when the jackpot game state ends, the performance mode is set to performance mode C based on the reception of the game state designation command indicating the time saving state from the CPU 103, and the probability change state is set from the CPU 103. The production mode is set to production mode D based on receiving the game state designation command shown in FIG.

Although the details will be described later, in the production mode A to production mode D in this embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display mode of decorative patterns, the display mode of active display and pending display, etc. Each one is different.

(Pending change effect determination process)
FIG. 264 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the pending display and active display in the pending change effect determination process shown in FIG. 262. In the pending change performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 240(B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, specify the variable display result from the symbol designation command in that entry and the deviation effect from the deviation effect pattern command in this entry, and specify the deviation effect from these specified variable display results. Based on this, whether or not to execute the pending change effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of the pending display and the active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 264, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% not to execute the pending change effect, and at a rate of 25% it is determined to execute the pending change effect in performance pattern A. Then, at a rate of 70%, execution of the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is determined. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is non-reach, 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 5% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. It is determined that the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is to be executed at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is normal reach, 75% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. Then, the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is decided to be executed at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the off performance pattern is super reach, 65% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending change performance, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the pending change performance with performance pattern A. It is determined that the performance pattern B of the pending change performance is to be executed at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag of the entry as " 0", and if it has been decided to execute the pending display notice performance in performance pattern A, set "1" as the value of the pending display flag of the entry, and execute in the performance pattern B of the pending display notice performance. If execution has been determined, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

In addition, in the pending change performance determination process in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the pending change performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be changed depending on the symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot. Although the present invention is not limited to this, if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type may be variable jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C, or non-probable variable jackpot. The execution or non-execution of the pending change performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be varied depending on whether the jackpot is reached, or the determination rate of the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be changed depending on whether or not the probability variable state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pending change performance and the performance pattern of the pending change performance may be varied. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to whether or not the pending change performance is to be executed and in which performance pattern the pending change performance is to be executed.

In this embodiment, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A as described above, the performance control CPU 120 performs the appearance animation process (step S164), retention animation processing (step 165), and shift animation processing (step S166), if the value of the hold display flag is set to "0", the hold display or the hold display according to the hold display flag is set. If the active display is displayed in white and has a shape that corresponds to the production mode, and the value of the pending display flag is set to 1, the pending display or active display that corresponds to the pending display flag will have a shape that corresponds to the production mode. In addition, it is displayed in blue, and when "2" is set as the value of the hold display flag, the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed in red and in a shape corresponding to the performance mode.

With these settings, when the pending display and active display are displayed in blue in display pattern A or red in display pattern B, the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state more than when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. When the percentage of winnings (expectation of jackpot) increases, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in red in display pattern B, compared to when the pending display and active display are displayed in blue in display pattern A. Since the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) increases, players should pay attention to the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, that is, whether or not pending change effects are executed and the performance pattern. can be done.

(Flash effect processing when winning a prize)
FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the winning flash effect process shown in FIG. 262. In the winning flash performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. Determination is made (step 001SGS301). If there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N), it is further determined whether there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is already set to "1", that is, It is determined whether the winning flash effect has already been executed for other reserved memories (step 001SGS302).

If there is no pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1", the winning flash is generated from the symbol designation command and the losing effect pattern command stored as pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set. It is determined whether or not to perform the performance (step 001SGS303).

For example, as shown in FIG. 266, if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 60%. do. In addition, if the symbol designation command is missed and the missed effect pattern command is non-reach, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 0%. . Further, when the symbol designation command is missed and the missed performance pattern command is normal reach, non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 100%, and execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is missed and the missed effect pattern command is super reach, the non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 001SGS304). When it is decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 001SGS304; Y), the winning flash effect flag in the pending memory is set to "1" and the process proceeds to step 007SGS307 (step 001SGS305), in which the winning flash effect is disabled. When it is determined to execute (step 001SGS304; N), "0" is set as the winning flash effect flag in the pending memory and the process proceeds to step 001SGS307 (step 001SGS306).

If there is no pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N) or after the processing of steps 001SGS305 and 001SGS306 is executed, the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 240(B) is With reference to , it is determined whether or not there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is "1" (step 001SGS307). If there is a pending memory with the winning flash effect flag set to "1" (step 001SGS307; Y), whether or not the winning flash effect flag is being displayed variably according to the pending memory set to "1"; In other words, it is determined whether or not the pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is stored in the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the starting winning receiving command buffer 001SG194A. (Step 001SGS308). If the winning flash effect flag is not being displayed in a variable manner according to the hold memory set to "1" (step 001SGS308; N), the process advances to step 001SGS310, and the hold memory for which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is not in progress (step 001SGS308; N). If the variable display is in progress according to the memory (step 001SGS308; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is before the reach by referring to the process table of the variable display being executed. (Step 001SGS309). If the variable display is at a timing before the reach (step 001SGS309; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS310.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS310, the blinking control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the winning flash effect process is ended (step 00SGS310). In addition, if there is no pending memory of the winning flash effect flag being "1" (step 001SGS307; N) or if the variable display is at a timing after reach (step 001SGS309; N), the process of step 001SGS310 is executed. The flash effect processing when winning a prize ends without doing so.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the occurrence of a starting prize, the gaming effect lamp 9 is made to emit light as a flash effect at the time of winning, thereby suggesting that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but a plurality of light emission patterns and light emission colors of the game effect lamp 9 are provided as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a jackpot game state is determined according to the light emission pattern and light emission color of these game effect lamps 9. The proportion controlled by the jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may be made different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a mode in which the game effect lamp 9 emits light as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lamp different from the game effect lamp 9 (e.g. , a lamp dedicated to the winning flash effect) may be provided, and a lamp different from the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light for the winning flash effect.

(Button vibration effect processing)
FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the button vibration effect processing shown in FIG. 262. In the button vibration performance, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a button vibration performance execution flag indicating that the button vibration performance is being executed is set (step 001SGS321). If the button vibration effect execution flag is not set (step 001SGS321; N), it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 001SGS322). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 001SGS322; Y), it is further determined whether or not a first starting slot winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323). If the first starting opening winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration production process is finished, and if the first starting opening winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323; Y), the The first special figure pending memory number is specified with reference to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in 240(B) (step 001SGS324).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the normal state (step 001SGS322; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state (step 001SGS325). If the gaming state is neither a time saving state nor a variable probability state, that is, if the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state (step 001SGS325; N), the button vibration production process is ended, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (Step 001SGS325; Y) further determines whether or not a second starting opening winning designation command has been received (Step 001SGS326). If the second starting opening winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS326; N), the button vibration production process is finished, and if the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326; Y), the The second special figure pending memory number is specified with reference to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in 240(B) (step 001SGS327).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the number of pending memories specified in step 001SGS324 or step 001SGS327 is three or more (step 001SGS328). That is, in step 001SGS328, if the gaming state is the normal state, it is determined whether the first special symbol pending memory number is 3 or more, and if the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the second special symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of stored figures is 3 or more. If the specified number of pending memories is 2 or less (Step 001SGS328; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the specified number of pending memories is 3 or more (Step 001SGS328; Y), the button vibration effect is executed. The execution flag is set (step 001SGS39), a button vibration effect execution timer is set, and the button vibration effect processing is ended (step 001SGS330).

Then, when the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 drives the vibration motor 36 by executing the vibration motor control process (step 001SGS331). The push button 31B is vibrated by driving the vibration motor 36, and the value of the button vibration performance execution timer is decreased by 1 (step 001SGS332), and it is determined whether the button vibration performance execution timer has timed out ( Step 001SGS333). If the button vibration effect execution timer has not timed out (Step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is finished, and if the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (Step 001SGS323; Y), the button vibration effect is being executed. The flag is cleared and the button vibration effect processing is ended (step 001SGS334). In other words, the button vibration effect in this embodiment is performed for a predetermined period when the number of first special symbols held in memory becomes three in the normal state, and when the number of second special symbols held in memory becomes three in the time saving state or variable probability state. This is an effect for notifying that the number of pending memories approaches the upper limit of four by vibrating the push button 31B for (for example, 5 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, a button vibration effect is executed based on the number of second special symbols pending storage being three or more, and the second special symbol is displayed. Although the present invention is exemplified to notify that the number of pending memories approaches the upper limit of 4, the present invention is not limited to this. Since this is a gaming state in which winnings are won, the button vibration effect may not be executed in these time-saving states and in variable probability states.

(Sub hold display lighting control process)
FIG. 268 shows the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display for each situation in which the production control CPU 120 receives the start winning designation command in the sub-pending display lighting control process (step S168) shown in FIG. 262. 151B is a diagram showing a lighting control mode of 151B. In the sub-pending display lighting control process, whether or not to light up the LEDs constituting the first sub-pending display 151A and the second sub-pending display 151B is varied depending on the received starting winning designation command and the number of pending memories. ing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 268(A), when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 when the first starting opening winning designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 sets the production process flag value to 0. If this is the case, that is, the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, and the pending memory does not exist other than the first special symbol pending memory based on the winning of the new first starting prize opening. In this case, since the variable display of decorative symbols based on the first special symbol reservation memory is immediately executed, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservation memories in the first sub reservation display 151A. (Control for lighting only one LED of the first sub-hold display 151A) is not executed. On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of first special figure pending memories is 2 to 4, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, but the first special figure pending memory is a new start. If there is a reserved memory other than the one based on winning, or if the production process flag value is one of 1 to 7, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, that is, regardless of the number of reserved memories. During the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols including the execution of the variable display start setting process or during the jackpot game, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first sub-reservation display 151A. Execute.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 268(B), when the number of second special symbols pending when the first starting opening winning designation command is received is one or more, that is, the game is newly entered into the first starting winning opening. When the ball wins and the second special symbol pending storage number is one or more, the production control CPU 120 determines that the next variable display of the decorative symbol is based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, regardless of the performance process flag value or the first special figure pending memory number, control is executed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the first special figure pending memory number in the first sub-suspension display 151A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 238(C), when the second starting opening winning designation command is received, that is, regardless of the number of reserved first special symbols, the game ball newly enters the second starting winning opening. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance process flag value to 0, the second special figure pending memory number to 1, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state where the jackpot game is not in progress, and the second special figure is pending. If there is no memory other than the reserved memory based on a new starting winning, the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second special symbol reserved memory is immediately executed, so the second special symbol is displayed on the second sub-reserved display 151B. Control to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of pending memories (control to light only one LED of the second pending display 25B) is not executed. On the other hand, if the production process flag value is 0 and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 to 4, that is, the variable display is not executed in a state that is not a jackpot game state, but the second special figure pending memory is a new start. If there is a reserved memory other than the one based on winning, or if the production process flag value is one of 1 to 7, and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, that is, regardless of the number of reserved memories. During execution of variable display of decorative symbols, including execution of variable display start setting process, and jackpot game, control is performed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second sub-reservation display 151B. Execute.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 262. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341). If the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 001SGS342). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start designation reception flag is off in step 001SGS341 (step 001SGS341; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343). If the second variable display start designation reception flag is off (step 001SGS343; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 001SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 001SGS344). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 001SGS342 or step 001SGS344, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 001SGS345).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 001SGS346). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 001SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern, a combination in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, a combination such as "767", etc. Determine the combination (missing symbol) that will result in the out-of-reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 001SGS346, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern specification command (step 001SGS347), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table ( Step 001SGS348).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 001SGS349). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 001SGS350). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 001SGS351). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern at the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 001SGS352).

(Period related to processing by CPU 103 and production control CPU 120)
Here, a period related to processing executed by CPU 103 and production control CPU 120 (and display control unit 123) in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 270(A), the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 242 every 4 ms. That is, the CPU 103 in this embodiment determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred every 4 ms, and executes special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, etc. In addition, the CPU 103 sets 500 ms after the variable display of the special symbol as a symbol confirmation period and a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Furthermore, in addition to the periodic 12ms off state and 4ms on state in the display control process (step S43), the CPU 103 controls the lighting/extinguishment of the LEDs constituting the special symbol at 40ms intervals, with one period of 320ms. Execute (see FIG. 236(A)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270(A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process shown in FIG. 244 every 2 ms. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment determines which command has been received from the CPU 103 every 2 ms (command analysis process), the performance control process process, the performance random number update process, the demonstration performance control process, Executes background display update processing, etc. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch between lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs constituting the first performance display light 152A and the second performance display light 152B at intervals of 240ms, with one period of 480ms (FIG. 236) See B).

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 in this embodiment requires a period of 33 ms (image drawing period) to draw an image, and updates the image displayed on the image display device 5 to a new image. The period (image update period) is 33 ms. That is, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is updated approximately 30 times per second (30 FPS).

(Production mode details)
Next, production mode A to production mode D will be explained. As mentioned above, performance mode A and performance mode B are performance modes that can be set when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and performance mode C is the performance mode that can be set when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability low base state). The production mode D is a production mode that is set when the gaming state is a probability variable state (a high probability high base state). In each production mode in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending display and active display displayed on the image display device 5, the execution period of various animations, and whether or not they are executed are different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 270(B), the appearance animation of the pending display is executed for 660 ms (20 frames) in production mode A and production mode B, and is executed for 165 ms (5 frames) in production mode C. In production mode D, the process is executed for 99ms (3 frames). Note that the appearance animation of these pending displays may be shortened as described later.

In addition, the retention animation of the pending display and active display is repeatedly executed with one period of 2970ms (90 frames) in production mode A and production mode B, but is not executed in production mode C and production mode D. ing.

The ending animation of the active display is commonly executed in 165 ms (5 frames) in presentation mode A to presentation mode D.

(Display mode of each production mode)
As shown in FIG. 271 (A1), in production mode A, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents a daytime city scene. The first background image 001SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 271 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. executed.

Specifically, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom of 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative designs increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", and from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative patterns is executed by displaying the decorative patterns "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and small symbols are displayed. In the suspended storage display area 5U and active display area 5F, a suspended display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed are displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for active display, "W" for first pending display, "F" for second pending display, and "L" for third pending display). ", and in the fourth pending display, it is displayed as a cube containing "II (Roman numeral 2)") (see FIG. 285(A)).

In addition, in this embodiment, each time a new pending memory occurs, the characters displayed in the new pending display are always regularly arranged in the order of P→W→F→L→II→P→W... It's about to change. For example, if the number of pending memories is 0 and four new pending memories occur in succession during variable display of special symbols, if the character in the active display is "P", 1 in the pending memory display area 5U. The letter for the second hold display is "W," the letter for the second hold display is "F," the letter for the third hold display is "L," and the letter for the fourth hold display is "II." becomes. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol ends in this situation and the variable display of a new special symbol ends, the pending display containing the letter "W" is shifted to the active display area 5F as the active display, and the pending memory display is In area 5U, the hold display containing the letter "F" shifts to the display position of the first hold display, and the hold display containing the letter "L" shifts to the display position of the second hold display. Then, the hold display including the characters "II" is shifted to the display position of the third hold display. Furthermore, if a new pending memory (fourth pending memory) is generated in this state, a pending display containing the letter "P" will be displayed at the display position of the fourth pending display in the pending memory display area 5U. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the characters "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II" are displayed in the active display and the pending display in the order in which pending storage occurs. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, for example, if there is one or more suspended memory when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage state, the active memory immediately before the power outage occurs. The sequence of characters in the display or pending display (for example, "F", "L", "II", "P", "W" or "II", "P", "W", "F", "L") ''), the characters in the active display or pending display may be displayed in a predetermined order (for example, "P", "W", "F", "L", "II"). In addition, these 1st special figure pending memory number, 2nd special figure pending memory number, small design, pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so they will be explained below. omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271 (B1), in production mode B, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the landscape of the wilderness at daytime. The second background image 001SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 271 (B2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a frame so as to approach the center of the screen from the top of the left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the top of the right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and then moved downward. It moves away from the left and right sides of the screen and is displayed frame-out laterally from the lower left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. The inner decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and then displayed in a frame-out manner.

Further, the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Sometimes, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, when the preceding "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but the preceding "2" decorative pattern is visible. After the decorative pattern passes the stop position, the subsequent "3" decorative pattern and "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, and "L" for the third pending display). ", and in the fourth pending display, "II") is displayed as a regular octahedron (see FIG. 285(A)).

As shown in FIG. 271 (C1), in production mode C, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the evening cityscape. The third background image 001SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 271 (C2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

Specifically, the decorative pattern in production mode C has a first side and a second side which is the opposite side to the first side, and the first side has a preceding decorative pattern (for example, "3"). Decorative designs) are displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces forward, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side.

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, second surface, first surface, second surface, etc. , the number increases in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9" it returns to "0" and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

Also, when the second side is displayed after being rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from the state where the first side is facing forward, the decorative pattern displayed on the first side (for example, "3") is displayed on the second side. A subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") is displayed. Next, although not particularly illustrated, when the first surface is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b is facing forward, the first surface displays the information displayed on the second surface 5b. A decorative pattern (for example, a "5" decorative pattern) subsequent to the decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 001SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. In the lower left part, time saving remaining display 001SG202 (in this example, characters "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed is displayed.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending and active displays are indicated by letters (for example, "P" for active display, "W" for first pending display, "F" for second pending display, and "L" for third pending display). ", and in the fourth pending display, "II")) (see FIG. 285(A)).

As shown in FIG. 271 (D1), in production mode D, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative pattern represents the scenery of the night city. A fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 271 (D2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line until it moves to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and The frame is displayed downward from the bottom of 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing through the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative designs increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", and from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative patterns is executed by displaying the decorative patterns "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promotion of right-handed hitting operations.

Furthermore, in the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. Display is displayed. These pending displays and active displays are the same as in production mode C (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "F" for the third pending display, etc.). While it is displayed as a sphere containing the letter "L" in the pending display and "II" in the fourth pending display, the difference is that the color scheme inside these spheres and the color scheme of the letters contained are reversed. (See Figure 285(A)).

(appearance animation)
Next, the appearance animation of the hold display in each production mode will be explained. In this embodiment, "animation" refers to, for example, a dynamic display that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image (one frame). It may be a video display) in which the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation" includes not only display that involves image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also "fade-out display". It also includes displays such as "display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone.

In this embodiment, the "appearance animation" means that when a new pending memory is generated due to a game ball entering the starting winning hole, the pending memory is placed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. This is an animation for displaying a pending display in response to the occurrence of. As shown in FIG. 272 and FIG. 285(B), when a starting prize occurs in production mode A and execution of the pending change effect is not determined based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in white. In this case, based on the occurrence of the starting winning, a new pending display moves from a lower position on the front side of the pending storage display area 5U to an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U. When the hold display reaches the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U, it descends toward the position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U, and finally reaches the position above the hold memory display area 5U. It is displayed in a position according to the number of pending memories. In other words, if a starting winning occurs in production mode A and execution of the pending change performance is not determined based on the starting winning, the pending display will draw a parabola from the lower position on the near side of the pending memory display area 5U. Move to.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 274, the pending display moves in a parabolic manner with the apex above the active display or pending display that is already displayed, so the appearance of the white pending display in production mode A. The animation is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of active display or pending display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 274, in the appearance animation when a starting winning occurs in production mode A and execution of the pending change effect is not determined based on the starting winning, the pending display is displayed in the first frame image. It is displayed with high transparency (for example, the transparency of the pending display in the first frame image is 90%), and as the appearance animation progresses, the transparency of the pending display gradually increases to 80%, 60%, and 40%. %, etc. In the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation, the transparency becomes 0% as the final mode of the pending display, and the display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 273 and FIG. 285(B), when a starting winning occurs in production mode A and it is decided to execute a pending change effect based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in blue or red. If so, an effect is displayed at an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the effect descends toward the pending storage display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a blue or red pending display gradually decreases transparency and moves toward the pending memory display area 5U instead of the effect. and descends. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display when it is decided to execute the pending change production in the production mode A starts displaying the pending display in a larger size than the active display or pending display that is already displayed, and It is also an animation that gradually reduces the size of the pending display as the display moves (descends).

Although not particularly shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in production mode A start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move toward the pending memory display area 5U. (descending), the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display in production mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of the active display or the pending display.

As shown in FIGS. 276 and 285 (B), when a starting prize occurs in production mode B and it is decided not to execute the pending change effect based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in white. In this case, an effect is displayed at an upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the effect descends toward the pending storage display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a white pending display gradually decreases in transparency in place of the effect and descends toward the pending memory display area 5U. I will do it. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Note that the effect in this appearance animation disappears five frames after the start of the animation, but the hold display continues to descend even after the effect disappears. Then, when a predetermined period of time (15 frames in the case of the animation) has elapsed after the effect disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

Although not particularly shown, the white pending display and effects in production mode B start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move (descend) toward the pending memory display area 5U. ) and move, the appearance animation of the white pending display in production mode B is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the stay animation of the active display and the pending display.

As shown in FIGS. 277 and 285 (B), when a starting winning occurs in production mode B and it is decided to execute a pending change effect based on the starting winning, that is, the pending display is displayed in blue or red. In this case, the effect is displayed in the upper position of the pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the effect is held It descends toward the memory display area 5U. At this time, while the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, a blue or red pending display gradually decreases transparency and moves toward the pending memory display area 5U instead of the effect. and descends. In other words, the effect and the pending display move down together toward the pending storage display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, a pending display is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display when it is decided to execute the pending change production in the production mode B starts displaying the pending display in a larger size than the active display or pending display that is already displayed, and It is also an animation that gradually reduces the size of the pending display as the display moves (descends).

Although not particularly shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in production mode A start displaying from a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move toward the pending memory display area 5U. (descending), the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display in production mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the staying animation of the active display or the pending display.

As shown in FIGS. 273 and 277, when displaying a blue or red pending display in production mode A and production mode B (when executing a pending change production), the first frame image of the appearance animation is By displaying the effect at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U, the player can understand that the hold display that will be displayed from now on is the hold display that is subject to the hold change effect, that is, compared to the case where a white hold display is displayed. It can also be recognized that the percentage of games that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high. Furthermore, until the 9th frame of the appearance animation, the transparency of the pending display is set to be high so that the player cannot recognize whether the pending display is blue or red. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the displayed color is blue or red, that is, how high the rate of control to the jackpot gaming state is.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 273 and 277, when displaying a blue or red pending display in production mode A and production mode B (when executing a pending change production), frames 1 to 19 are displayed as appearance animations. In other words, when displaying a blue pending display in production mode A, when displaying a red pending display in production mode A, when displaying a blue pending display in production mode B, A common effect is displayed in a total of four appearance animations when displaying a red pending display in production mode B. Therefore, when displaying the pending display in blue or red in production mode A or production mode B, it is possible to standardize the image data used for these appearance animations, which is necessary to execute the appearance animation. The amount of data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 278, FIG. 279, and FIG. 285, when a new starting winning occurs in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, first, based on the starting winning, the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U is The effect will be displayed at the corresponding position. The effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as the appearance animation progresses. Then, at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U, instead of the effect, the pending display is displayed in an enlarged manner while reducing the transparency. Then, when the effect disappears, the reduction in transparency and enlargement of the pending display also end.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 278 and 279, between the appearance animation in production mode C and the appearance animation in production mode D, the appearance animation in production mode C takes more time from the start of display to the disappearance of the effect. The period is set to be long, and the period required from the start of display of the hold display to the end of enlargement is set to be long.

(staying animation)
Next, the retention animation of the hold display and active display in each production mode will be explained. The "stay animation" in this embodiment operates the active display in the active display area 5F during variable display of special symbols in a manner according to the production mode (rotation for production mode A, rotation for production mode B, Animation that does not operate in C and D) and an animation that operates the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U in a manner according to the production mode (rotation in production mode A, rotation in production mode B) when there is one or more pending memories. This is an animation that includes an animation that is made to move, and an animation that does not operate in production modes C and D.

As shown in FIGS. 280(A) and 285(B), the staying animation in production mode A is an animation in which the hold display and the active display are rotated clockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. The staying animation in the production mode A is repeatedly executed with one cycle being 90 frames. In addition, in the stay animation in the production mode A, the characters in the pending display or active display also rotate according to the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 280(B) and 285(B), the stay animation in production mode B rotates the hold display and active display clockwise and counterclockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. This is an animation that rotates alternately. The retention animation in this production mode has one cycle of 90 frames, and in the first 45 frames, the hold display and active display are rotated counterclockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front, and in the latter 45 frames, the hold display and active display are rotated counterclockwise around the vertical axis. The active display can be rotated clockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. In addition, in the staying animation in the production mode B, the characters in the pending display or active display also rotate according to the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, the performance mode C and the performance mode D in this embodiment, that is, the time saving state and the variable probability state, are once compared to the normal state in which the hold display and the active display are displayed in the performance mode A and the performance mode B. Since the time required for the variable display of the area is set short, the retention animation of the pending display and active display is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suspended animation in production mode C and production mode D is also executed. A dwell animation of the display or active display may be performed.

Note that the stay animation in this embodiment is an animation that is displayed in one cycle at 90 frames (2970 ms), that is, at about 30 frames per second (frame rate is about 30 FPS). Here, since the stay animation is an animation that is viewed by the player for a longer period of time than the appearance animation and end animation, there is a desire to show the action of the hold display in a leisurely manner. Furthermore, by producing the appearance animation at a frame rate of approximately 30 FPS, there is an advantage that not only is it easier to develop the game machine, but also that it is easier for the developer to imagine the actual operation of the hold display. For the above reasons, the staying animation in this embodiment is produced as an animation with a frame rate of 30 FPS, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the staying animation is produced at a frame rate lower or higher than 30 FPS. It can also be used as a rate animation.

(End animation)
Next, the end animation of the active display in each production mode will be explained. The "end animation" in this embodiment terminates the display of the active display according to the variable display when the variable display of the special symbol ends (stops) (disappears the active display from the active display area 5F). It's an animation. As shown in FIG. 281(A) to FIG. 281(D) and FIG. 285(B), the end animation in each production mode is an animation executed in the active display area 5F, and the finished variable display This is an animation in which the transparency of the active display corresponding to , gradually increases, and completely disappears from the active display area 5F at the 5th frame.

Although the end animation of this embodiment is executed in a common manner in each production mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the end animation can be changed in each production mode. It is also possible to perform weekly rainfall animations that are common but have different aspects in each production mode.

(shift animation)
Next, the shift animation of the hold display in each production mode will be explained. "Shift animation" in this embodiment means that the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is activated in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol. The animation of moving toward the display area 5F and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U are suspended in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol. An animation that moves the display area 5U toward the position corresponding to the first pending memory, and a new special animation that moves the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. An animation that moves the symbol to the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of the symbol, and a movement to the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. This animation includes an animation of moving the currently displayed pending display toward a position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 282, FIG. 284, and FIG. 285(B), the shift animation is an animation that is executed when the active display in the active display area 5F disappears (display ends) due to the end animation described above, and is suspended. The pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the memory display area 5U is displayed as the next active display in the active display area 5F, and the pending display is displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. The hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U is in a position corresponding to the first hold memory, and the hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U is in a position corresponding to the third hold memory. The pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U and the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is 3 in the pending memory display area 5U. A movement display (shift) is simultaneously executed to a position corresponding to the retained memory of the eyes.

As shown in FIG. 283, if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed, first, the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is A pending display (a pending display in the final form of the appearance animation) is displayed at the corresponding position without executing the appearance animation. From this state, only the movement display (shift) of the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F is executed as a shift animation.

As shown in FIG. 275, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory in the active display area 5F and the pending memory display area 5U are separated by a length L1. The position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the second reserved memory, the position according to the third reserved memory, the position according to the third reserved memory, The corresponding position and the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory are separated by a length L2 (L1>L2), which is shorter than the length L1. Therefore, in the shift animation of this embodiment, the pending display that is shifted to the active display area 5F as an active display corresponding to the next variable display is shifted faster than other pending displays.

As shown in FIGS. 282, 283, and 284, in this embodiment, shift animations in production mode A and production mode B have been described, but shift animations in production mode C and production mode D are similar to production mode A. Since this is the same as the shift animation in production mode B, the explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, although FIG. 283 is an explanatory diagram when a shift animation is executed in a state where the number of pending memories is one in production mode A, the same applies when the number of pending memories is one in production mode B. A shift animation is executed.

(About the display mode of the pending display when a new pending memory occurs)
Next, the display mode of the pending display when a new pending memory occurs due to the winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole will be explained for each situation. In addition, for the following forms, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the number of second special symbols held is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. We will explain whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol at the time, the number of first special symbols pending, and the pending display based on the number of first special symbols pending. This also applies to the execution or non-execution of variable display of the second special symbol, the number of second special symbol pending memories, and the pending display based on these second special symbol pending memory numbers when in a variable probability state.

(Shortened appearance animation details)
Next, shortening (hereinafter sometimes referred to as skipping) of the above-described appearance animation of the hold display will be explained. The following explanation will be mainly based on the appearance animation of effect pattern A, but since the appearance animations of effect patterns B to D differ only in the execution period, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 286(A) and 286(B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, a new pending memory is generated, and based on the pending memory, non-execution of the pending change effect is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 receives a pending storage number notification command based on the occurrence of the pending storage, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the display of a new pending display appearance animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

Here, as shown in FIG. 286(A), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is 660 ms or more, the suspended display draws a parabola over 660 ms (20 frames). The images of all the frames moving towards the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U are displayed, and finally the pending display moves to the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U as the final mode. will be displayed. Then, when the next variable display starts, the effect control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), so that the first frame of the shift animation by the display control unit 123 is Image drawing begins. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, display of the shift animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 286(B), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is less than 660 ms, the part of the appearance animation that is still in progress at the next variable display start timing is The frame image (the 14th frame image in the diagram of FIG. 286(B)) is displayed. In addition, when the next variable display starts, the effect control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), so that the first frame of the shift animation by the display control unit 123 is Image drawing begins. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the shift animation from the next image update timing in place of the appearance animation that has been executed up to that point.

At this time, the images that have not been displayed as the appearance animation (the images of frames 16 to 20 in the diagram of FIG. 286(B)) are not displayed as they are, and the display of the shift animation is started. The hold display displayed as the first frame of the shift animation is the final form of the hold display displayed as the appearance animation (displayed as the 20th frame image at a position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U). The image has the same appearance as the pending display). Therefore, when a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, the player may notice that the pending display, which had been displayed moving in a parabolic manner as the appearance animation up to that point, suddenly appears on hold in the pending memory display area 5U. It will be displayed at a position corresponding to the number of memories, and will be visually recognized as shifting to a shift animation.

In addition, in FIGS. 286(A) and 286(B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, a new pending memory is generated, and based on the pending memory, it is decided not to execute the pending change effect. As shown in FIGS. 287(A) and 287(B), a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and a pending change effect is created based on the pending memory. 286(A) and FIG. 286(B), if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the blue color While the appearance animation of the red pending display is executed for 660ms, the blue or red pending display appears in response to the production control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation. The animation is interrupted (skipped), and a blue or red pending display shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 288(A), when the number of pending memories is 0 and the symbol confirmation period of the variable display has already ended, a new When a suspended memory occurs (when the number of suspended memories is 0 and a new suspended memory occurs at the timing immediately before the next variable display), the performance control CPU 120 notifies the number of suspended memories based on the occurrence of the suspended memory. Upon receiving the command, the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the display of a new pending display appearance animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 288(A), variable display based on a new suspended memory is started while the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is being drawn. When the control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start designation command), the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. When the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, display of the shift animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, when the image of the first frame appearance animation is displayed, the images of the second to 20th frames of the appearance animation are not displayed, but are displayed as the images of the shift animation. As an image in which the first hold display in area 5U (a hold display in the same manner as the hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) shifts toward active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display. It will be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288(B), when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately after the end of the variable display symbol confirmation period that has already ended, that is, the symbol confirmation period is When a new suspended memory is generated within 33 ms after the termination, a performance control CPU 120 receives a suspended memory number notification command or a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the generation of the suspended memory. As a result, the display control unit 123 gives priority to drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, but the image of the first hold display (image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation) in the hold storage display area 5U is displayed as the image of the shift animation. The hold display (in the same manner as the hold display) will be displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 289, when the number of pending memories is 0 and sufficient time has passed since the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display that has already ended, that is, 33ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period. If a new pending memory occurs at the timing that has elapsed above, the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command or a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the generation of the pending memory. As a result, the display control unit 123 gives priority to drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

Therefore, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, but the image of the first hold display (image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation) in the hold storage display area 5U is displayed as the image of the shift animation. The hold display (in the same manner as the hold display) will be displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, when the number of pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new pending memory (N+1th pending memory) occurs just before the end of the variable display of the special symbol, The appearance animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is started at the position corresponding to N+1 pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. When the variable display of a new special symbol is started during the execution of the appearance animation, a movement display (shift animation) of the pending display according to the Nth pending memory is executed in the pending memory display area 5U. At this time, the appearance animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is still in progress, so the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is moved and displayed while continuing the appearance animation (executing a shift animation). (hereinafter referred to as the first plan), and not moving and displaying the screen until the appearance animation is completed (hereinafter referred to as the second plan).

Here, in the first proposal, since the moving display and the appearance animation of the pending display according to the new pending memory proceed simultaneously, the moving display and the appearing animation of the pending display according to the new pending memory proceed simultaneously. There is a problem in that both of these items are difficult for players to see. In addition, in the second proposal, in the pending memory display area 5U, a situation occurs in which the pending display is not displayed between the pending display for which the moving display has already been completed and the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory, and a new If the pending memory is the fourth pending memory, the pending display does not start moving from the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U until the appearance animation is completed, so the player cannot request a new pending memory. Even though variable display of special symbols has started, it may be mistakenly recognized that the number of reserved symbols remains at the upper limit of four, and there is a risk that the player may temporarily stop playing the game.

For the above reasons, in the present invention, when a new pending memory occurs during execution of the appearance animation of the pending display, the appearance animation is interrupted (skip), so that the shift animation and appearance animation of the pending display can be visually confirmed. This reduces the possibility that the player will misunderstand the number of reservations displayed in the reservation storage display area 5U while ensuring the accuracy of the game.

Below, the display mode of the image display device 5 according to the timing at which a new pending memory occurs, the lighting control of each pending display, and the transmission and reception of commands will be explained based on FIGS. 290 to 303. In addition, FIGS. 290 to 303 illustrate a state in which the gaming state is a normal state, the number of second special symbols pending is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, but the gaming state is a time-saving state or In the definite variable state, the state where the number of first special symbols pending is 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, only the target special symbol for variable display is different, and the display mode of the image display device 5 and each pending display are different. The lighting control of the device and the sending and receiving of commands are the same and will therefore be omitted.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation starts 660ms or more before the start of the next variable display)
First, as shown in FIG. 290, when the number of first special symbol pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special symbol pending memory occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 , performs lighting control of the first reservation display 25A according to the number of reservation memories including the new first special figure reservation memory. In addition, the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to perform the first special symbol suspension memory at the timing when the new suspension memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol suspension memory). Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms symbol confirmation period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and displays the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Executes lighting control. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 290, if the appearance animation is started at a timing when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start timing of the next variable display, the drawing of the image of the appearance animation and the appearance animation display period are the next. ends before the start of the variable display, and instead starts the staying animation of the pending display displayed by drawing the image of the staying animation and the appearance animation.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 calculates the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. Identification is performed, and lighting control of the first sub-retention display 151A is performed in accordance with the identified first special figure reservation memory number. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of a staying animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(When a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660ms until the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in FIG. 291, when the number of first special figure pending memories is N (3≧N≧1), a new first special figure pending memory is generated, and until the next variable display starts. A case will be described in which the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660 ms.

For example, if a new first special figure pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is N (3≧N≧1), the CPU 103 Lighting control of the first reservation display 25A is performed according to the number of reservation memories including special figure reservation memories. In addition, the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to perform the first special symbol suspension memory at the timing when the new suspension memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol suspension memory). Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special symbol pending memory number from the first special symbol pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, and a shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation, so that 33 ms has not passed since the new suspended memory occurred. By starting a new variable display during a period in which the appearance animation is not executed, the pending display as the final mode in the appearing animation is performed at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without executing the appearing animation. Display will start. Moreover, as the shift animation in this case, only the pending display excluding the newly started displaying of the pending display needs to be shifted.

Here, since the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command have been received during the display period of the appearance animation, the production control CPU 120 will display the first sub-pending display. At the same time, the display control unit 123 starts drawing a shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the appearance animation of the pending display ends midway from the player's point of view, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation. The screen is displayed and the shift animation is visually recognized as being executed.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation after the end of a variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 and after the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 292, during the shift animation when the first special symbol pending memory number is N (3≧N≧1) and after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol and after the start of the next variable display, A case where a new first special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Furthermore, while starting the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 is instructed to start the first variable display and to 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

When a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to perform the first special symbol suspension memory at the timing when the new suspension memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol suspension memory). Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command based on the generation of new pending memory during the execution of the shift animation, the production control CPU 120 starts from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. The number of first special figure pending memories is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-reserve display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When a new pending memory occurs within 33ms after the start of the next variable display after the end of variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3)
Next, as shown in FIG. 293, after the first special symbol pending memory number is N (3≧N≧1) and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, a new special symbol is displayed within 33ms after the start of the next variable display. 1 A case where special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A in accordance with the subtracted pending memory number. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory, the first special symbol pending memory number notification command is The number is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending storage number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When a new pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33ms before the start of the next variable display after the end of a variable display where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3)
Next, as shown in FIG. 294, when the first special symbol pending storage number is N (3≧N≧1) and after the end of variable display of the first special symbol, a new one is created at a timing of less than 33 ms until the start of the next variable display. A case where the first special figure pending storage occurs will be explained.

First, as shown in FIG. 294, when a new first special symbol pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special symbol pending memories is N (3≧N≧1), the CPU 103 , performs lighting control of the first reservation display 25A according to the number of reservation memories including the new first special figure reservation memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends in less than 33 ms from the generation of a new pending memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and displays the first pending display 25A in accordance with the number of pending memories after the subtraction. Executes lighting control. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, by starting a new variable display within a period of less than 33 ms after the occurrence of a new pending memory, the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is displayed without the appearance animation being executed. Display of the pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation will start at a position corresponding to the number N. Moreover, as the shift animation in this case, only the pending display excluding the newly started displaying of the pending display needs to be shifted.

(If a new starting prize occurs while the number of pending memories is variable displaying 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 295, a case will be described in which a new starting prize (winning into the first starting winning hole) occurs during variable display of the first special figure pending storage number of four pieces.

As shown in FIG. 295, if a new start winning occurs while the number of 1st special figure pending memory is variable displaying 4 pieces, since the number of 1st special figure pending memory is already 4 pieces which is the maximum number. A new first special figure pending memory is not generated. Therefore, when the variable display and symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and displays the first pending display 25A according to the subtracted pending memory number (3 pieces). Executes lighting control. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(If a new pending memory occurs during the shift animation of the next variable display after the number of pending memories is 4 variable displays)
Next, as shown in FIG. 296, after the variable display of the first special symbol whose number of first special symbols is 4 is finished, a new first special symbol is displayed during the shift animation after the start of the next variable display. A case in which memory occurs will be explained.

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). . Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory while the shift animation is being executed, the production control CPU 120 starts from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. The number of first special figure pending memories is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-reserve display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number (4 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending storage display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(If a new starting prize occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the variable display with the number of pending memories of 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 297, a case will be explained in which a new starting prize (winning into the first starting winning hole) occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the first special figure pending storage number of four pieces. .

As shown in FIG. 297, during the pattern confirmation period after the variable display of the first special symbol pending memory number of four, the state in which the first special symbol pending memory number is four is maintained. In addition, since the upper limit for the number of 1st special figure reservations is 4, even if a new starting prize (winning into the 1st starting prize opening) occurs during the symbol confirmation period, a new 1st special figure reservation will be held. Memory does not occur. Therefore, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories and executes lighting control of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). do. Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(If a new pending memory occurs within 33ms of the start of the next variable display after the number of pending memories is 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 298, a case will be explained in which, after the end of the variable display in which the number of first special figure pending memories is 4, a new first special figure pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display. .

First, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories after the subtraction (3 pieces). . Furthermore, while starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first variable display start instruction are sent to the performance control CPU 120. 1. Sends a command to notify the number of reserved special drawings.

Then, when a new pending memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories (4 pieces) including the new first special figure pending memory. conduct. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first special figure pending storage number from the first special figure pending storage number notification command. , performs lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A according to the identified first special figure holding memory number (3 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command based on the generation of a new pending memory, the first special symbol pending memory number notification command is The number is specified, and the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending storage number (4 pieces). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started at a timing before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. In addition, as an appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a moving display of the pending display is performed over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed as the final mode according to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U. will be displayed in the specified position.

(When a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts 660ms or more before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 299, a new pending memory occurs during a variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of 660 ms or more before the start of the next variable display. A case in which it is started will be explained.
First, as shown in FIG. 299, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs while the number of first special figure pending memories is variable and displayed, the CPU 103 updates the pending memory including the new first special figure pending memory. The lighting control of the first hold indicator 25A is performed according to the number (one). In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms symbol confirmation period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and sets the first special symbol pending memory number (0) according to the subtracted pending memory number. The lighting control of the hold display 25A is executed. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 and the display of the appearance animation is started at the next image update timing. Note that, as the appearance animation, a moving display of the pending display is started toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories of 1 in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 299, if the appearance animation is started at a timing when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start timing of the next variable display, the drawing of the image of the appearance animation and the appearance animation display period are the next. It ends before the start of the variable display of , and instead, the staying animation of the pending display displayed by drawing the image of the staying animation and the appearance animation starts.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 calculates the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command. Identification is performed, and lighting control of the first sub-retention display 151A is performed in accordance with the identified first special figure reservation memory number (0 pieces). Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of a staying animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

(When a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts at a timing of less than 660ms until the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in FIG. 300, when the first special figure pending memory number is 0, a new first special figure pending memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts from a timing of less than 660 ms until the start of the next variable display. The following describes the case in which this is started.

For example, if a new first special figure pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 Lighting control of the first hold indicator 25A is performed according to the number of memories (one). In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol pending memory number, and executes lighting control of the first pending display 25A according to the pending memory number (0 pieces) after the subtraction. . Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, since the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure reservation memory number notification command have been received during the display period of the appearance animation, the first special figure reservation by the production control CPU 120 The lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A according to the storage number (0 pieces) is executed, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the appearance animation of the pending display ends midway from the player's point of view, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation. The screen is displayed and the shift animation is visually recognized as being executed.

(If a new pending memory occurs less than 33ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 301, regarding the case where a new first special figure pending memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0. explain.

First, when a new first special symbol pending memory occurs at a timing of less than 33 ms after the symbol confirmation period, the CPU 103 displays the first pending display 25A according to the number of pending memories including the new first special symbol pending memory. Without executing the lighting control, after adding 1 to the number of 1st special symbols pending, subtracting 1 from the number of 1st special symbols pending, and starting variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol). Then, based on the start of variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first special symbol pending storage number notification command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

When the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received, the production control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub pending display 151A according to the first special figure pending storage number. By controlling the display control unit 123 without executing it, the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the movement display (appearance animation) of the pending display toward the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is not executed, and Display of a pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation is started at a position corresponding to the first appearance animation. Then, the pending display is moved (shifted) toward the active display area 5F immediately after the display starts.

(If a new pending memory occurs within less than 33ms until the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display where the number of pending memories is 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 302, regarding the case where a new first special figure pending memory occurs in less than 33 ms until the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0. explain.

First, as shown in FIG. 302, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs during the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 stores the new first special figure. Lighting control of the first reservation indicator 25A is performed according to the number of reservation memories (one) including the figure reservation memory. In addition, at the timing when the new pending memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol pending memory), the CPU 103 instructs the performance control CPU 120 to Sends the special figure pending storage number notification command.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends in less than 33ms from the generation of a new pending memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol pending memories, and selects the The lighting control of the hold display 25A is executed. Further, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and also instructs the performance control CPU 120 to start the first variable display based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol. Specify and send the first special figure pending storage number notification command.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the production control CPU 120 receives the first pending storage notification command at most 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first pending storage notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it specifies the first special figure pending memory number from the first special figure pending memory number notification command, and Lighting control of the first sub-holding display 151A is performed according to the number of drawings holding memory (one).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the generation of a new first special symbol pending memory.

Here, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are received during the drawing period of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, the first special figure The first special figure pending memory number is specified from the figure pending memory number notification command, and the lighting control of the first sub-hold display 151A is performed in accordance with the specified first special figure pending memory number. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of a shift animation instead of an image of an appearance animation. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, by starting a new variable display within a period of less than 33 ms after the occurrence of a new pending memory, the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is displayed without the appearance animation being executed. The display of the pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation will start at the position corresponding to the one item. Further, as a shift animation in this case, the newly started display of the pending display is shifted toward the active display area 5F.

(If a new pending memory occurs more than 33ms after the end of the symbol confirmation period for a variable display with a variable display with a pending memory count of 0)
Next, as shown in FIG. 303, a new 1st special figure pending memory occurs at a timing of 33 ms or more after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 1st special symbol whose number of 1st special figure pending memories is 0. Let's explain the case. First, as shown in FIG. 303, when a new first special figure pending memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more has passed after the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 After adding 1 to the 1st special figure holding memory number, subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure holding memory number, and making the 1st holding according to the number of holding memories (1 piece) including the new 1st special figure holding memory. The variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol) is started without executing the lighting control of the display 25A, and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control The first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending storage number notification command are transmitted.

As described above, the variable display of the first special symbol in the present embodiment is performed by lighting one LED out of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display device 4A for 40 ms, and then lighting it at 40 ms intervals. The target LED is changed and one cycle (320 ms) is repeated until all eight LEDs are turned off.

When determining that the production control CPU 120 has received the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command, it determines that the first variable display start designation and the first special figure pending memory number notification command have been received. Then, while starting the variable display of the sub-symbols, the display control unit 123 controls the display control unit 123 without executing the lighting control of the first sub-pending display 151A according to the number of first special pattern-pending memories. 123 to start drawing the shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the movement display (appearance animation) of the pending display toward the position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U is not executed, and Display of a pending display as the final aspect of the appearance animation is started at a position corresponding to the first appearance animation.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the sub-symbols in this embodiment is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the LED constituting the first effect indicator light 152A at intervals of 240 ms (one cycle: 480 ms). .

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of first reserved special symbols is 0, the variable display is not executed, and the demo movie display is displayed as a guidance display regarding production adjustment, - As shown in FIG. 304(C), when a new pending memory is generated by the game ball entering the first starting slot, first, variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this time, the CPU 103 updates the count value of the first special symbol pending storage number from 0 to 1 in the starting port switch passing process, and also updates the count value of the first special symbol pending storage number from 0 to 1 in the special symbol normal process executed in the same interrupt as the starting port switch passing process. In order to update the count value of the number of 1 special figure pending memory from 1 to 0, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A lights up (lights up in a manner indicating that the number of 1st special figure pending memory is 1) I never do.

In addition, in the starting gate switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a pending memory number notification command indicating that the first special symbol pending memory number is one to the production control CPU 120, but in the starting gate switch passing process In order to send a pending memory number notification command indicating that the first special symbol pending memory number is 0 in the special symbol buffer shift process executed in the same interrupt as A pending storage number notification command indicating that the number is 1 and a pending storage number notification command indicating that the 1st special figure pending storage number is 0 are received in the same interrupt, and the 1st sub The LED constituting the reservation display 151A does not light up (lights up in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbols reserved is one), and furthermore, the number of first special symbols reserved stored in the display area 5S does not change. The display is also not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 304(C), the CPU 103 sets special symbol display control data for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display control process in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data (see FIG. By setting "1" or "0" to each bit of the output port DG1 shown in 239), variable display of the special symbol is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 305(D) to 305(F), when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the variable pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation, the first variable display as the sub-symbol variable display is Lighting/lighting out control of the LEDs constituting the performance indicator light 152A is started. Note that the variable pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation are commands that the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 in the fluctuation pattern setting process.

When 33ms to 66ms have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the variable pattern designation command or the first variable display start designation, the demo movie display fades out and then disappears, and the normal background image and decorative pattern are displayed. Ru. Further, in the pending storage display area 5U, the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a completed state without going through the appearance animation (see FIG. 305(E)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(F), in the pending storage display area 5U, a shift animation of the pending display to the active display area 5F is started. Further, with the start of the shift animation, variable display of small symbols is started, and scrolling display of decorative symbols is started. Although not shown in detail, when the scroll display starts, the decorative pattern starts moving downward at low speed, then increases to medium speed, then high speed, and the transmittance increases. The display gradually increases and fades out.

In this embodiment, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is started after the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the small pattern is not limited to this. The decorative pattern variation starting action (not shown) may be started without starting the scroll display of the decorative pattern from the start until the shift animation ends. The fluctuation start action may be, for example, a pre-movement in which a character displayed on a decorative pattern moves or a decorative pattern moves upward before being displayed moving downward.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 306(G) to 306(I), following FIGS. 304 and 305, when the game ball enters the first starting slot during the variable display of the first special symbol, a new pending memory is created. When this occurs, the CPU 103 updates the first special symbol pending memory number count value to 1 in the starting port switch passage process. In addition, in the same interrupt as the starting port switch passing process, the CPU 103 does not update the first special symbol pending memory number count value to 0, so the CPU 103 does not update the bit of the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 239 in the display process. Set 0 to 0 and bit 3 to 1. As a result, based on the generation of a new pending memory, the LED constituting the first pending display 25A starts lighting (lit in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is one). Moreover, at this time, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol pending memory number notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol pending memory number is one to the performance control CPU 120.

Next, when the production control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol pending memory number notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol pending memory number is one from the CPU 103, it displays the first sub pending display 151A. The constituting LEDs are turned on in a manner corresponding to the fact that the first special figure pending storage number is 1. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first special figure pending storage number in the display area 5S to "1". That is, in the present embodiment, when a new pending memory is generated, the display of the first special figure pending memory number in the display area 5S is updated from a timing later than the lighting timing of the LED of the first pending display 25A. Therefore, the player can visually check the display of the first special figure pending memory number in the display area 5S after confirming the winning of the game ball, so it is easy to understand that the pending memory number has increased.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 307(J) to (L), in the image display device 5, an appearance animation of a pending display is started in response to a newly generated pending memory.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 310, based on the generation of a new pending memory, it is possible to execute a pending change effect, a winning flash effect, a button vibration effect, and an appearance animation. ing. Among these, the pending change performance is a performance that is executed from the occurrence of a pending memory until the stop timing of the variable display of the prefetch target (variable display based on the pending memory), and the winning flash performance is the performance that is executed from the occurrence of the pending memory to the stop timing of the variable display of the prefetch target. This is a performance that is executed until the reach timing of the variable display (variable display based on the suspended memory), and the button vibration performance is a performance that is executed for a certain period of time (for example, 3000 ms) from the occurrence of the suspended memory, The appearance animation is a performance that is executed for a maximum of 600 ms from the occurrence of the pending memory.

Each of these effects can be executed regardless of the effect mode A to effect mode D. Furthermore, while the pending change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are all effects that will not be interrupted even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start designation, the appearance animation This effect is interrupted when the CPU 120 receives the variable display start designation command.

In other words, in the hold change effect, winning flash effect, and button vibration effect, the timing at which a new hold memory occurs during execution of variable display of special symbols with the number of hold memories being N (3≧N≧1) is A timing at least 660 ms before the display execution period of the appearance animation until the next variable display starts, a timing at which the display execution period of the appearance animation is less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, and a pending memory. When the variable display of N special symbols ends, the performance control CPU 120 issues a variable display start designation command at any timing within 330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation, from the start timing of the shift animation. This is a performance that is executed until the end without being interrupted due to the reception of the message.

In addition, in the above, as shown in FIG. 304(B), when the number of first special symbols pending is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, when the demo movie display is displayed as a guide display regarding production adjustment. An example of the performance operation when a new pending memory is generated due to the game ball entering the first starting slot has been described, but for example, FIGS. 308(A) to 308(C) and FIGS. 309(D) to As shown in 309(E), the menu guide display and the volume/light intensity guide display are performed when the first special figure pending storage number is 0 and the variable display is not executed and before the demo movie display starts. The same applies to an example of the performance operation when a new pending memory is generated by a game ball entering the first starting slot while is being displayed.

(Mode of superimposed display of pending display)
Next, in production modes C and D, a new 1st special symbol is stored until 33ms have elapsed after the symbol confirmation period for the variable display of the 1st special symbol whose number of 1st special symbols is stored is 4. The hold display when storage occurs will be explained based on FIG. 314.

As shown in FIG. 314(A), during variable display, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and a pending display is displayed in the first to fourth display positions in the pending memory display area 5U. There is. Next, as shown in FIG. 314(B), when the variable display ends, the end animation of the active display is executed during the symbol confirmation period, and the active display is faded out and hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(C), when a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending storage display area 5U is started, the first variable display in the pending storage display area 5U starts. The pending display displayed at the second display position is the next active display in the active display area 5F, and the pending display displayed at the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U is the next active display. The hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is displayed at the first display position, and the hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is displayed at the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U. A shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed at the eye display position is moved (shifted) to the third display position in the pending storage display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 314(D), if a new suspended memory occurs immediately after the new variable display is started, for example, before 33 ms have elapsed since the new variable display was started, At the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U, an appearance animation of a pending display corresponding to a new pending memory is started.

Here, the shift animation of the fourth pending display moving toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is drawn in the third pending display image drawing area, while The appearance animation of the new pending display that appears at the fourth display position in the storage display area 5U is the fourth pending display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area. It is drawn in.

In other words, the pending display that has already been displayed at the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has started moving toward the third display position, and the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U. If the newly displayed pending display and is displayed at the same time, the pending display that is subject to the shift animation will be displayed with priority over the pending display that is subject to the appearance animation. Therefore, it can be recognized by the shift animation that the pending display has moved from the fourth display position to the third display position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(E), as the hold display moves from the fourth display position to the third display position due to the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the new hold display becomes smaller. The appearance animation of the pending display becomes visible.

In addition, in FIG. 314, in production modes C and D, a new first special symbol is not displayed until 33 ms has elapsed after the end of the symbol confirmation period for the variable display of the first special symbol whose number of first special symbols pending memory is 4. We have explained the mode of reservation display in the case where 1 special figure reservation memory occurs, but as shown in FIG. The mode of the pending display in the case where a new first special symbol pending memory occurs before 33ms elapses after the end of the display symbol confirmation period is different only in the display position where the new pending display is displayed. , the other display modes are almost the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Although not particularly shown, in production modes C and D, by the time 33 ms has elapsed after the end of the symbol confirmation period for the variable display of the first special symbol with the first special symbol pending storage number of 1 or 2. Even in the case where a new first special figure pending memory is generated, the only difference is the display position where the new pending display is displayed, and the other display modes are almost the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, in production modes C and D, the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the first special symbol with the number of first special symbol pending memories of 3 ends, and the new symbol is displayed within 33ms until the start of the next variable display. The reservation display when 1 special figure reservation storage occurs will be explained based on FIG. 316.

As shown in FIG. 316(A), during variable display, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and a pending display is displayed in the first to third display positions in the pending memory display area 5U. There is. Next, as shown in FIG. 316(B), when the variable display ends, the end animation of the active display is executed during the symbol determination period, and the active display is faded out and hidden.

Here, just before the end of the symbol confirmation period, that is, at a timing when it is less than 33ms before a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U starts, a new When a first special figure pending memory occurs, the pending display corresponding to the new first special figure pending memory is not displayed until a new variable display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316(C), the pending display displayed at the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U is transferred to the active display area 5F as the next active display, and the second pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is The hold display displayed at the second display position is the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U, and the hold display displayed at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is the hold memory display. At the same time, a shift animation display that moves (shifts) is started at the second display position in the area 5U, and at the same time a shift animation display corresponding to a new pending memory is started at the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. A pending message is displayed. In this case, the pending display is displayed as the final aspect of the appearance animation without executing the appearance animation.

Here, the shift animation of the third pending display moving toward the display position of the third pending display in the pending memory display area 5U is drawn in the second pending display image drawing area, while The new pending display appearing at the third display position in the storage display area 5U is drawn in the third pending display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area. be done.

In other words, the pending display that has already been displayed at the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has started moving toward the second display position, and the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. If a new hold display is displayed at the same time as a new hold display, the hold display that is subject to the shift animation will be displayed with priority over the newly appearing hold display. The shift animation allows the user to recognize that the pending display has moved from the third display position to the second display position.

As shown in FIGS. 316(D) and (E), as the hold display moves from the third display position to the second display position due to the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller. The new hold display becomes visible.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the embodiment described above, when the number of pending memories is N (3≧N≧1) and variable display is being executed, one game ball enters the starting hole and a new pending memory is generated. Although the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 317 as a modified example, when two game balls consecutively enter the starting slot, , if the first and second new pending memories occur just before the end of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts less than 600ms before the start of the next variable display, Based on the first pending memory, the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the appearance animation is also suspended based on the reception of the variable display start designation command by the production control CPU 120. The display is changed to the final mode, and an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the second pending memory, and the production control CPU 120 issues a variable display start designation command. The pending display may be changed to the final mode based on the reception of the message.

In addition, if the first and second new pending memories occur immediately after the start of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts 600ms or more before the start of the next variable display. executes an appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and changes the pending display to the final state based on the end of the appearing animation. Based on the second pending memory, an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to the final state based on the end of the appearance animation. Bye.

In addition, the first new suspended memory occurs just before the end of the variable display, the appearance animation of the suspended display based on the suspended memory starts less than 600ms before the start of the next variable display, and the second new suspended memory If a pending memory occurs after the start of the next variable display, an appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and the effect is controlled. Based on the CPU 120 receiving the variable display start designation command, the pending display changes to the final mode, and appears in the pending memory display area 5U at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 based on the second pending memory. What is necessary is to execute the animation and change the pending display to the final mode based on the end of the appearance animation.

Further, in the embodiment, if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed, the pending display based on the new pending memory is temporarily changed to the pending memory display area 5U. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, FIG. ) and as shown in FIG. 318(B), if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed, the appearance animation or shift animation is not executed. The pending display may be directly designated to be displayed in the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270(B), the display period of one cycle of the retention animation of the hold display is 2970 ms, the display period of the shift animation of the hold display is 330 ms, and the display period of the end animation of the active display is displayed. Although a mode in which the period is 165 ms is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, the display period of one cycle of the retention animation of the hold display may be an integer number of seconds (for example, 3000 ms, 6000 ms, etc.). Good too.

Further, in the embodiment, the display periods of both the shift animation of the hold display and the end animation of the active display are less than 1000 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shift animation of the hold display is The display period of at least one of the animation and the end animation of the active display may be set to 1000 ms or more.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Moreover, in the embodiment, by allowing the game ball to enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole or the normal winning hole 10. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot game state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than in the normal state. A time-saving state or a variable probability state may be set as an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to a player such as the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
a retention storage means;
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The performance control means is
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In the first period and the second period, controlling the third light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table,
The reservation storage means is capable of storing information regarding the variable display up to a predetermined number as a reservation storage,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display if there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display when the variable display ends;
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform performances corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of types of suspension display including a first mode suspension display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode suspension display corresponding to the second mode when the suspension memory is stored,
When the suspended memory is stored during the first mode, a first mode start mode, a first mode completion mode, and a first mode pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the first mode completion mode are stored. The first mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of first mode intermediate modes including:
When the pending memory is stored during the second mode, a second mode start mode, a second mode completion mode, and a second mode pre-completion mode, which is a mode immediately before the second mode completion mode, are stored. The second mode pending display can be displayed by changing stepwise a plurality of second mode intermediate modes including:
The hold display corresponding to the hold memory already stored during the variable display corresponds to the next variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts. It is possible to move it to the desired position,
During execution of the variable display when the number of pending memories is N, which is a variable display in a situation where N pending memories that are less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, the N+1 number is displayed. The first mode pending display is started in the first mode starting mode at the corresponding pending display position, and the first mode is completed after the first mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change in the mode over the predetermined period;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, the N+1 number is displayed. The second mode pending display is started in the second mode starting mode at the corresponding pending display position, and the second mode is completed after the second mode starting mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. displaying the second mode pending display by performing a change in the mode over the predetermined period;
When the first mode is in effect and the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is to be displayed, the number N+1 is displayed. Start the first mode hold display in the first mode start mode at a hold display position corresponding to the first mode, and change the first mode start mode to a first mode midway mode different from the first mode completion mode, When the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the first mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the first mode, the mode is changed to the mode completed in the first mode based on the timing. displaying the first mode pending display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is to be displayed, the number N+1 is displayed. Start the second mode hold display in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the second mode, and change the second mode start mode to a second mode midway mode different from the second mode completion mode, When the next variable display is started in a situation where the mode is in the middle of the second mode, which is different from the mode before completion of the second mode, the mode is changed to the mode completed in the second mode based on the timing. displaying the second mode pending display;
The device is in the first mode, the variable display for the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the first mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate modes. displaying the first mode pending display by performing a change to later change the first mode completion mode over the predetermined period;
The device is in the second mode, the variable display of the number N of pending memories ends, and a new pending memory is stored until the specific period elapses from the pending shift start timing, and the second mode pending display is displayed. In this case, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the second mode start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate modes. The game machine displays the second mode pending display by executing a change to later change to the second mode completion mode over the predetermined period.

Images